Alfawiki.nl

Alfawiki.nl

Dear Client,Thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.
Your Alfa 156 has been designed to guarantee the safety, comfort and driving pleasure typical of Alfa Romeo.
This booklet will help you to get to know the characteristics and operation of your car.
The following pages contain all the indications necessary for you to be able to maintain the high standards of performance, quality, safety andrespect for the environment which characterize this Alfa 156.
The Warranty Booklet also contains the regulations, the warranty certificate and a guide to the services offered by Alfa Romeo.
Services which are essential and precious because, when you purchase an Alfa Romeo you are not only acquiring a car, but the tranquility thatcomes from knowing that an efficient, willing and widespread organization is at your service for any assistance problems you may have.
Whats more every single component of the Alfa 156 is fully recyclable. At the end of your car’s useful lifespan any Alfa Romeo dealer
would be pleased to make arrangements for you car to be recycled (in compliance with current regulations in force).
Nature benefits in two ways: there’s no pollution from waste disposal, and the demand for raw materials is reduced.
Have a good trip.

This booklet describes all the versions of the Alfa 156, so you should only consider the information concerning
the trim level, engine and version purchased by you.

Alfawiki.nl

1

MUST BE READ!
REFUELLINGKPetrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) no less than 95.
Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590.

ENGINE START-UP
Petrol engines with mechanical transmission: make sure the handbrake is pulled; put the gear lever into neutral;press the clutch pedal down to the floor without touching the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it assoon as the engine starts.
Petrol engines with Selespeed transmission or Q-System: keep the brake pedal fully depressed; turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started; the transmission sets to neutral automatically (the display
shows position N).
Diesel engines: Turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the Y and m warning lights to go off; turn the ignition
key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine starts.
PARKING OVER FLAMMABLE MATERIALWhile functioning normally, the catalytic converter reaches high temperatures. For this reason do not park the car over inflammable material, grass, dry leaves, pine needles, etc.: fire hazard.

Alfawiki.nl
2

PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENTU

A system for continuously monitoring emission system components to ensure greater environmental protection is fitted inyour car.

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES쇵

If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (that will gradually drain the battery), contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car’s electric system can support therequired load.

CODE CARD
Keep the code card in a safe place, not in the car. You should always keep the electronic code written on the CODE card withyou in case you need to carry out an emergency start-up procedure.

SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safety features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.

THE OWNER’S MANUAL CONTAINS…
…information, tips and important warnings regarding the safe, correct driving of your car, and its maintenance. Pay particular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection) â (car well-being).

Alfawiki.nl

3Any queries concerning servicing should be forwarded to the showroom from which the vehicle was purchased, the subsidiary company or to
our branch offices or associated companies.
Warranty Booklet
The Warranty Booklet is delivered together with every new vehicle and contains the regulations tied to the services given by Alfa Romeo Services and to the warranty conditions.
Correctly carrying out the scheduled services specified by the manufacturer is the best way to maintain the performance, safety characteristics
and low running costs of your vehicle. It is also necessary to maintain warranty cover.
“Service” guideThis contains the Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. The services can be recognized by the presence of the Alfa Romeo badge and logo.
The Alfa Romeo organization in Italy can be found in the telephone book under the letter “A” Alfa Romeo.
Not all the models described in this booklet are available in all countries. Only some of the fittings described in this booklet are fitted as standard to the vehicle. The list of available accessories should be requested from the Alfa Romeo Dealers.

Alfawiki.nl
4

THE SYMBOLS USED IN THIS BOOKLET
The symbols illustrated in these pages show the subjects which should,
in particular, be closely studied.

PERSONAL
SAFETY

Warning: partially or
fully ignoring these rules may leadto serious injury.

PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENTThis indicates the correct procedures
to be followed to preventthe vehicle from damaging
the environment.

VEHICLESAFETY

Warning: partially or fully ignoring theserules may lead to serious damage
being caused to the vehicle which, in somecircumstances, may cause forfeiture of thewarranty cover.

The texts, illustrations and specifications given in this booklet refer to the vehicle at the time of going to press.
As part of our ongoing striving to improve our products, Alfa Romeo may introduce technical changes
during production, therefore the specifications and fittings may be altered without prior notice.
For details on this subject, please apply to the manufacturer’s sales network.

Alfawiki.nl
5

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SYMBOLS
Special coloured labels have been attachednear to or actually on some of the components making up your Alfa 156.
These labels bear symbols that remind youof the precautions to be taken as regards
that particular component.

ALFA ROMEO
CODE SYSTEM
To increase protection against attempted
theft, the car is fitted with an electronic engine lock system (Alfa Romeo CODE) whichis activated automatically when the ignition
key is removed. In fact the grip of each key
contains an electronic device which modulates the radio frequency signal transmitted when the engine is started by a special
aerial incorporated in the ignition switch. This
modulated signal is the “password” bywhich the control unit recognises the key
and only in this condition can the engine
be started.

THE KEYS
The car is delivered with two keys, key(A-fig.1) with metal insert and remotecontrol function and another key with metal
insert only, without remote control.
The key remote control operates:– door centralised opening/locking– opening luggage compartment boot/tailgate– activation/deactivation of electronic
alarm (if existing)

A0B0016m

Alfawiki.nl
6

fig. 1

– the ignition switch– the driver's door lock and, optional forversions/markets where applicable, the passenger's door lock
– passenger’s side Air bag deactivation.
WARNING In order to ensure perfect efficiency of the electronic devices contained
inside the keys, they should never be directly
exposed to the rays of the sun.

The CODE card (fig. 2) is also suppliedwith the key and it contains the codes of thekeys (both the mechanical one and the electronic one for emergency starting).
The code numbers on the CODE card must
be kept in a safe place, not in the car.
The driver should always keep the electronic code given on the CODE card with him
in the event of having to carry out emergency starting.

KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROLThe key with remote control (fig. 3) isfitted with:– a metal insert (A) that can be enclosed
in the key grip
– button (B) for remote opening/closing of the doors and turning the electronic
alarm on/off (where fitted)– a button (C) for remote boot unlocking– removable hook ring (D)If the car changes owner,
the new owner must be
given all the keys and theCODE card.

– a button (E) for power-assisted openingof the metal insert.

A0B0010m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Key metal insert operates:

A0B9000m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 2

fig. 3

7

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The metallic insert (A) of the key operates:– the ignition switch– the driver's door lock and, optional forversions/markets where applicable, the passenger's door lock
– passenger’s Air bag deactivation.
To move the metallic insert out of the key
grip, press button (E).

To insert the metallic insert in the key grip,press the button (E-fig. 3) to release theinsert and turn it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks.
To open/close the doors by remote control, press button (B). On cars fitted withelectronic alarm system, pressing button (B)also turns the electronic alarm.
WARNING Certain radio devices outside
the car (e.g. mobile phones, HAM radio systems) could disturb the remote control frequency. In this case the remote control could
malfunction.

WARNING
When button (E) ispressed, take the utmost
care to prevent the metal insert
from causing injury or damage
when it comes out. Button (E) must
only be pressed when the key isaway from the body, in particular
the eyes, and from objects that
could be spoilt (e.g. clothes). Neverleave the key unattended to prevent anyone, especially children,from holding it and pressing button(E) inadvertently.

Alfawiki.nl
8

OPENING THE BOOT
The boot can be opened by remote control
from outside pressing button (C-fig. 3),
also when the electronic alarm (where fitted) is on.
In this case the alarm system switches off
the boot volumetric protection and control
sensor, the system gives two “beeps” (withthe exceptions of versions for certain markets) and the direction indicators light up forabout three seconds.
Closing the boot again, the control functions are restored, the system gives two“beeps” (with the exceptions of versions forcertain markets) and the direction indicators
light up for about three seconds.

Each time the ignition key is turned to
STOP position, the Alfa Romeo CODE system deactivates the functions of the engine
electronic control unit.
Each time the engine is started, turning the
key to the MAR position, the control unitof the Alfa Romeo CODE system sends arecognition code to the engine control unit
to deactivate the inhibition of the functions.
The recognition code, which is crypted andvariable between over 4 billion combinations, is only sent if the system control unit
has recognised the code sent to it by thekey, which contains an electronic transmitter, through an aerial in the ignition switch.

A0B0599m

This condition is indicated by a brief flashof the warning light (A) on the check panel.
If the code has not been recognised correctly, the warning light (A) stays on together with the warning light (B).
In this case, you are recommended to return the key to the STOP position and thenback to MAR; if the inhibition persists, try
again possibly with the other key provided
with the car. If it is still impossible to start
the car carry out the emergency starting procedure described in section “In an emergency” and turn to an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.
WARNING Every electronic key has its
own code, which must be memorised by thesystem control unit. To memorise new keys,
up to a maximum of eight, apply solely to
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services taking withyou all the keys in your possession, theCODE card, a personal identity document
and the car’s possession documents.

The codes of the keys notprovided during the newmemorising procedure are
erased from the memory. This is toensure that any lost or stolen keys
can no longer be used to start thecar.

WARNING The Alfa Romeo CODE Y
warning light comes on when travelling with
the ignition key on MAR:
1) If the warning lamp lights up while thecar is moving, it means that the system isrunning a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a voltage drop). The first time you stop you cantest the system as follows: switch the engine off by turning the ignition key to
STOP; then turn the key back to MAR:the warning lamp will light up and should
go out in the space of about one second. If
the warning lamp fails to go out, leave the
key at STOP for more than 30 seconds andrepeat the procedure described previously.
If the problem persists, contact your Alfa
Romeo Authorized Service.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

OPERATION (fig. 4)

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 49

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

2) If the warning lamp flashes it meansthat the car is not protected by the immobiliser. Contact your Alfa Romeo Authorized
Service immediately and get them to store
the codes of all the keys in the memory.

WARNING The system is protected by
a 10 A fuse housed in the fuse-holder set
under the dashboard (see paragraph “If afuse or relay blows” in the chapter “In an
emergency”).

If after 2 seconds withthe key in the MAR position, the warning light turnon again flashing, this means thatthe code of the keys has not been
memorised, thus the car is not protected by the Alfa Romeo CODE
system against attempted theft. In
this case, contact an Alfa Romeo
Authorized Service to have the key
codes memorised.

A0B9000m

Alfawiki.nl
10

fig. 5CHANGING THE BATTERY
OF THE KEY WITH REMOTE
CONTROL
If when pressing button (B or C-fig. 5)
the control is rejected or is not performed,
the battery should be replaced by a new oneof the same type to be found c/o normal
retailers. On versions fitted with electronic
alarm, the need to replace the remote control battery is indicated by the coming on,
with fixed light, of the deterrent led set on
the dashboard near the central air vent.

Dead batteries are harmful for the environment.
They must be disposed ofin special containers as specified bycurrent regulations. Avoid exposure to naked flames and high temperatures. Keep out of reach ofchildren.

– move the metal insert (A) to the unlocking position;(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)– turn the pin (B), taking the referencemark (dot) of the cut to the UNLOCK position (2);DESCRIPTION– working on the notch (C) remove thebattery holder (D);– change the battery (E) putting it in theposition shown on the holder;– insert the holder back in the key andlock it, turning the reference mark of the pin(B) to the LOCK position (1).

A0B0047m

REMOTE CONTROL (fig. 8)
The remote control is built into the key and
it is fitted with a button for activating thealarm (B-fig.8)

The system comprises: transmitter, receiver, control unit with siren and volumetric sensors and anti-lift sensor. The electronic
alarm is controlled by a receiver inside the
car and it is turned on and off through theremote control incorporated in the key which
sends the crypted and variable code. The
electronic alarm monitors: unlawful openingof the doors, bonnet and boot (perimetral
protection), operation of the ignition key,battery and emergency key cable cutting,the presence of moving bodies (volumetricprotection), any abnormal raising/slopingof the car (for versions/markets where applicable) and operates the central door locking system. It also makes it possible to cut
off the volumetric protection.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ELECTRONIC ALARM

To change the battery (fig. 7):

A0B9000m

WARNING The engine inhibitor function
is guaranteed by the Alfa Romeo CODE system which is activated automatically when
the ignition key is removed.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 7

fig. 811

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL
KEYS WITH REMOTE CONTROLThe receiver can recognise up to 5 keys
with remote control. If during the life of the
car a new key with remote control is needed
for any reason whatsoever, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services directly, taking
with you the CODE card, a personal identity document and the car’s possession documents.

ACTIVATING THE ALARM

Surveillance

When the doors and boot/bonnet lids areclosed and the ignition key is in the STOP
or PARK position (key removed), point the
remote control towards the car and thenpress and release the button (B-fig. 8).

When the system has been turned on, theled (A-fig. 9) on the dashboard will flash
to indicate that the system is in the surveillance mode. The led will flash continuously
while the system is under surveillance.

With the exception of some markets thesystem sounds a beep and the door lock is
engaged.

WARNING Operation of the electronic
alarm is adapted at the origin to the regulations of the different countries.

Engagement of the alarm is preceded bya self-diagnosis phase characterised by achange in the frequency at which the deterrent led (A-fig. 9) on the dashboard
flashes. If an anomaly is detected the system gives off a further beep.

A0B0563m

Alfawiki.nl
12

fig. 9If, after the alarm has been activated, asecond acoustic signal is heard, check that
all the doors and bonnet/boot are closed
properly and engage the system once again.
On the other if a door or bonnet/boot lid
is not correctly closed it will not be controlled
by the system.
If the control signal is repeated when the
doors and bonnet/boot are closed properly
this means that the self-diagnosis function
has detected a system operating fault, inwhich case it is necessary to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

DEACTIVATING THE ALARM
To deactivate the alarm, press the buttonon the key with remote control. The system
performs the following (with the exceptionof some markets):– the direction indicators turn on twice
briefly– two beeps are sounded briefly by thesiren– the doors are released.
WARNING If the led (A-fig. 9) in the
car stays on when the system has been deactivated, (maximum of 2 minutes or until
the ignition key is moved to MAR) the following should be borne in mind:– if the led stays on permanently, it meansthat the remote control batteries are flat andneed replacing;– if the led continues to flash, but at different intervals than normal, it means that
attempts to steal the car have been made,counting the number of flashes it is also possible to identify the type of attempt:
1 flash:right front door

2 flashes:left front door

3 flashes:right rear door

4 flashes:left rear door

5 flashes:volumetric sensors

6 flashes:bonnet7 flashes:boot

8 flashes:

tampering with car starting
cables

9 flashes:

tampering with battery or
cutting emergency key cables

10 flashes:at least three causes ofalarm.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Self-diagnosis and monitoringof doors and bonnet/bootAlfawiki.nl
13

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

AUTOMATIC ENGAGEMENT
OF THE ALARM(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
If the alarm has not been engaged withthe remote control it will come on automatically after an established time of 30
seconds from the moment that the ignition
key has been turned to the STOP or
PARK positions and a door or the boot has
been opened and then closed again. Thiscondition is shown by the intermittent illumination of the led in the car and by the signalling described previously.
To deactivate the alarm press the buttonon the remote control.
The alarm is also automatically engaged
when the doors are closed using the key.
When the alarm is engaged automaticallythe doors are not locked.

WHEN THE ALARM
IS TRIGGERED
When the alarm is engaged it will soundwhen:– one of the doors, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened;– the battery is disconnected or the electric cables are cut, or the emergency key cables are cut;– intrusion into the passenger compartment, e.g. window being broken (volumetricprotection);– attempt to start the engine (key atMAR);– abnormal car raising/sloping (for versions/markets where applicable).
Depending on the markets, the triggeringof the alarm will activate the siren and thehazard warning lights (for about 26 seconds). The methods of operation and thenumber of cycles may vary depending on
the versions/markets.
However a maximum number of cycles isforeseen.
Once the alarm cycle has come to an end,
the system will return to its normal monitoring state.

Alfawiki.nl
14

INTERRUPTING THE ALARM
To interrupt the alarm press the button on
the remote control or, if the remote control
battery is down, get into the car, insert the
key into the ignition switch and turn the key
to MAR.
WARNING If it is necessary for the vehicle to lie inactive for long periods (over 3
weeks), close the vehicle using the key todeactivate the alarm.

To guarantee correct operation all the windows and the sunroof, if any, should beclosed.
This function can be excluded (for example when leaving animals on-board the car)by performing the following operations inquick succession: when the key is at MAR,
move the key to the STOP position andthen return the key to MAR and then once
again to the STOP position. Remove theignition key.

To restore volumetric protection move theignition key to the MAR position and holdit in this position for more than 30 seconds.
If requiring to activate an electric control
operated by the ignition key at MAR (e.g.
electric windows) with the volumetric protection deactivated, turn the ignition key
to MAR, operate the control and return the
key to STOP within a maximum time of
30 seconds. This way volumetric protection
is not restored.

The led in the car will come on for about
2 seconds to confirm that the function has
been excluded.

CUTTING OUT OPERATION
OF THE SIREN(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
When requiring to dispense with the siren
acoustic signalling in the alarm condition,
simply keep the remote control button (Bfig. 10) pressed for 4 seconds when engaging the system.
This condition is shown by a series of 5
beeps in quick succession after the normal
acoustic/visual signals when the system isoperated.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION

The next time the system is activated, normal operation of the siren is restored automatically.

A0B9000m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 1015

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MINISTERIAL HOMOLOGATION
In keeping with the laws in force in eachcountry on the subject of radio frequency,
we point out that:– the separate homologation numbers foreach market are given on the last pages ofthis handbook before the alphabetical index(for some countries also homologation document);

REMOTE CONTROLDOOR LOCKING SYSTEM
The system comprises a receiver inside the
car and a transmitter (remote control) incorporated in the key (E-fig. 11).
To lock/unlock the locks, point the transmitter towards the car, press and release thebutton (B-fig. 11).

– for markets in which the transmitter
needs to be marked with the homologation
number, this has been stated on the component.
(Depending on the versions/markets, thecode may also be marked on the transmitter and/or on the receiver).

A0B9000m

Alfawiki.nl
16

fig. 10WARNING Should it be necessary toprogramme additional remote controls, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

– AVV: unstable position for starting theengine.

THE SWITCH (fig. 12)

WARNING If the engine does not start,
return the ignition key to the STOP position and repeat the sequence.

The key can be moved to one of four positions:– STOP: engine switched off, key can beremoved, engine lock engaged, steering lockengaged, all services excluded apart fromthose powered directly (e.g. hazard warning lights).
– MAR: drive position. The engine lockis deactivated and all electrical devices are
powered.
WARNING Never leave the key in thisposition when the engine is stationary.

The ignition block is fitted with a safety device preventing it from being moved to the
AVV position when the engine is alreadyrunning.
– PARK: engine switched off, key canbe removed, engine lock engaged, steering lock engaged, sidelights automaticallyswitched on.
WARNING To turn the key to the
PARK position, button (A) located on theswitch should be pressed first.

WARNING
When leaving the car always remove the key fromthe ignition to prevent any passenger in the car from inadvertently activating the controls.
Never leave children unattended in
the car. Remember to engage thehandbrake and if the car is facing
uphill, first gear and if the car isfacing downhill, reverse.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IGNITION DEVICE

If the ignition device istampered with (for example during an attempted
break-in) have it checked over by
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services,
before travelling again.

A0B0610m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 1217

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

18

STEERING LOCKDOORS– To close the door, turn the key in the opposite direction.

Engaging lock:– move the ignition key to the STOP or
PARK position and remove the key lightly
turning the steering wheel to facilitate thelocking action.

WARNING
Before opening a door, ensure that this can be donesafely.
OPENING/CLOSING FROMOUTSIDEWARNING
Never remove the key
with the car on the move.
The steering wheel would lock automatically the first time the steering wheel is turned. This also occurs if the car is towed.

Front doors– To open the door, only with the innerknob (A-fig. 14) raised, pull the opening handle (A-fig. 15).
– To close, press the button (A-fig. 14)
also with the door open, then close the door.

Releasing the lock:– turn the key to the MAR position andgently rock the steering wheel.

Rear doors– To open the driver's door turn the key
clockwise and to open the passengers' door,
optional for versions/markets where applicable, turn the key anti-clockwise, thenremove the key and press the button (Afig. 13).

WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden to
carry out whatever aftermarket operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifications (e.g.: installation of antitheft Device) that could badly affectperformance and safety, cause thelapse of warranty and also result in
non-compliance of the car with homologation requirements.

A0B0023m

A0B0369m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 13

fig. 14

Rear doors

CENTRALIZED LOCKING

Front doors

WARNINGThe rear doors can only be
opened if the child safety
lock has been released.

This permits centralized locking of all
doors, both front and rear.

– To open the door pull the handle (Afig. 16) regardless of the position of knob
(B).
– To close the door pull the flap. To prevent the door from being opened from outside press knob (B).

– To open the door pull handle (Afig. 17).
– To close the door press the knob (B)even when the flap is open, and then close
the flap.
If the boot is not properly shut, the warning light ´ will come on on the instrument
panel or (where applicable) on the Infocenter display (together with relevant message).

A0B0025m

To operate the centralized locking device
the doors must be perfectly closed otherwise
the system will not work.
For versions/markets, where applicable,
central locking depends on the complete
closing of all the doors and of the boot.
– From outside: when the doors areclosed, insert and turn the key in the lock of
one of the two front doors.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

OPENING/CLOSINGFROM INSIDE– From inside: when the doors areclosed, press one of the knobs (B-fig. 16)
located on the front doors, engage/release
the centralized locking system.

A0B0024m

A0B0026m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 15

fig. 16

fig. 1719

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

By pressing the knob (B-fig. 17) on oneof the rear doors only that particular door
will be locked.
WARNING For the front doors it is notpossible to keep the knob (B-fig. 16)
down if the door has not been shut properly.
WARNING The centralized locking system can be deactivated, thus unlocking all
doors, by lifting the door opening lever on
one of the two front doors.
If the power supply is interrupted (burnt
fuse, battery disconnected, etc.) each door
can be opened manually from both insideand outside the car.

CHILD SAFETY LOCKWARNING
Always use this device
when carrying children.

The rear doors are equipped with a special
device (fig. 18) which prevents the door
being opened from inside.
WARNING Each device only acts on thedoor on which it is installed.
The device can only be engaged with thedoors open, raising or lowering the control
with the ignition key:
position 1 (control up) – device engaged(door locked);position 2 (control down) – device released (door can be opened from inside).

WARNING
After activating the safety
device check that it isworking correctly by pulling on the
inner lever used to open the door.

WARNING The intervention of the inertial fuel cut-off switch causes the automaticdoor unlock and inhibits door locking forabout 30 seconds. After this time, door locking control unit operation is restored.
A0B0027m

Alfawiki.nl
20

fig. 18

WARNING
Adjustments may be madesolely with the car stationary.
Fig. 19: standard equipment;
Fig. 20: sporty seats (where applicable);Fig. 21: sporty seats and lateral air bags.

MOVING THE SEATSBACKWARDS OR FORWARDS

ADJUSTING THE HEIGHTOF THE DRIVER’S SEAT

Lift lever (A) and push the seat backwards
or forwards: in the driving position the arms
should be slightly flexed and hands should
rest on the rim of the steering wheel.

To raise the seat, pull the lever (B) taking it upwards, then continue operating thelever (up and down) until reaching the required height, then release the lever. To
lower the seat, push the lever (B) downwards, then operate the lever (up anddown) until reaching the height required.

WARNING
Once you have let go off
the lever, check that theseat is firmly locked in the runnersby trying to move it back andforth. If the seat is not locked properly, in the case of collision t might
move unexpectedly with clearly
dangerous consequences.

WARNING Adjustment must only be carried out when seated in the driver’s seat.

A0B0028m

A0B0054m

ADJUSTING THE ANGLE
OF THE BACKRESTGETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARFRONT SEATSThis can be done by turning the knob (C)until the desired position is reached.
The sporty seats equipped with lateral air
bags have an electric adjustment; use thebutton (D-fig. 21) on the outer part ofthe seat to set the seat back in the required
position.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 19

fig. 20

21

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

BACKREST ANGLE ELECTRIC
ADJUSTMENT(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)

LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT
OF THE DRIVER’S SEAT
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)

This can be done by pressing button (D)located on the outer part of the seat.

Adjustment is done by turning the knob(E) until reaching the most comfortable position.

The seat warming pad can be switched on
and off using switch (A) on the inner sideof the seat; for sporty seats, press the switch(F-fig. 21) on the outer side of the seat.

CENTRE ARMREST(where required)

When the warming pad is on, the warning
light (B) on the outer side of the seat turnson.

A0B0053m

SEAT WARMING (fig. 23)(optional for versions/markets
owhere applicable)

To use the armrest lower it as illustrated.
Inside the armrest there is an oddmentcompartment (B-fig. 22); to use it, raise
the cover (A).

A0B0293m

A0B0052m

Alfawiki.nl
22

fig. 21

fig. 22

fig. 23

To increase the safety of passengers, theheadrests are adjustable in height and, forversions with Recaro seats they are also adjustable in rake.
To adjust the height: move the headrest
up or down, then release it and make surethat it is locked in one of the pre-establishedpositions.

WARNING
Remember that the headrestraints must be positioned so that they are supporting
the back of the head and not theneck. They will only be able to provide effective protection in theevent of a collision if they are inthis position.

REAR SEATCENTRE ARMREST (fig. 26)(where required)
To use the centre armrest, lower it holding
the grip (A) as illustrated.

A0B0564m

For angle adjustment (where applicable):take hold of the headrest and turn it to themost suitable position.
WARNING The shape of the headrest
may vary depending on the version and/or
market. The example shown is used only todemonstrate the methods by which it canbe adjusted.

REAR POCKETS (whererequired) (fig. 25)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ADJUSTING THE HEADRESTS(fig. 24)

The front seats are provided with a pocketin the rear of the seat back.

fig. 26
A0B0050m

A0B0320m

A0B0565m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 24

fig. 25

fig. 27

23

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARSKI COMPARTMENT(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
The compartment may be used for carrying long loads.

To gain access to this compartment, lower
the armrest, pull the grip (A-fig. 27) of
the lid and lower it onto the armrest(fig. 28).
The compartment can be extended by removing the armrest: with the armrest lowered, press the two small handles (Bfig. 29) at the base of the armrest inwards
and remove it. Then pull the grip of the lid
and lower it onto the rear seat (fig. 30).

HEADRESTThe car is fitted with two headrests for theside seats. On request, for versions/markets
where applicable, a third headrest is available for the centre seat.
If necessary the headrests can be removed
as follows:– raise the headrest to the maximum
height (where required);– press both buttons (A and B-fig. 31)
and remove the headrests.

A0B0322m

fig. 28
A0B00323m

A0B0324m

A0B0566m

Alfawiki.nl
24

fig. 29

fig. 30

fig. 31The steering wheel position is adjustable
and may be move nearer to or further awayfrom the driver and also raised or lowered.
To do this, it is necessary to release lever(A-fig. 32) and pull it towards the steering wheel.
After setting the steering wheel in the mostappropriate position, lock it pushing the lever
fully home.

WARNING
The steering wheel position
must only be adjusted withthe car stationary.

ADJUSTING THE
REAR-VIEW MIRRORSINTERNAL REAR-VIEW
MIRRORWARNING
It is absolutely forbidden to
carry out whatever aftermarket operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifications (e.g.: installation of antitheft Device) that could badly affectperformance and safety, cause thelapse of warranty and also result in
non-compliance of the car with homologation requirements.

The mirror, fitted with a safety device
which releases it in the event of a violent
impact can be moved to two positions: normal or anti-glare by operating lever (Afig. 33).

A0B0035m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARSTEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT

A0B0595m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 32

fig. 33

25

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DOOR MIRRORSElectrically adjustable (fig. 34)
Select the mirror to be adjusted (right orleft) using switch (A):– move switch (A) to (B) to adjust theleft door mirror;– move switch (A) to (D) to adjust theright door mirror.
Then, reposition the switch (A) in the intermediate locking position (C).
WARNING The mirror can only be adjusted electrically when the ignition key isin the MAR position.

Folding (fig. 35)

Defrosting/demisting (fig. 36)– If necessary (for example when the sizeof the mirror causes difficulty in narrow
spaces) the door mirror can be folded in towards the car from position (A) to position(B).

The electric mirrors can be fitted with heating coils which are operated together withrearscreen heating pressing button (A) andprevent the mirrors from frosting and/or
misting.
WARNING This function is timed andis deactivated after a few minutes.

WARNING
When travelling the door
mirrors must always be inposition (A).

WARNINGAs the driver’s door mirror
is curved, it may slightly
alter the perception of distance.

A0B0018m

A0B0370m

A0B0399m

Alfawiki.nl
26

fig. 34

fig. 35

fig. 36Driver’s (fig. 37-39)

Passenger’s (fig. 38)

The driver’s door panel plate contains the
buttons which, with the ignition key atMAR, operate the following windows:

Button (A) is used to operate the passenger’s window.

FRONT

A – left front window
B – right front window
C – left rear window (where fitted)

REAR (where required)
The rear windows are operated by the handles on the door panels.
On request for versions/markets whereapplicable, the rear doors can be fitted withpower windows with split controls on driver’s
door (C and D-fig. 39) and on each reardoor (A-fig. 40).
With the ignition key at MAR, press the
button to lower the window; pull the button
to raise it.

WARNING The passenger’s window isfitted with a device for “continuous automatic operation” only for lowering it. The
device works as described for the driver’s
window.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING With ignition key at STOP
windows can be opened manually for aboutmax. 2 minutes or until opening one of thefront doors.

WARNING The driver’s power window
is fitted with a “continuous automatic operation” for both lowering and raising thewindow device. A brief press on the upperor lower part of the button will cause thewindow to move and continue its stroke automatically: the window stops in the position required by pressing either the upper orlower part of the button again.

POWER WINDOWS

D – right rear window (where fitted)
E – rear door window control inhibitor(where fitted) (with the inhibitor activatedthe button is up, press again to re-enable
the rear buttons).

A0B0031m

A0B0032m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 37

fig. 38

27

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Incorrect use of the power
windows can be dangerous.
Before and during operation of themalways make sure that the passengers are not exposed to the risk ofharm caused either directly by thewindows in motion or by personal
objects drawn or knocked by them.

WARNING
When leaving the car always remove the ignition
key to prevent passengers (especially children) from being injuredby the power windows inadvertently operated.

SEAT BELTS
USING THE SEAT BELTS
The belt should be worn keeping the chest
straight and rested against the seat back.
Take hold the tongue (A-fig. 41) and insert it into the buckle (B), until hearing thelocking click.

Do not hold the button
down when the window isfully open or fully closed.

At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for ashort stretch, then pull it out again without
jerking.

Versions not fitted with power windows
have a window winder (A-fig. 40a) for
working the window by hand.

To unfasten the seat belts, press button(C). Guide the seat belt with your hand
while it is rewinding, to prevent it from twisting.

A0B0033m

fig. 39
A0B0034m

A0B0608m

A0B0325m

Alfawiki.nl
28

fig. 40

fig. 40afig. 41

Through the reel, the belt automatically
adapts to the body of the passenger wearing it, allowing freedom of movement.
When the car is parked on a steep slope
the reel mechanism may block; this is normal. The reel mechanism prevents the webbing coming out when it is jerked or if thecar brakes sharply, in a collision or when cornering at high speed.

The centre seat is fitted with inertial seatbelt with three anchor points and reel likeside seats (fig. 42).
On request, for versions/markets whereapplicable, the rear seat can be fitted withinertial seat belt with three anchor points
and reel for side seats and lap belt with two
anchor points for the centre seat (fig. 44).

WARNINGTo offer the highest level ofprotection, the rear seatbelts should be fastened as shownin fig. 42 and fig. 44.

In order to ensure that the correct tabs, arefitted in the correct clips, the tabs of the side
belts and the clip of the central belt (onlyabdominal) are incompatible (fig. 43).

A0B0300m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Never press button (C)when travelling.

fig. 44
A0B0301m

A0B0467m

A0B0466m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 42

fig. 43

fig. 45

29

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Proper backrest coupling isguaranteed when button(A-fig. 46) set near each handle (B)is retracted in the handle.

WARNING
Make sure the seat back iscorrectly hooked on bothsides (not visible red buttons (A) toprevent seat back being thrownforwards and injuring passengers
should you brake sharply.

WARNING
Remember that, in theevent of an accident, any
passengers occupying the rearseats who are not wearing a seatbelt not only subject themselves togreat personal risk but constitutea danger to the occupants of thefront seats.

When the rear seats are not occupied, use
the proper pockets (A-fig. 47) on thebackrest to stow the seat belt clips neatly,
the tab (B) of the central abdominal belt
shall be fitted into (C) (see next paragraph“Rear abdominal centre housing”).
REAR CENTRAL ABDOMINAL
BELT (fig. 48)
Fasten the belt by inserting the tab (A)into the clip (B), until a click is heard.

WARNING
After tilting, when resetting
the rear seat in straight position, take care to reposition theseat belt properly to have it readyfor use.

A0B0123m

To adjust the belt, run the tape in thebuckle (D) pulling the end (E) to tighten
and part (F) to loosen.
Press button (C) to release the belt.
WARNING The belt is adjusted properly
when it fits closely across the hips.

A0B0118m

A0B0003m

Alfawiki.nl
30

fig. 46

fig. 47

fig. 48

When the rear centre belt, which is of theabdominal type, is not in use, hook the
tongue (A) in the special support (B) on
the rear seat back.

WARNING
Always hook the belt tip
when it is not used to prevent it from hitting the occupantsin the event of a crash.

ADJUSTING THE HEIGHTOF FRONT AND REAR SIDESEAT BELTS(Sportwagon versions only)
The rocker ring of the rear side belts has
three different positions through which beltheight adjustment is possible.

To adjust the seat belt, raise or lower theanchoring device grip (A-fig. 50) of thefront (A-fig. 51) or side rear seat belts(Sportwagon versions only), and move at
the same time the ring (B) to the most suitable of the set positions.

Always adjust the height of belts adapting
them to the size of the person wearing them.
This precaution will improve their effectiveness, substantially reducing the risk of injury
in the event of a crash.
Correct adjustment is obtained when thebelt passes about half way between the endof the shoulder and the neck.

A0B0468m

A0B0029m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARREAR ABDOMINAL CENTRE
BELT HOUSING (fig. 49)

A0B0099m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 49

fig. 50

fig. 51

31

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
After adjustment, always
check that the slider (B) is
anchored in one of the positions
provided. To do this, with the button (A-fig. 50) or (A-fig. 51) released, exert a further pressure toallow the anchor device to catch if
release did not take place at one ofthe preset positions.

PRE-TENSIONING DEVICES
To increase the efficiency of the front seatbelts, Alfa 156 is fitted with pre-tensioning devices.
These devices “feel” that the car is being
subject to a violent impact by way of a sensor rewind the seat belts a few centimetres.
In this way they ensure that the seat belt
adheres to the wearer before the restraining
action begins.
The seat belt locks to indicate that the device has intervened; the seat belt cannot be
drawn back up even when guiding it manually.

WARNING
Make the height adjustment when the car is stationary.

WARNING The pretensioner will give
maximum protection when the seat belt adheres snugly to wearer’s chest and hips.
Front seat pretensioners activate only iffront seat belts are properly fitted into buckles. A small amount of smoke may be produced. This smoke is in no way toxic andpresents no fire hazard.
The emergency tensioning retractor needs
no maintenance or lubrication. Any modification to its original features will nullify theretractor’s effectiveness. If, due to unusual
natural events (floods, high waves, etc.),
the device has been affected by water andmud, it must be replaced.

Alfawiki.nl

32

WARNING
The pretensioner can only
be used once. After a collision that has triggered it, have it
replaced at Alfa Romeo Authorized
Service. The validity of the device
is written on the plate located on
the front left door near the lock.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services to have pretensioner replaced as this date approaches.

Operations
involvingbanging, vibrations or
heating (above 100°C fora maximum of 6 hours) in the areaof the pretensioners may damage
or trigger off the device. Vibrations
from rough road surfaces or accidental jolting caused by mounting
pavements etc. do not have any effect on the pretensioner. If, however, you need assistance, go to
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR
THE USE OF THE SEAT BELTS
All the occupants of the car are obliged torespect the local traffic laws regarding thewearing of seat belts.
Always fasten the seat belts before starting.

WARNING
The seat belt must not be
twisted and should cling
tightly to the body. The upper part
must pass over the shoulder and diagonally across the chest. The
lower part must rest across thepelvis and not across the stomach
to eliminate the risk of sliding forwards (fig. 52). Do not use devices(clips, stoppers, etc.) which keep
the belts away from the body.
WARNINGWARNINGTo ensure the highest degree of protection, you arerecommended to keep the seatbackrest in the straightest position
possible, and the belt adhering wellto the chest and pelvis.
Seat belt should always be wornin both the front and rear positions!
Travelling without seat belt increases the risk of serious injury or
death in the case of accident.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Never disassemble ortamper with the pretensioner components. All interventions must be carried out by qualified and authorised personnel.
Always contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Under no circumstances should
the components of the seatbelts and pretensioner be tamperedwith or removed. Any operation should
be carried out by qualified and authorised personnel. Always contact an
Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.
A0B0004m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 5233

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
If the seat belt has been
subjected to shock, for example during an accident, it must
be completely replaced together
with the attachments and theirscrews, and the pretensioning devices, even if visible defects are notdetected as the belt may have lostits resilience.

Seat belts are also to be worn by expectant mothers: the risk of injury in the case of
accident is greatly reduced for them and theunborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Pregnant women must of course position
the lower part of the belt very low down sothat it passes under the abdomen (fig. 54).

HOW TO KEEP THE SEAT BELTS
ALWAYS IN EFFICIENT
CONDITIONS– Always use the belts with the tape welltaut and never twisted; make sure that it
is free to run without impediments.
– After a serious accident, replace the belt
being worn at that time, even if it does notappear damaged. Always replace the seatbelts if pretensioners have been activated.
– To clean the belts, wash by hand withneutral soap, rinse and leave to dry in theshade. Never use strong detergents, bleachor dyes or any other chemical substance thatmight weaken the fibres.

WARNING
Do not carry children on
your knee using a single
seat belt for both (fig. 53). Do notfasten other objects to the body.

– Prevent the reels from getting wet: correct operation of them is only guaranteed
if water does not get inside.
– Replace the seat belt if it shows significant wear or cut signs.
A0B0007m

A0B0008m

Alfawiki.nl
34

fig. 53

fig. 54For the best level of protection in the eventof a crash, all occupants must travel seatedand secured by suitable restraint systems.

WARNINGSERIOUS DANGER: Never place cradle child’s seats on thefront passenger seats of cars equipped with passenger air
bag since the air bag activation could cause serious injuries, even mortal.
You are advised to carry children always on the rear seat, as this is themost protected position in the case of a crash. In any case, child’s seatsmust absolutely not be positioned on the front seat of car’s with passenger’s air bag, which during inflation could cause serious injury, even mortal, regardless of the seriousness of the crash that triggered it. Children
may placed on the front seat of cars fitted with passenger’s air bag deactivation. In this case, it is absolutely necessary to check the warning light
F on the check panel to make sure that deactivation has actually took
place (see paragraph “Front and side air bags” at item ”Front passenger
air bag”). The front passenger seat shall be adjusted in the most backward
position to prevent any contact between the child’s seat and the dashboard.

This is even more important for children.
According to 2003/20/EC Directive, thisprescription is compulsory for all European
Community countries.
Compared with adults, a child’s head is proportionately larger and heavier than the restof the body, while muscles and bone structure are not completely developed. Therefore, in order to restraint them correctly inthe event of a crash, different systems areneeded then adult seat belts.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARCARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY

A0B0001m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 55

35

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The results of research on the best protection for a child are summarised in European Standard ECE-R44, which in addition
to making them compulsory, subdivides restraint systems into five groups:
Group 00-10 kg in weightGroup 0+0-13 kg in weightGroup 1

9-18 kg in weightGroup 2

15-25 kg in weightGroup 322-36 kg in weight

As it may be noted, the groups partiallyoverlap and in fact, in commerce it is possible to find devices that cover more than
one weight group (fig. 56).
All the restraint devices must bear the homologation data, together with the control
brand, on a solidly fixed label which must
absolutely not be removed.

GROUP 0 and 0+

GROUP 1Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing behind (fig. 56) on a cradle seat,
which, supporting the head, does not induce
strain on the neck in the event of sharp deceleration.

Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight, children may be carried facing forwards withseats fitted with front cushion (fig. 57),
through which the car seat belt restrains bothchild and seat.

The cradle is restrained by the car safety
belts, as illustrated, and it should in turnrestrain the child with the belts incorporated
on it.
WARNING
Illustrations is indicative
only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions provided
with it.

Over 1.50 m in height, from the point ofview of restraint systems, children are considered as adults and wear belts normally.

WARNING
Illustrations is indicative
only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions provided
with it.

A0B0005m

A0B0006m

The Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo includes
seats for each weight group, which are therecommended choice because they havebeen designed and specifically experimented
for Alfa Romeo cars.

Alfawiki.nl
36

fig. 56

fig. 57

GROUP 2

GROUP 3

Starting from 15 to 25 kg in weight, children may be restrained directly by the carseat belts. Child seats only have the function of positioning the child correctly in relation to the belts, so that the diagonal part
adheres to the chest and never to the neckand that the horizontal part adheres to thechild’s pelvis and not to the abdomen(fig. 58).

For children from 22 kg up to 36 kg thechild’s chest is thick enough not to need thespacer back rest any more.

WARNING
Illustrations is indicative
only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions provided
with it.

WARNING
Illustrations is indicative
only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions provided
with it.

Fig. 59 shows proper child seat positioning on the rear seat.
Over 1.50 m tall children may wear seatbelts like adults.

A0B0002m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Seats exist which are suitable for covering weightgroups 0 and 1 with a rear connection to the car belts and its own
belts to restrain the child. Becauseof their mass, they can be dangerous if installed incorrectly fastened
to the car belts with a cushion.
Strictly adhere to the assembly instructions provided.

A0B0009m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 58

fig. 5937

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S SEAT USE
Alfa 156 complies with the new EC Directive 2000/3 regulating child’s seat assembling on the different car seats according to thefollowing table:
Front and rear seat (saloon and Sportwagon versions)Group

Range of weight

SEAT
Front passenger

Rear side passenger
seat

until to 13 kg

L

U

U

(*)

Group 1

9 -18 kg

L

U

U

(*)

Group 215 - 25 kg

L

U

U

(*)

Group 322 - 36 kg

L

U

U

(*)

Group 0, 0+

Rear centre passenger Rear centre passenger
Seat (inertial seat belt
Seat (centre lap beltwith three anchor points) with two anchor points)

Key:U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for the specified “Groups”
L = suitable for certain child’s restraint systems available at Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo for the specified group(*) = child’s seats cannot be installed on the rear centre seat with lap belt with two anchor points

Alfawiki.nl
381) The recommended position for installing a child’s seat is on the rear seat, as
it is the most protected in the event of acrash.

WARNING
If a passenger’s air bag isinstalled, children should
never travel on the front seat.

4) Always pull the tape to check that thebelts are buckled.
5) All restraint systems are strictly for one
child only: never use for two children at thesame time.
6) Always make sure that the belts do notrest on the child’s neck.
7) During the journey, do not allow thechild to stay in abnormal positions or release
the belts.
8) Do not carry children in your arms, noteven small babies. No-one, however strong,
can keep hold of them in a crash.
9) In the case of accidents, replace thechild’s seat with a new one.

2) If the passenger’s air bag is deactivatedalways check that deactivation has takenplace through the special warning light F.

PRESETTING FOR INSTALLING
THE “ISOFIX TYPE” CHILDRESTRAINT SYSTEM
The car is created preset for mounting the
Isofix type child restraint system. Isofix is
a new European standardised system for carrying children. Isofix type child restraint system is an additional option that does notprevent from using traditional child restraint
systems. Isofix type child restraint systemcovers three weight groups: 0, 0+ and 1.
Due to its different anchoring system, theIsofix type child’s seat should be anchoredusing only the proper brackets provided forthe purpose in the car.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Below is a summary of the safety
rules to be observed when carrying children:

It is possible to mount both the traditional
restraint system and the Isofix type one, oneon the left and the other on the right, for example.
Since sizes are different, it is possible toinstall max two Isofix type child's seats using the proper couplings on the rear seator three traditional child's seats using theseat belts. On the front passenger seat it ispossible to mount only traditional child'sseats.

3) Carefully follow the instructions provided with the child’s seat, which the supplier is obliged to attach. Keep them in the
car together with the documents and thisbooklet. Do not use used seats without the
instructions for use.

Alfawiki.nl
39

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo provides the
Kiddy Isofix seat for babies up to 13 kg
weight to be positioned facing backwards(groups 0 and 0+) and the seat for babies
from 9 to 18 kg weight to be positioned facing the running direction (group 1). The
Kiddy Isofix seat has been certified according to the European Standard ECE-R44/03.

Isofix type child’s seats are to be anchored
to two metal brackets, set between the rearseat back and the cushion and that can be
identified through the slots in the seat cover(A-fig. 60).

A0B0298m

Alfawiki.nl
40

fig. 60WARNING
Install the child restraint
system only with the car
stationary. The Isofix child restraint system is properly anchoredto the preset brackets when clicks
are heard. In any case, keep to theinstallation instructions that must
be provided by the child restraint
system’s Manufacturer.

For proper installation proceed as follows:

For children of the 0, 0+ weight group,
the child’s seat is facing backwards (babies
up to 13 kg) and the child is restrained by
the child’s seat belts (D-fig. 61).

– check whether the release lever (Bfig. 61) is at rest position (inward)– find the presetting brackets (A), thenposition the child’s seat with the fastening
devices (C) aligned with the brackets– push the child restraint system until hearing the locking clicks.

A0B0400m

A0B0401m

As the child grows up, passing to weightgroup 1 the child’s seat should be mounted
facing forwards (running direction).
Installation of the seat forweight group 1
For proper installation proceed as follows:– check whether the release lever (Bfig. 62) is at rest position (inward);– find the presetting brackets (A), thenposition the child’s seat with the fastening
devices (C) aligned with the brackets;– push the child restraint system until hearing the locking clicks.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Installation of the seat for
the 0 and 0+ groups

If the Isofix type seat is positioned facing
backwards, the passenger’s seat must be
positioned completely back until touching
the child’s seat back.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 61

fig. 6241

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARFRONT AND SIDE
AIR BAGSFRONT AIR BAGS
Description and operation

The car is fitted with front Air bags for thedriver (fig. 63), for the passenger(fig. 64), side bags (fig. 65) and window bags (fig. 66).

The front air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)
is a safety device that comes into action in
the event of a head-on collision.

A0B0568m

A0B0278m

The front Air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)
is a device designed to protect the occupantsin the event of head-on collision of mediumhigh severity by the interposition of the cushion between the occupant and the steering
wheel or dashboard.
In the event of a crash, the electronic control unit processes the signals leading froma deceleration sensor and when necessary,triggers inflation of the cushion.

fig. 63

The cushion inflates instantly as a protective barrier between the occupants’ bodies
and the structures which could cause injury.
The cushion deflates immediately afterwards.

fig. 65
A0B0582m

A0B0277m

Alfawiki.nl
42

It is formed of an instantly-inflating cushion contained in a special recess:– in the centre of the steering wheel forthe driver;– in the dashboard and with a larger-sizedcushion for the passenger.

fig. 64

fig. 66

The front air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)does not replace but is complementary to
the use of belts, which should always beworn, as specified by law in Europe andmost non-European countries.

Front air bags are designed to protect car’s
occupants in front crashes and therefore nonactivation in other types of collisions (sidecollisions, rear-end shunts, roll-overs, etc…)
is not a system malfunction.
In collisions against highly deformable ormobile objects (road signposts, heaps of ice
or snow, etc.), rear collisions (hit from behind by another vehicle), side collisions,wedging under other vehicles or protective
barriers (for example under a lorry or guardrail) cutting in of the air bag is not activatedas it does not offer any more protection than
the seat belts therefore activation would beinappropriate.

WARNING
Please don’t apply stickers
or other objects to thesteering wheel, to the air-bag
cover on the passenger's side or on
the side roof lining to the upholstery on the roof side. Don’t place
objects on the dashboard passenger’s side (such as mobile phones)
because they could tamper with thecorrect opening of the passenger’s
air-bag and than cause serious injuries to the vehicle occupants.

Therefore the failure to be triggered does
not mean that the system is not working
properly.

Alfawiki.nl

PASSENGER’S FRONTAIR BAG
The passenger’s front air bag has been designed to improve the protection of a person wearing a seat belt.
Its volume at maximum inflation fills mostof the space between the dashboard and thepassenger.

WARNINGSERIOUS DANGER:
The car is fittedwith front passenger’s air bag.
Never place cradle child’s seats on
the front passenger seat of cars
equipped with passenger air bag
since the air bag activation could
cause serious injuries, even mortal.
In the case of need, always deactivate the passenger’s air bag
when a child’s seat is placed on thefront seat. The front passenger
seat shall be adjusted in the mostbackward position to prevent any
contact between child’s seat anddashboard. Even if not ruled bylaw, for better protection of adults
you are recommended to reactivate
the air bag immediately as soon as
child transport is no longer necessary.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

In the event of a crash a person that is notwearing the seat belt moves forwards andmay come into contact with the cushion
while it is still opening. Under these circumstances the protection offered by thecushion is reduced.

43

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MANUAL DEACTIVATION OF
PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG

The key switch (fig. 67) has two positions:

SIDE AIR BAGS(SIDE BAG - WINDOW BAG)

Should it be absolutely necessary to carrya child on the front seat, the passenger’s
front air bag can be deactivated.

1) Passenger’s front Air bag active: (ONposition P) warning light on check panel
off; it is absolutely prohibited to carry children on the front seat.

The side bag and window bag have thetask of increasing protection of the occupants in the event of a side crash of mediumhigh severity.

2) Passenger’s front Air bag deactivated:(OFF position F) warning light F on
check panel on; it is possible to carry children protected by special restraint systems
on the front seat.

They are formed of an instantaneously-inflating cushion:

Deactivation/reactivation takes place withignition key at STOP and operating it in thespecial key switch on the right-hand side ofthe dashboard (fig. 67). Access to theswitch is only possible with the door open.

The warning light F on the check panel
glows steadily until the passenger’s Air bag
is reactivated.
WARNING
Use the switch only withthe engine off and the ignition key removed.

Deactivation of the front passenger’s air
bag does not prevent operation of the side
Air bags.
With the door open the key can be inserted
and removed in both positions.
A0B0583m– the side bag is housed in the back restof the front seats; with this solution it is always possible to have the cushion in the optimum position in relation to the passenger,
regardless of the adjustment of the seat;– the window bags, which are “curtain”
cushions, are housed in the side roof lining
covered by a special trim, which makes it
possible to extend the cushion downwards.
This solution, designed to protect the head,
makes it possible to offer the highest degreeof protection to the front and rear occupantsin the event of side crash, thanks to the wide
cushion inflation surface.
In the event of a side crash, an electronic
control unit processes the signals leadingfrom a deceleration sensor and activates,when necessary, inflation of the bags.

Alfawiki.nl
44

fig. 67

In the event of minor side crashes (forwhich the restraining action of the seat belts
is sufficient), the air bags are not deployed.
Also in this case it is of vital importance towear the seat belts since in case of sidecrash they guarantee proper positioning of
the occupant and prevent the occupant tobe pitched out of the car in case of violent
crashes.
Therefore the side air bags do not replace
but are complementary to the use of belts,
which you are recommended to always
wear, as specified by law in Europe and most
non-European countries.
Operation of the side air bags and windowbags is not disabled by the front air bag deactivation switch, as described in the previous paragraphs.

WARNING In the event of side crash,
you can obtain the best protection by thesystem keeping a correct position on theseat, thus allowing correct window bag unfolding.

WARNING
Never rest head, arms andelbows on the door, on thewindows and in the window bagarea to prevent possible injuries
during the inflation phase.

WARNING The front and/or side airbags may be activated if the car is subjected
to heavy shocks or accidents that involve theunderbody area, such as for example violent
bumps against steps, pavements or fixed obstacles on the ground, falling into big holesor bumpy roads.

WARNING The triggering of air bags releases a small amount of powder. This powder is not harmful and does not indicate astart of fire; also the surfaces of the deployed bag and the car interior may be covered with dusty residue: this may irritate theskin and eyes. In the event of exposure,wash with neutral soap and water.

WARNING
Never lean head, arms andelbows out of the window.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The bags inflate instantaneously, setting
themselves between the body of the front
passengers and the car door. The bags deflate immediately afterwards.

The airbag system has a validity of 14
years for the pyrotechnic charge and 10
years for the coil contact (see the plate located on the front left door near the lock).
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
for replacement as these dates approach.

Alfawiki.nl
45

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING If an accident has triggered
the air bag, Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
must be contacted to have the devices activated replaced and to have the whole system checked.
All operations involving checking, repairing and replacing components concerning
the Air bag must be carried out by Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
If the car is to be demolished, Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services should be contacted beforehand to have the system deactivated.
If the car changes ownership, the newowner must be informed of the instructions
for use and of the above warnings and be
given this “Owner’s Manual”.
WARNING The triggering of the pretensioners, front air bags and side bags isdecided by the electronic control unit in adifferentiated manner depending on the typeof crash. The failure to trigger one or moreof them does not necessarily indicate a system malfunction.

46

GENERAL CAUTIONSWARNING
If the ¬ warning light does
not turn on when turning theignition key to MAR or if it stays on
when travelling, this could indicate afailure in safety retaining systems; under this condition air bags or pretensioners could not trigger in the eventof collision or, in a restricted numberof cases, they could trigger accidentally. Stop the car and contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services to havethe system checked immediately.

WARNING
Do not cover the back restof front seats with trims orcovers there are not set for the useof side bags.

WARNING
Never travel with objects
on your lap, in front of thechest or with a pipe, pencil, etc. between your lips. Serious injury may
result in the case of the air bag beAlfawiki.nl
ing triggered.

WARNING
Always keep your handson the steering wheel rim
when driving, so that if the Air bag
is triggered, it can inflate without
meeting any obstacles. Do not
drive with the body bent forwards,
keep the seat back rest in the erect
position and lean your back wellagainst it.
WARNING
If the car has been stolenor an attempt to steal it
has been made, if it has been subjected to vandals or floods, havethe Air bag system checked by Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
WARNING
Please don’t apply stickers
or other objects to thesteering wheel, to the air-bag
cover on the passenger's side or on
the side roof lining to the upholstery on the roof side. Don’t place
objects on the dashboard passenger’s side (such as mobile phones)
because they could tamper with thecorrect opening of the passenger’s
air-bag and than cause serious injuries to the vehicle occupants.

WARNING
Turning the ignition key to
MAR the F warning light(with the passenger’s front Air bag
deactivation switch at ON) turns
on for about 4 seconds, and then
flashes for another 4 seconds toremind that the passenger’s Air
bag and corresponding side Airbags will be activated in the eventof a crash, then it goes off.

WARNING
The front Air bags are designed to be triggered forheavier crashes than the pretensioners. It is therefore normal forthe pretensioners only to be triggered for crashes within the two
activation thresholds.

WARNING
Do not hook rigid objects tothe coat hooks and to the
support handles.

WARNING
Do not wash the seat backwith pressurised water or
steam (by hand or at automaticseat washing stations).

Alfawiki.nl

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNINGYou are reminded thatwhen the ignition key isengaged and in the MAR position,
the Air bags can be triggered also
on a stationary vehicle, if it isbumped by another moving vehicle. Therefore, even with the car
stationary, never allow children on
the front seat. You are also reminded that with the car stationary, without the key engaged andturned, the Air bags are not triggered in the event of an impact; inthis case the failure to trigger the
air bags should not be considereda system failure.

WARNING
The air bag does not replace the seat belts, but increases their effectiveness. Additionally, as the front air bags are
not triggered for head-on collision
at low speed, side crashes, crashes
from behind or overturning, inthese cases the occupants are protected only by the seat belts, whichmust, therefore, always be fastened.

47

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARSTEERING WHEEL
LEVERS
The devices and services controlled by thelevers on the steering wheel can only be activated when the ignition key is in the MAR
position.
LEFT-HAND LEVER
The left-hand lever controls the external
lights except the foglamps and the rear foglight.
When the external lights are switched on
the various controls located on the dashboard are illuminated.

Lights switched off (fig. 68)

Main-beam headlights (fig. 71)

When the pointer on the knurled ring is opposite the symbol O, the external lights are
switched off.

When the knurled ring is in the 2 position, the headlights can be changed fromdipped-beam to main-beam by pushing thelever towards the dashboard (stable position). The 1 warning light will come onon the instrument panel.
To return from main-beam to dipped-beam,
once again pull the lever towards the steering wheel and then release.

Sidelights (fig. 69)
The sidelights are switched on by turning
the knurled ring from O to 6.
The 3 warning light on the instrument
panel will come on at the same time.
Dipped-beam headlights (fig. 70)
These are switched on by turning theknurled ring from 6 to 2.

The sidelights will come on if the ignition
key is in the PARK position, regardless ofthe position of the knurled ring.
A0B0371m

A0B0372m

A0B0373m

Alfawiki.nl
48

fig. 68

fig. 69

fig. 70

Direction indicators (fig. 73)

The headlights are flashed by pulling thelever towards the steering wheel (unstable
position) regardless of the position of theknurled ring. The 1 warning light on the
instrument panel will come on at the sametime.

Moving the lever to the stable position will:

WARNING Only the main-beam lights
are flashed. To avoid penalties, follow local regulations.

up - engage the right-hand direction indicators.
down - engage the left-hand direction indicators.

WARNING If you wish to signal a rapidchange of direction involving only a minimum movement of the steering wheel, thelever can be moved up or down without
clicking (unstable position). When released
the lever will return to its home position.

One of the warning lights (R or E) will
come on on the instrument panel at thesame time.
A0B0376m

The lever is returned to its home position
automatically and the indicators are
switched off when the steering wheel isstraightened.

A0B0374m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Flashing (fig. 72)

A0B0375m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 71

fig. 72

fig. 7349

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

RIGHT-HAND LEVER
The right-hand lever is used to operate thewindscreen wiper and windscreen washer.
The control used to activate the windscreen
washers also activates the headlights washers, if fitted.

Windscreen wiper - windscreen
washer (fig. 74-75)
The lever can be moved to five different
positions corresponding to:
A - Stationary (off).
B - Intermittent.

A0B0250m

With the lever in position (B), turning thering (F) four possible intermittent speeds
are obtained:■= intermittent slow.
■■= intermittent medium.
■■■ = intermittent medium-fast.
■■■■ = intermittent fast.

A0B0377m

Alfawiki.nl
50

fig. 74

fig. 75

C - Continuous, slow.
D - Continuous, fast.
E - Fast, temporary (unstable position).
Operation in position (E) is limited to thetime the lever is held in this position. Whenthe lever is released, it returns to position(A) automatically stopping the wiper.

Pulling the lever towards the steering
wheel (fig. 76) (unstable position) operates the windscreen washer.
Keeping the lever pulled, with only one
movement it is possible to operate thewasher jet and the wiper at the same time;indeed, the latter comes into action automatically if the lever is pulled for more thanhalf a second.
The wiper stops working a few strokes after releasing the lever; a further “cleaning
stroke” after a few seconds completes thewiping operation.

Rain sensor(for versions/markets whereapplicable) (fig. 77)
The rain sensor (A), fitted only on certain versions, is an electronic device combine with the windscreen wiper which has
the purpose of automatically adjusting thenumber of wipes during intermittent operation, to intensity of the rain.
All the other functions controlled by theright-hand lever remain unchanged.
The rain sensor is activated automaticallymoving the right-hand lever to position (Bfig. 74) and it has a range of adjustmentthat gradually varies between wiper stationary (no wiping) when the windscreen isdry, to wiper at first continuous speed (continuous, slow) with heavy rain.

A0B0374m

Turn ring (F-fig. 75) to set the rain sensor sensitivity level:■■= low sensitivity■■■ = medium ensitivity■■■■ = high sensitivity.
Operating the windscreen washer with therain sensor activated (lever at position B)
the normal washing cycle is performed at
the end of which the rain sensor resumes its
normal automatic function.
Turning the ignition key to STOP the rain
sensor is deactivated and the next time theengine is started (MAR position) it will not
be reactivated even if the lever has remainedin position (B). In this case to activate therain sensor, simply move the lever to (A)or (C) and then back to (B).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR“INTELLIGENT WASHING” FUNCTION

A0B0012m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 76

fig. 77

51

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

When the rain sensor is reactivated, thewiper performs at least one stroke, even if
the windscreen is dry, to indicate that reactivation has occurred.

At each start, the rain sensor automaticallystabilises at a temperature of about 40°C
to eliminate any condensation from the control surface and prevent the formation of ice.

WARNING In case of failure of the righthand stroke or rain sensor, windscreen wiper
operation with the right-hand lever at (B)shall take place in intermittent mode.

The rain sensor is able to detect and automatically adapt to the presence of the following particular conditions which requiredifferent sensitivity:– impurities on the control surface (salt,
dirt, etc.);– streaks of water caused by worn wiper
blades;– difference between day and night (thehuman eye is more disturbed during thenight by the wet glass surface).

The rain sensor is located behind the innerrear-view mirror in contact with the windscreen and inside the area cleaned by thewiper and it controls an electronic control
unit which in turns controls the wiper motor.

Headlight washers (fig. 78)(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
These are operated when the sidelights
are on and the windscreen washer isswitched on.

A0B0581m

Alfawiki.nl
52

fig. 78(optional for versions/markets where applicable)
GENERAL
The speed regulator (CRUISE CONTROL), with electronic control, makes it
possible to drive the car at the required
speed without pressing the accelerator
pedal. This reduces driving fatigue on motorways, especially during long journeys because the speed memorised is automaticallymaintained.

The device is disengaged automatically in
any one of the following cases:– pressing the brake pedal;– pressing the clutch pedal;– if the VDC, ASR system cuts in;– with Selespeed or Q-System transmission if a gear is changed;– if car speed is below the set limit.

CONTROLS (fig. 79)
Cruise Control is controlled by the
ON/OFF knurled ring (A), by the +/ring (B) and by the RCL button (C).
Ring (A) has two positions:– OFF: in this position the device is deactivated;– ON: is the normal operating position of
the device: the warning light Ü on the checkpanel turns on.
Ring (B) serves for memorising and maintaining the car speed or for increasing or lowering the speed memorised.

WARNING The device can only be engaged at speeds between 30 and 190
km/h.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CRUISE CONTROL

Turn the ring (B) to (+) to memorise thespeed reached or increase the speed memorised.

The device may only be engaged in the
4th, 5th or 6th gear. Travelling downhill withthe device engaged, the car speed may increase more than the memorised one, due
to the change in the engine load.

A0B0055m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 7953

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Turn the ring (B) to (–) to lower the speed
memorised.
Each time the ring is actuated (B) the
speed increases or lowers by about 1.5
km/h.
Keeping the ring turned the speed changes
continuously. The new speed reached will
be maintained automatically.
The RCL button (C) resets the memorised
speed.
WARNING Turning the ignition key to
STOP or the ring (A) to OFF, the speed
memorised is cleared and the system isswitched off.
The ring (A) can be constantly left to ON
without damaging the device. However, wesuggest to disconnect the device when it is
not used, turning the ring to OFF, to avoid
fortuituous speed memorisations.

TO MEMORISE THE SPEED
Move the ring (A) to ON and take the car
to the required speed normally. Turn the ring(B) to (+) for at least three seconds, thenrelease it. The car speed is memorised and
it is therefore possible to release the accelerator pedal.
The car will continue to travel at the memorised constant speed until one of the following condition takes place:– pressing the brake pedal;– pressing the clutch pedal;– if the VDC, ASR system cuts in;– with Selespeed or Q-System transmission if a gear is changed.
WARNING In the case of need (whenovertaking for instance) acceleration is possible simply pressing the accelerator pedal;
later, releasing the accelerator pedal, the car
will return to the speed memorised previously.

Alfawiki.nl
54

TO RESET THE MEMORISED
SPEED
If the device has been disengaged for example pressing the brake or clutch pedal,
the memorised speed can be reset as follows:– accelerate gradually until reaching a
speed approaching the one memorised;– engage the gear selected at the timeof speed memorising (4th, 5th or 6th speed);– press the RCL button (C).

RESETTING THE MEMORISED
SPEED

The speed memorised can be increasedin two ways:

The memorised speed is automatically reset turning off the engine or moving the ring(A) to OFF.

1) pressing the accelerator and then memorising the new speed reached (turning thering (B) for more than three seconds);or2) momentaneously turning the ring (B)to (+): each pulse of the ring will correspondto a slight increase in speed (about 1.5km/h) while pressing continuously will correspond to a continuous speed increase. Releasing the ring (B) the new speed will bememorised automatically.
TO REDUCE THE MEMORISED
SPEED
The speed memorised can be reduced in
two ways:WARNING
When travelling with thecruise control on, do not
move the gearshift lever to neutral.

WARNING
The cruise control may only
be engaged at speeds between 30 and 190 km/h.

WARNING
It is advisable to engage
the cruise control only
when the conditions of the traffic
or road so permit under completely
safe conditions: i.e.: straight anddry roads, dual carriageways or
motorways, flowing traffic andsmooth road surface. Do not engage the device in town or inheavy traffic conditions.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

TO INCREASE THE MEMORISEDSPEED

WARNING
If the device is faulty or
not working, turn the ring(A) to OFF and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services after checking
that the protection fuse is intact.

1) disengaging the device (for instancepressing the brake pedal) and then memorising the new speed (turning the ring (B)to (+) for at least three seconds);
2) keeping the ring pressed (B) at (–)
until reaching the new speed which will bememorised automatically.

Alfawiki.nl
55

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARDASHBOARD

A0B0570m

fig. 80
1. Side air outlets - 2. Defrosting/demisting vents for side windows - 3. Upper side vents - 4. Radio controls on the steering wheel (whereapplicable) - 5. Outside lights control lever - 6. Speedometer (mileage recorder) - 7. Check panel - 8. Rev counter - 9. Windscreen wiper
control lever - 10. Fuel level gauge - 11. Centre air vents - 12. Infocenter Display - 13. Clock - 14. Engine coolant temperature gauge 15. Sound system (where required) - 16. Passenger’s Air bag - 17. Glove box - 18. Controls for heating, ventilation and climate control 19. Ashtray and cigar lighter - 20. Hazard warning lights switch - 21. Ignition switch - 22. Steering wheel lock/release lever - 23. Driver’s
Air bag and horns - 24. Cruise Control control lever (if provided) - 25. Bonnet opening lever - 26. Set of controls: instrument panel lighting
adjustment, trip meter reset and headlamp aiming device.

Alfawiki.nl
56

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER´ - Warning light fitted
for versions/markets
where applicable
A0B0584m

fig. 81 - T.SPARK versions
A. Speedometer (mileage recorder) - B. Odometer with double counter (total and partial) display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter - E.
Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light - F. Clock - G. Engine coolant temperature gauge with maximum temperature warning light - H.
Alfawiki.nl
Warning lights.

57

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARtWarning light fitted
only on Selespeed
gearbox versions´ Warning light fitted

for versions/markets
where applicable
A0B0695m

fig. 81a - JTS and T.SPARK (equipped with VDC system)
A. Speedometer (mileage recorder) - B. Odometer with double counter (total and partial) display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter - E.
Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light - F. Clock - G. Engine coolant temperature gauge with maximum temperature warning light - H.
Warning lights - L. Selespeed gearbox display (where fitted).

Alfawiki.nl
58

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARtWarning light fitted
only on Q-System
gearbox versions
A0B0696m

fig. 82 - 2.5 V6 24V versions
A. Speedometer (mileage recorder) - B. Odometer with double counter (total and partial) display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter E. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light - F. Clock - G. Engine coolant temperature gauge with maximum temperature warning light H. Warning lights - L. Q-System gearbox display (where fitted).

Alfawiki.nl
59

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR´ - Warning light fitted
for versions/markets
where applicable
A0B0586m

fig. 83 - JTD versions (equipped with VDC system)
A. Speedometer (mileage recorder) - B. Odometer with double counter (total and partial) display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter - E.
Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light - F. Clock - G. Engine coolant temperature gauge with maximum temperature warning light - H.
Warning lights.

Alfawiki.nl
60

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR´ - Warning light fitted
for versions/markets
where applicable
A0B0597m

fig. 83a - JTD versions
A. Speedometer (mileage recorder) - B. Odometer with double counter (total and partial) display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter - E.
Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light - F. Clock - G. Engine coolant temperature gauge with maximum temperature warning light - H.
Warning lights.

Alfawiki.nl
61

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

REV COUNTER
The rev. counter shows engine rpm. The
needle pointed to the danger area (red) indicates excessive high engine speed. Do not
drive for long periods with the needle in thisarea.
WARNING The electronic injection control system gradually shuts off the flow offuel when the engine is “over-revving” resulting in a gradual loss of engine power.
The rev counter may, when the engine is
idling, indicate gradual or sudden increaseof engine revs as the case may be; such behaviour is normal and must not be interpreted as a faulty condition as it occurs during normal operation, for instance whenclimate control or electric fan are switched
on. In particular, slow revs variation helps
keep the battery charged.

FUEL GAUGE AND RESERVEWARNING LIGHT
This shows the amount of fuel left in thefuel tank.

ENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURE GAUGE AND
MAXIMUM TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT

This warning light ç comes on to indicatethat approximately 7 litres of fuel are left in
the tank.

This shows the temperature of the engine
coolant fluid and begins when the fluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.

WARNING Under certain conditions(heavy slopes, for instance), the reading on
the gauge may differ from the actual
amount of fuel in the tank and changes inlevel may be indicated late.

The pointer should normally be towards
the middle of the scale. If the pointerreaches the higher temperature values ofthe scale (red area), the request for vehicle performance should be decreased.

This condition falls within the operation logics of the electronic control circuit to avoid
highly unstable readings due to swaying of
the fuel when travelling.

The illumination of the warning light ç(together with the message shown by the
Infocenter display) indicates an excessive
temperature of the engine cooling fluid. In
this case, stop the car and contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

WARNING Refuelling shall always be
performed with engine off and ignition key
to STOP. If the engine is off but the key
is to MAR, a wrong fuel level could temporarily be indicated. This is due to the internal system control logic and cannot be
considered as a system malfunctioning.

Alfawiki.nl
62

WARNING The temperature of the engine coolant may rise towards the maximum
values (red) when the vehicle is driven at
low speeds, especially when the ambient air
temperature is high. In this case, the vehicle should be stopped and the engine
switched off for a few minutes after which
the journey can be resumed, preferably ata higher speed.

The display shows:– the mileage on the first line (6 figures)– the trip meter on the second line (4 figures)
To reset the trip meter, keep button (Afig. 84) pressed for a few seconds.

Pressing button â, or after about 5 seconds from last operation performed, returns
to previous screen.

INFOCENTER DISPLAYRHEOSTAT LIGHTS
ADJUSTMENT (whererequired)This function makes it possible to adjust
the brightness (dimming/brightening) of
the Infocenter display during night and day.

WARNING During failure indication displaying, brightness cannot be adjusted since
under these conditions the display gets automatically to max. brightness.

To perform the desired brightness adjustment (night or day), use buttons â or ã,
bearing in mind that:– if the outside lights are on, the message
BRIGHTN. ADJUST. NIGHT will appear on thedisplay (fig. 85)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MILEAGE DISPLAY(with double meter display)– if the outside lights are OFF, the message BRIGHTN. ADJUST. DAY will appear on
the display (fig. 86).

A0B0489m

A0B2124g

A0B2125g

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 84

fig. 85

fig. 8663

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INFOCENTER DISPLAY(where required)
The Infocenter display is able to display all
the useful and necessary information during
driving, in particular:
INFORMATION AVAILABLE ON STANDARDSCREEN– Date (A-fig. 87)

The standard screen will remain on until
a function is activated which requires being shown on the display (e.g. “Infocenter
display rheostat lights adjustment”).
INFORMATION ABOUT VEHICLE
CONDITION (for each event)– Scheduled maintenance programme expiry– Trip computer information– Outside temperature (B)– Rheostat brightness adjustment– Failure and warning symbol (e.g.: possible presence of ice on the road C).

– Engine oil level (only JTD versions).
Moreover, a menu is available which allows the driver to perform, by operating thecontrol buttons (see “Control buttons” in thenext pages) the following controls and settings:

Set-up menu
SPEED LIMIT– Switching on/off the relevant signal(ON/OFF)– Speed limit setting
TRIP B ON/OFF– Switching on/off the relevant function(ON/OFF)DATE SETTING/TIME SETTING– Day setting– Month setting– Year setting– Hour setting– Minute setting
LANGUAGE SELECTION– Setting the language for the messages
shown on the display

A0B2126g

Alfawiki.nl
64

fig. 87

PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE

DEFAULT VALUE RESET– Selection of the following units: km or
mi (miles), °C or °F, l/100 km or km/l

– Displaying the expiry date of the next
car service check (strictly related to theProgrammed Maintenance Schedule)– Switching on/off the relevant function(ON/OFF)WARNING/FAILURE BUZZER VOLUME
SETTINGDISPLAY CONTRAST ADJUSTMENTEXIT MENU– Volume setting of warning/failurebuzzer– Infocenter display graphics brightness
setting (dimming/brightening)“WINTER” TYRES SPEED LIMIT– Switching on/off the relevant function(ON/OFF)– Setting the limit speed value among theavailable ones (160 km/h, 190 km/h
or 210 km/h)– Exiting the menu
WARNING The use of polarized glasses
may reduce Infocenter display readability.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

UNITS SELECTION

Alfawiki.nl
65

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARCONTROL BUTTONS (fig. 88-89)
To make use of the information that the Infocenter display (with the key in the MAR position) is able to provide, you should first get familiar with the relevant control buttons (placed on the central console aside the climate control/ventilation controls and on top of the left
lever for the Trip computer function) and use them in accordance with the descriptions below. It is also recommended that you read over thischapter before performing any operation.

INFO, â, ã buttons
Depending on the cases: to scroll the menu screens and their respective options
upwards or to increase the displayed value

A0A0013m

ç

A single press for less than 2 seconds (pulse), shown byin the following
screens, to confirm the desired option and/or switch to the next screen or access the menuéA single press for more than 2 seconds, shown byin the following screens,
to confirm the desired option and return to the previous screen
Depending on the cases: to scroll the menu screens and their respective options
downwards or to decrease the displayed value

fig. 88

SET button

A0A0014m

ãä

A single press for less than 2 seconds (pulse), shown byin the following
screens, to scroll the different Trip computer information screensåA single press for more than 2 seconds, shown byin the following screens,
to reset the Trip computer information (reset) and initiate a new mission

Alfawiki.nl
66

fig. 89

The menu is made up of a set of functions arranged in a “circular fashion”, which can be selected by means of buttons âand ã, for access to the different select operations and settings (see the examples “LANGUAGE” and “DATE” in the table below); for further details, also
refer to “Access to the menu screen” in the following pages.

ç

Day

SPEED
TRIP BçDATE

DEFAULT VALUESCONTRASTLANGUAGESERVICEWINTER TYRES

Year

Hour

MENU OFFMonth

Minutes

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MENU DESCRIPTION

UNITS

ç

BUZZER

EnglishDeutschItaliano

Alfawiki.nl

PortogueseEspãnol
Français
Nederlands

67

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INITIAL CHECK
By turning the ignition key to the MAR position, the Infocenter display will show the message CHECK ACTIVE: this indicates the start of thediagnosis phase for all the electronic systems available on the vehicle; this phase lasts a few seconds (in diesel versions only, the Infocenter
display is able to provide the engine oil level indication too, see following paragraph “Engine oil level check”). If, during this phase, no anomaly is found and after the engine has been started, the display will show the message CHECK OK.

If the display shows an anomaly message, see paragraph“Warning lights and indications” in this chapter.

Is theenginestarted?

If nofailuresarepresent

YES

NO

or
JTD versions onlyStandard screen display

Alfawiki.nl
68

continues on next page

The Programmed Maintenance Schedule includes car maintenance every 20,000 km(or 12,000 miles) or one year; this is shown automatically, with the ignition key at MAR,
starting from 2,000 km (or 1,240 miles) or 30 day from this deadline and it is shown again
every 200 km (or 124 miles) or 3 days. When a programmed maintenance interval(“coupon”) is near to come, turning the ignition key to MAR, will display the message
SCHEDULED SERVICE WITHIN followed by the number of kilometers, days or miles to go before
vehicle maintenance. The PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE message is displayed in km,
mi or days, according to the approaching service interval. At the very moment the valueof 0 km, 0 miles or 0 days is reached, the display will show, every time the ignition key
is turned to MAR, the message SCHEDULED SERVICE EXPIRED, followed by the numberof kilometers, miles or days. In this case, to reset this visual information contact
Authorised Alfa Romeo Services.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

continued from previous page

Alfawiki.nl
69

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Engine oil level check(JTD versions only)
By turning the ignition key to the MAR
position, the Infocenter display will show theengine oil level display for about 3 seconds.
During this phase, to clear the display andmove to the following screen, press.

The following display in fig. 90 refers tocorrect engine oil level. As the oil level gradually falls, the full bars go off leaving room
for the empty bars.

The following fig. 91 and fig. 92 refer to the display with an oil level below theforeseen minimum. Under this condition, thebars are all empty with symbol and warning messages.

ç

WARNING To ensure correct reading of
the engine oil level, the check must be carried out with the vehicle on level ground.

A0B2134g

fig. 91

A0B2129g

A0B2135g

Alfawiki.nl
70

fig. 90

fig. 92

The following refers to the display(fig. 93) (appearing for about 3 seconds)
with an oil level above the foreseen maximum. Under this condition the bars are all
full.

Do not add oil with different characteristics fromthose of the oil alreadyused in the engine (see “Fluids andlubricants” in chapter “Car maintenance”).

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to havethe engine oil restored toits correct level.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Restore correct engine oillevel (see paragraph“Checking fluid levels” inchapter “Car maintenance”).

A0B2136g

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 9371

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ACCESS TO THE MENU SCREEN
After the INITIAL CHECK, it is possible to access the menu screen by pressing button
To navigate use the âand ãbuttons.

ç.

WARNING If you access the Menu and no setting/adjustment is made within about 60 seconds, the system automatically leaves the Menu
and displays the screen previously set. In this case, the latest setting selected but not confirmed (by means of button) is not stored; therefore, the operation must be performed again.
– When the car is running, only the short menu can be accessed (SPEED LIMIT setting).
– When the car is stopped, the extended menu can be accessed.
The following table gives the description of the cases provided.

ç

ç

See
INITIAL CHECKExample of standard
screenIs the carmoving?

YES

Short menu screen

NO
SPEED
TRIP BDATELANGUAGEUNITS
BUZZERWINTER TYRESSERVICEINTENSITY
DEFAULT VALUESMENU OFF
Extended menu
screenAlfawiki.nl
72

With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit which, if exceeded, automatically sounds a buzzer and displays a specific message
to alert the driver. To set the limit speed, proceed as follows:
Return to previously
set screen, e.g.

See INITIAL CHECK and
ACCESS TO THE MENU SCREENâã
Menu screen

â
ã

é
ç
Select, by means of buttons âor ãactivation or deactivation(ON/OFF). The set option will be highlighted.

ç
é

ç
â
ã

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SPEED LIMIT (SPEED)

Using âand/or ãbuttons to set the speed required. During the setting
operation, the value flashes on the screen. The possible setting is between 30
and 250 km/h or between 20 and 150 mph, depending on the unit
set previously (see paragraph UNITS described later). Every press (pulse)of the button increases or decreases by one unit. Keeping the button pressed
obtains fast increase or decrease. When you are near the required setting, release
the button and complete adjustment with single presses.

Returnto menu screenéAlfawiki.nl

73

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Speed limit exceeded indication
As soon as the vehicle exceeds the set speed limit, the following display is shown automatically, together with the sounding of a buzzer.

Example of display when the set value is 120 km/h

Alfawiki.nl
74

With this option it is possible to turn ON or OFF the TRIP B function (partial trip) which displays the figures relating to: TRAVEL DISTANCE B, AVERAGE CONSUMPTION B, AVERAGE SPEED B, TRAVEL TIME B during a “partial mission”.

For further details, see “General Trip - Trip B”

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENâã
Menu screenéç

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

TRIP B ON/OFF (TRIP B)

Return to previously
set screen, e.g.

â
ã

é
ç

Using the âor ãbuttons choose activation
or deactivation ON/OFF.
The set option will be highlighted.

Return to menu screen

Alfawiki.nl
75

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARDATE SETTING/TIME SETTING (DATE)To set the date (day - month - year) and the time (hours-minutes), proceed as follows:
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENâã
Menu screen

é
ç
â
ã

Return to previously
set screen, e.g.:

é
ç
â
ã

Each press (pulse) on the âor ãbuttons increases ordecreases by one unit.
Keeping the corresponding
button pressed obtains fast
increase or decrease.
When you are near
the required value, release thecontrol and complete adjustment
by single presses.

76

é
ç
â
ã
Alfawiki.nléç

continues on next page

â
ã

é
ç

Return to previously
set screen, e.g.:âã

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

continued from previous pageéçReturn to menu screen

Each press (pulse) on the âor ãbuttons increases ordecreases buttons increases
or decreases by one unit.
Keeping the corresponding buttonpressed obtains fast increase or
decrease. When you are near
the required value, release thecontrol and complete adjustment
by single presses.

Alfawiki.nl
77

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

LANGUAGE SELECTION (LANGUAGE)
The messages shown on the display can be provided in several languages (Italian, Deutsch, English, Spanish, French, Dutch, Portuguese).
To select the required language, proceed as follows:

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENâã
Menu screenéçReturn to previously
set screen, e.g.

â
ã

é
ç
Return to menu screen

Alfawiki.nl
78

The display provides information in relation to the unit of measure set. To choose the units, proceed as follows:

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENâã
Menu screen

Return to previously
setscreen, e.g.

é
ç
â
ã

é
ç
â
ã

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

UNITS SELECTION (UNITS)

é
ç
â
ã

é
ç
Return to menu screen

Alfawiki.nl
79

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING/FAILURE BUZZER VOLUME SETTING (BUZZER)The volume of the buzzer that signals any failure or warning to the driver can be adjusted according to a pre-set scale using the âand/orãbuttons. To switch OFF or adjust, proceed as follows:

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENâã
Menu screenéçReturn to previously
set screen, e.g.

â
ã

é
ç
Return to menu screen

Alfawiki.nl
80

With this function it is possible to set the speed limit when travelling with winter tyres. The speed limit can be chosen between: 160 km/h,
190 km/h or 210 km/h (see paragraph “Winter tyres” in section “Correct use of the car”).

Return to previously
set screen, e.g.

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

â
ã
Menu
screenéçâã

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR“WINTER” TYRES SPEED LIMIT (WINTER TYRES)

Return tomenu screen
Select, by means of buttons âor ãactivation or deactivation(ON/OFF). The set option will be highlighted.

ç

ç
é

é
Alfawiki.nl

81

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE (SERVICE)

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

With the SERVICE function it is possible to receive information connected with correct vehicle maintenance. To consult this function, proceed as follows:âãMenu screen

â
ã
â

ç

â
ã

ã

ã â

ã
â

ã
â

ã
â

ç

é

Alfawiki.nl
82

Return to menu screen Return to previously
set screen, e.g:

The Programmed Maintenance Schedule includes vehicle maintenanceevery 20,000 km (or 12,000 miles) or one year; this is shown
automatically, with the ignition key at MAR, starting from 2,000
km (or 1,240 miles) or 30 day from this deadline and it is shown
again every 200 km (or 124 miles) or 3 days. When a programmed maintenance interval(“coupon”) is near to come, turning the ignition key to MAR, will display the message
SCHEDULED SERVICE WITHIN followed by the number of kilometers, days or miles to go
before vehicle maintenance. The PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE message is displayed in km,
mi or days, according to the approaching service interval. At the very moment the value of 0km, 0 miles or 0 days is reached, the display will show, every time the ignition key is turned
to MAR, the message SCHEDULED SERVICE EXPIRED, followed by the number ofkilometers, miles or days. In this case, to reset this visual information contact Authorized Alfa
Romeo Services.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING Products shown in the SERVICE screen and to be used for scheduled maintenance could be subject to modifications. Refer toparagraph “Fluids and lubricants” in section “Technical specifications”.

Alfawiki.nl
83

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARDISPLAY CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT (CONTRAST)
This function allows to adjust the Infocenter display brightness (dimming/brightening).
To perform the adjustment, proceed as follows:

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENâã
Menu screenéçReturn to previously
set screen , e.g.

â
ã

é
ç
Return to menu screen

Alfawiki.nl
84

The following function:– If ON restores: Speed limit, Trip B, Light rheostat, Language, Temperature unit, km/mi unit, Consumption unit, Buzzer, Winter tyres, Contrast,with the following values Speed limit = 120 km/h, Trip B ON, Light rheostat ON = 4, Light rheostat OFF = 1, Language = Italian, Temperatureunit = °C, Distance unit = km, Consumption unit = l/100 km, Buzzer = 2, Winter tyres OFF (value set at 160 km/h), contrast value = 3– If OFF, the above parameter values can be set manually

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO MENU SCREENâã
Menu screenéç

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DEFAULT VALUE RESET (DEFAULT VALUES)

Return to previously
set screen, e.g.

â
ã

é
ç
Return to menu screen

Alfawiki.nl
85

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

EXIT MENU (MENU OFF)
With this function it is possible to exit the setup menu and return to the previously set screen.

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENâãç
Return to previously
set screen, e.g.

Menu screen

Alfawiki.nl
86

The TRIP COMPUTER function gives information relating to the operating status of the vehicle on the Infocenter display. This function comprises
the GENERAL TRIP concerning the complete mission of the car and TRIP B concerning the partial car mission. This function (as shown in thegraph below) is contained within the complete mission. Both functions are resettable.
The GENERAL TRIP displays the figures relating to RANGE, TRAVEL DISTANCE, AVERAGE CONSUMPTION, ACTUAL CONSUMPTION, AVERAGE VELOCITY, TRAVELTIME (complete mission time).
The TRIP B (with automatic reset each time at least 2 hours have passed since stopping the engine), displays information concerning TRAVELDISTANCE B, AVERAGE CONSUMPTION B, AVERAGE SPEED B, TRAVEL TIME B (partial mission time).
Start of journey procedure (reset)
To start a new journey monitored by the GENERAL TRIP, with the ignition key at MAR, press the button ã with å (see “Control buttons”).
Reset GENERAL TRIP
End of complete mission
Start of new mission

Reset GENERAL TRIP
End of complete mission
Start of new mission˙˙

GENERAL TRIP

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

GENERAL TRIP - TRIP B

Reset TRIP B

˙

End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission

˙

TRIP BEnd of partial mission
Start of new partial mission

˙˙

Reset TRIP B

TRIP B˙

Reset TRIP B
End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission

˙

TRIP B

Reset TRIP B
End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission

The reset operation (pressing the å button) in the presence of the screens concerning the GENERAL TRIP also makes it possible to reset
TRIP B. The reset operation (pressing the å button) in the presence of only the screens concerning TRIP B makes it possible to reset only the
information associated with this function.
Alfawiki.nl
WARNING The RANGE and ACTUAL CONSUMPTION information cannot be reset.

87

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING At the beginning of a new mission, due to battery reconnection, the average consumption value is initialised to the “average
predefined standard consumption” equal to 9 l/100 km (for 1.6 T.SPARK, 1.8 T.SPARK, 2.0 JTS and 2.0 JTS Selespeed versions),
12 l/100 km (for 2.5 V6 24V and 2.5 V6 24V Q-System versions) and 6.5 l/100 km (diesel versions only).
The TRIP COMPUTER information is displayed in sequence according to the table below.
Continues onnext pageSee INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

ä

ä

å

ä

å

Previously set screen;
e.g.

ä

ä

å

å
88

ä

Reset GENERAL TRIP and TRIP B, excluding
Range and Actual Consumption(see nextAlfawiki.nl
paragraph RESET GENERAL TRIP)åäContinued fromprevious page

TRIP B ON?

NO

YES

ä
å

ä
å

ä
å

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Return to previously
set screen, e.g.:äå

Reset TRIP B
å (see next paragraph
RESET TRIP B)WARNING Pressing the â button returns
automaticallyto the standard screen
Alfawiki.nl

89

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

After resetting TRIP by pressing the button with
Reset GENERAL TRIP

Reset TRIP B

å mode, the display will show the following functions:å= Reset GENERAL TRIP and TRIP B(excluding Range and Actual Consumption)

å = Reset TRIP B

Alfawiki.nl
90A) range values lower than 50 km (approx. 31 miles) (after the reduced range warning message),B) Parking with running engine or car speed lower than 4 km/h for over 5 minutes.
TRAVEL DISTANCE = This shows the distance traveled by the car from the start of the new mission (*).
AVERAGE CONSUMPTION = This shows the average actual consumption in l/km or in l/100 km depending on the unit selected.
ACTUAL CONSUMPTION = This shows the consumption of the car updated every 5 sec. approx. If parking with running engine or incase of speed values lower than 4 km/h the display will show “- - - -“. Actual consumption calculation algorithm, according to the above procedure, restarts as soon as the car speed will be equal to or higher than 4 km/h.
AVERAGE VELOCITY = This shows the average speed of the car as a function of the overall travel time elapsed from the start of the
new mission (*).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

RANGE = This shows the distance (in km or miles) the car can still cover before needing fuel if keeping the same driving conditions. The
display will show “- - - -“ after the following events:

TRAVELTIME = time elapsed from the start of the new mission (*).
(*) NEW MISSION: this takes place when performing the “manual” reset by pressing the dedicated button.
WARNING GENERAL TRIP is reset automatically when the Distance Traveled is equal to 9999,9 km (or mi), when Travel Time is 99:59(99 hours and 59 minutes) or after reconnecting the battery.
WARNING If no information is available, all the TRIP COMPUTER parameters display the message “****” instead of a value, together
with the typical description of each parameter. When the normal operation condition is resumed, the count of the various parameters starts
again normally, with no reset of the values displayed prior to the failure, nor the start of a new mission.

Alfawiki.nl
91

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING LIGHTS AND INDICATIONSGENERAL WARNING
The failure indications shown on the Infocenter display, together with the buzzer (adjustable) and the turning on of the relevant warning light (if available), are accompanied by specific warning messages (e.g. “Go to dealer”, “Switch off eng., do not proceed”, etc…).
These warnings are concise and precautionary and are intended to suggest the prompt action that the driver should take when afailure occurs. However, these warnings are not to be considered exhaustive and/or alternative to the prescriptions of this Owner’s Manual,
which must always be read over carefully. When an anomaly occurs always refer to the contents of this chapter.
WARNING When an anomaly occurs, the Infocenter display reaches its maximum brightness. By pressing button â the warning messages
disappear and the symbol referring to the failure warning is reduced to an icon in the right bottom area of the display.
WARNING The anomaly warnings that appear on the Infocenter display are divided into two categories: very serious and serious anomalies.
Very serious anomalies are displayed indefinitely, by interrupting any message previously shown on the display, and are proposed again every
time the ignition key is turned to MAR, until the malfunction is eliminated. Moreover, the “cycle” can be interrupted by pressing button â: inthis case, the symbol referring to the anomaly will be shown in the right bottom area of the display until the malfunction is eliminated.
Serious anomalies are displayed for about 20 seconds and then disappear, but they are proposed again every time the ignition key in turned
to MAR. At the end of the display cycle, equal to about 20 seconds, or when button â is pressed, the symbol referring to the anomaly will
be shown in the right bottom area of the display until the malfunction is eliminated.

Alfawiki.nl
92

x

Messageon display

LOW BRAKE FLUID AND/OR HANDBRAKE ON
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light comes on but must go out after a
few seconds.
The warning light comes on (together with the message + symbol shown on the display) when
the level of the brake fluid inside the tank falls below the minimum, due to a possible leak in thecircuit and when the handbrake is switch on with the car moving.
WARNING
If the warning light x comes on when travelling (together with themessage on the display), check that the handbrake is not engaged. If
the warning light stays on with the handbrake off (together with the message
on the display), stop immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

d

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warningl ight

BRAKE PAD WEAR
The warning light on the dial comes on (together with the message + symbol shown on the display) when the front brake pads are worn; in this case, have them replaced as soon as possible.
WARNING As the car is fitted with wear sensors for the front brake pads, when replacing them,also check the rear brake pads.

Alfawiki.nl
93

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning lightçMessageon display

HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREWARNING
When the engine is very hot, do not remove the tank cap: danger ofburns.
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light comes on but must go out after a
few seconds.
The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on (together with the message + symbol
shown on the display) when the engine is overheated.
If the warning light comes on, proceed as follows:– Normal driving conditions: stop the car, switch the engine off and check if the waterlevel inside the tank is not below the reference mark MIN.
In this case, wait a few minutes to let the engine cool down, then open the cap slowly and carefully, fill with coolant, making sure its level is between reference marks MIN and MAX on thetank. Moreover, perform a visual check for any fluid leakage. If the warning light comes on again
the next time the engine is started, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
– Car heavy duty (e.g. towing a trailer uphill or car fully loaded): slow down and, if thewarning light stays on, stop the car. Pause for 2 or 3 minutes, keeping the engine on and slightly
accelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, then switch the engine off.
Check correct fluid level, as described above.
WARNING In case of highly demanding use of the car, you are recommended to keep the engine on and slightly accelerated for a few minutes before switching it off.

Alfawiki.nl
94

¬

Messageon display

AIR BAG FAILURE
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light on the check panel comes on, but mustgo out after a few seconds. This warning light will come on glowing steadily if there is an operating
failure in the Air bag system.
WARNING
If the ¬ warning light does not turn on when turning the ignition key
to MAR or if it stays on when travelling, this could indicate a failurein safety retaining systems; under this condition air bags or pretensioners could
not trigger in the event of collision or, in a restricted number of cases, they
could trigger accidentally. Stop the car and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the system checked immediately.
The failure of the warning light ¬ (warning light off) is also indicated by the
flashing of the passenger’s front Air bag deactivated warning light F for morethan the normal seconds.

F

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG DEACTIVATED
The check panel warning light F turns on when the passenger’s front Air bag is deactivated by meansof the relevant key switch. With the passenger’s front Air bag activated, turning the ignition key toMAR, the warning light on the check panel comes on but must go out after approx. 4 seconds.
WARNING
Warning light F indicates also warning light ¬ failure. This is indicated by intermittent flashing, over 4 seconds, of warning light F.
In this event, warning light ¬ could be not up to indicate restraint system failures, if any. Stop the car and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to havethe system checked immediately.

Alfawiki.nl

95

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

Messageon display

LOW OIL PRESSUREv

When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light on the check panel comes on but
must go out as soon as the engine is started.
WARNING
If the warning light v comes on when travelling (together withthe message + symbol shown on the display), switch the engine off immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

w<

LOW BATTERY CHARGE
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light on the check panel comes on, but mustgo out as soon as the engine is started (a slight delay is permitted when the engine is running atidle). It if stays on, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services immediately.

SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED
The warning light on the check panel will turn on for some seconds when, with the ignition key atMAR, the driver’s seat belt is not fastened properly.

Alfawiki.nl96´Messageon display

INCOMPLETE DOOR CLOSINGThe message + symbol shown on the display will appear when one or more doors or the tailgate
are not properly shut.
The warning light on the dial turns on when one or more doors or the tailgate are not properly shut.
This warning light is only fitted on the dials of IMPRESSION versions.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

Alfawiki.nl
97

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning lightU

Messageon display

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM (EOBD) FAILURE
In normal conditions, turning the ignition key to MAR, the dial warning light turns on but it should
go off when the engine has started. The initial turning on indicates that the warning light is working properly.
If the warning light stays on or turns on (together with the message + symbol shown on the display) when travelling:glowing steadily - indicates a fault in the supply/ignition/injection system which could cause
high exhaust emissions, possible lack of performance, poor handling and high consumption levels.
In these conditions, it is possible to continue driving without however demanding heavy effort orhigh speeds. Prolonged use of the car with the warning light on may cause damage. Contact an
Alfa Romeo Authorized Service as soon as possible.
The warning light turns off if the fault disappears, but it is still stored by the system;
flashing - indicates that the catalyst could be damaged (see paragraph on “EOBD system” in thischapter).
If the warning light flashes, it is necessary to release the accelerator pedal to lower the speed until the warning light stops flashing; continue travelling at moderate speed trying to avoid driving
conditions that could cause the warning light to flash again. Contact an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service as soon as possible.
If, when turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light U does
not switch on or if it turns on glowing steadily or flashing when travelling, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Service as soon as possible. The
operation of the warning light U can be checked by traffic agents by proper
equipment, therefore comply with the regulations in force in the country where
you are driving.

Alfawiki.nl
98

YMessageon display

ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light on the check panel should flash only
once and then go out. If the warning light stays on with the key at MAR, this indicates a possible
failure: see “Alfa Romeo CODE System”.
WARNING The turning on at the same time of U and Y warning lights indicates a failure of
the Alfa Romeo CODE System.
If with the engine running, the Y warning light flashes, this means that the car is not protectedby the engine inhibitor device (see “Alfa Romeo CODE system” in this chapter). Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services to have all the keys memorised.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE ON THE ROAD
When the outside temperature is below or equal to 3° C, in order to warn the driver on the presence of ice on the road, message + symbol are displayed accompanied by the related buzz.
The buzz lasts about 2 seconds while the message is displayed for about 10 seconds. After thisperiod, only the symbol is displayed until the temperature does not go over 6° C or until the engine stops.
If during travelling, after the presence of ice on the road has been signalled, should temperaturerise over 6° C the symbol will go off and should temperature fall again to 3° C, a new message +symbol will be displayed accompanied by the buzz.

Alfawiki.nl
99

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

Messageon display

GLOW PLUGS (JTD engines)m

When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the dial warning light comes on and go out when theglow plugs have reached the pre-established temperature.
Start the engine as soon as the warning light has gone out.
WARNING With a high environment temperature, the warning light may turn on for an imperceptible length of time. For versions/markets where applicable, the warning light flashes for approx.
30 seconds after starting the engine, which means that there is a fault in the glow plug warming
system, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

c

WATER IN THE FUEL OIL FILTER (JTD engines)
The warning light switches on with fixed light when driving, to indicate the presence of water inthe fuel oil filter.
The presence of water in the fuel circuit may cause serious damage tothe entire injection system and cause irregular engine operation. If warning light c comes on the dial, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
as soon as possible to have the system relieved. Should the above warning indication come one immediately after topping up, water has probably been poured
into the tank: turn the engine off immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Alfawiki.nl
100Messageon display

ENGINE OIL SENSOR FAILURE (JTD versions)
The message + symbol are shown on the display when there is a failure in the engine oil levelsensor. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible to have the fault eliminated.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
The message + symbol are shown on the display when the fuel cut-off switch comes into operation.

WARNINGIf, after the message has been displayed, you can smell fuel or noticeleaks from the supply system, do not re-engage the switch to avoid
the risk of fire.

Alfawiki.nl
101

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light>

Messageon display

INEFFICIENT ABS SYSTEM
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light comes on but must go out after a
few seconds.
This warning light comes on (together with the message + symbol, where required, on the display)when the system is inefficient. In this case, normal braking is ensured, though without making useof the ABS system. Caution is recommended, especially in cases of less than perfect grip. In any
case, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible.

x

Inefficient EBD electronic braking distributor+>

WARNINGThe vehicle is equipped with an electronic braking distributor (EBD). Simultaneous lighting of dial warning lights > and x (together with themessage + symbol on the display) with the engine running indicates an EBD
system failure; in this case, any sudden braking action can cause early lockingof rear wheels, with possible sideslip. Drive very carefully and go immediately
to the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized Service to have the system checked.

Alfawiki.nl
102á

Messageon display

VDC SYSTEM (VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL)(optional for versions/markets where applicable)
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the dial warning light comes on but must go out aftera few seconds.
If the warning light does not go out, or if it stays on (together with the message + symbol on thedisplay and the coming on of the ASR button led) when the vehicle is running, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
The flashing of the warning lamp when the vehicle is running indicates the actuation of the VDC
system.

W

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

OUTSIDE LIGHT FAILURE
The warning light comes on when an anomaly is found in one of the following lights:– sidelights– braking lights or corresponding fuse– rear fog guards– number plate lights.
The warning of a fault may mean one or more blown bulbs, a burnt fuse or cut off connection.

Alfawiki.nl
103

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning lightçMessageon display

FUEL RESERVE
The warning light comes on when about 7 litres of fuel are left in the tank, and when the car
range is below 50 km.
REDUCED RANGEThis message is displayed when the car range is below 50 km.

SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDEDThe message + symbol turns on, together with the sound of the buzzer, on the display when thevehicle exceeds the speed limit set previously (see “Speed limit” in this section).

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
This message appears on the display 2,000 kilometres from the deadline given in the Scheduled
Maintenance Programme (every 20,000 km) and it is shown again at timed intervals, turning theignition key to MAR every 200 km.

Alfawiki.nl
104

4
5
R
E

Messageon display

REAR FOG LIGHTSThis warning light comes on when the rear fog lights are turned on.

FRONT FOG LIGHTS(optional for versions/markets where applicable)
This warning light comes on when the front fog lights are turned on.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR (INTERMITTENT)This warning light comes on when the control lever is moved downwards or, together with righthand indicator, when the hazard warning lights are switched on.

RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR (INTERMITTENT)This warning light comes on when the control lever is moved upwards or, together with the lefthand indicator, when the hazard warning lights are switched on.

Alfawiki.nl
105

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning light

3

Ü
1

l

Messageon display

SIDELIGHTS AND DIPPED-BEAM HEADLIGHTS
The warning light on the dial comes on when the sidelights or dipped-beam headlights are
switched on.

CONSTANT SPEED ADJUSTMENT (CRUISE CONTROL)(where applicable)
The warning light on the check panel turns on, with the knurled ring of the cruise control in the
ON position, when the device starts to intervene on the engine.

MAIN-BEAM HEADLIGHTS
The warning light comes on when these lights are turned on.

DIRECTION INDICATORS IF A TRAILER IS TOWEDThe warning light on the dial comes on when the direction indicator control lever is moved up or
down, or when the hazard warning light button is pressed.

Alfawiki.nl
106

Messageon display

SELESPEED GEARBOX FAILUREtt

Turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light on the cluster shall come on and then go off after about 4 seconds. If the warning light stays on, it indicates that a fault has been detected in the Selespeed gearbox; at the same time, the buzzer beeps intermittently for 4 seconds to draw the attention of the driver. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible to remove the fault.

Q-SYSTEM AUTOMATIC GEARBOX FAILURE
Turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light on the cluster shall come on and then go off
after about 4 seconds. If the warning light stays on or turns on when travelling, it indicates overheated gearbox oil (glowing steadily) or a gearbox fault (flashing).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning lighton the dial

Warning light glowing steadily: it indicates that the gearbox oil has reached the maximum established temperature.
To make oil cooling down, stop the car, move the lever to P or N and let the engine idle until thewarning light goes out. Resume driving without demanding high performance from the engine. If
the warning light comes on again, it is necessary to stop again with the engine idling until it goesout again. If the interval between one lighting up of the warning light and next is below 15 minutes,
you are advised to stop the car, turn the engine off and wait for the engine-gearbox unit to cool down
completely. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.
Warning light flashing: it indicates a fault in the automatic gearbox.
The automatic control system provides an emergency programme. Under these circumstances,
you are advised to stop the car and turn the engine off; in fact, the next time the engine is started,
the self-diagnostic system could cut off the fault which will however be memorised. Conversely, if
the fault remains (warning light flashing), it is necessary to select the gears manually as if driving
a car with mechanical gearbox, bearing in mind that the only two speeds available are the 2nd and4th gear. Contact AlfaAlfawiki.nl
Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

107

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

A0A0571m

fig. 94
1 Central defrosting/demisting vents for windscreen - 2 Adjustable upper side vents - 3 Defrosting/demisting vents for side windows 4 Adjustable side air outlets - 5 Adjustable upper vent - 6 Adjustable centre, swivel vents - 7 Front feet area fixed vents - 8 Rear feet area
fixed vents - 9 Rear adjustable swivel outlets.
Alfawiki.nl

108

CENTRE VENT ADJUSTMENT(fig. 96)

UPPER SIDE VENT ADJUSTMENT(fig. 97)

The vent has an opening/closing control.

Each vent has a lever which makes it possible to direct the flow of air towards thepassengers in an horizontal direction. To adjust the air flow, use the opening/closing
centre vent device.

On the dashboard ends are adjustable vents(A) for car interior, and fixed defrosting/demisting vents (B) for side windows.

closed.
•) == Completely
Completely open.

closed.
•( == Completely
Completely open.

A0B0572m

Air flow can be adjusted by means of theknob (C).
closed.
•) == Completely
Completely open.

A0B0573m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

UPPER VENT ADJUSTMENT(fig. 95)

A0B0039m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 95

fig. 96

fig. 97

109

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARREAR SWIVEL OUTLET
ADJUSTMENT

Air flow can be adjusted by means of vanes(A) with press-on opening and closing.

Fig. 98: front seats (on dashboard ends)

Air flow can be directed by rotating the outlet by means of the vanes.

Fig. 99: rear seat (on the console between seats)

MANUAL CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM(fig. 99a - where applicable)
CONTROLS
1 Air temperature adjustment knob (mixing warm / cold air)
2 Climate control compressor on / off button
3 Inside air re-circulation on / off button
4 Fan knob
5 Maximum defrosting / demisting on /off button for windscreen and front side windows and wing mirror coils
6 Rearscreen heating and wing mirror defrosting on / off button.
7 Air distribution knob.

A0B0038m

A0B0289m

Alfawiki.nl
110

fig. 98

fig. 99

To obtain the temperature required, proceed as follows:– turn knob (1) as far as it will go clockwise– turn knob (4) clockwise to the required
speed;– urn knob (7) to set air distribution as
follows:
Q
to warm feet and to demist theZwindscreen

QUICK FRONT WINDOWDEMISTING / DEFROSTING(MAX-DEF FUNCTION)
Press button (5) - to quicken demisting/ defrosting of the windscreen and front side
windows (MAX-DEF function).
Max. quick demisting / defrosting function will be activated.

When this function is on the relevant button led will come on.
To turn this function off, press button (5)-again (the button led will go off) or turnwhatever knob or press any manual climate
control system button.
After demisting/defrosting, turn the
MAX-DEF function off to maintain the optimum conditions of vision.
A0B0598m

ZE to warm feet and to keep the facecool (bilevel function)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARHEATINGZ
to direct warm air to the front andrear lower parts of the passenger compartment.
E

for summer ventilationQ

to defrost/demist the windscreen– turn off inside air re-circulation (if on).

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 99a

111

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Preventive demisting procedure
In cases of heavy damp and/or rain
and/or big differences in temperature between inside the car and outside, it is advisable to proceed as follows to demist thewindows:– turn off inside air re-circulation (if on)– turn knob (1) as far as it will go clockwise– turn knob (4) clockwise to an intermediate speed– turn knob (7) to Q or Q if the winZ
dows do not mist up.

REARSCREEN AND WING
MIRROR (where applicable)
DEMISTING / DEFROSTINGFAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT

Press button (6) ( ) to demist /defrost
the rearscreen and wing mirrors (where applicable).

– open completely the central and side
vents;

When this function is on the relevant button led will come on.

– turn knob (7) to E;

To turn this function off, press the button
again, the button led will go off.
WARNING Do not apply stickers on theinside of the rearscreen over the heating filaments to avoid damaging it.

Climate control system is very useful to
speed up demisting. Set controls to demisting function as described previously andswitch the climate control system on bypressing button (2) √Alfawiki.nl
112

To ventilate the passenger's compartment
properly, proceed as follows:– turn knob (4) to the required speed;– - turn off inside air re-circulation (if on).

Press button (3) vto turn the inside air
re-circulation function on.
When this function is on the relevant button led will come on.
It is advisable to turn on the inside air recirculation function in queues or tunnels to
avoid admitting polluted air from outside.

WARNING The inside air re-circulation
function makes it possible to reach the required "heating" or "cooling" conditions
faster.
It is however inadvisable to use it on
rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting inside, especially if the climate control
system is off.

The prolonged use of this function should
however be avoided, especially with several
persons on board, to avoid the possibility of
the windows misting inside.

CLIMATE CONTROL (COOLING)
Proceed as follows:– turn knob (1) as far as it will go counterclockwise (blue led next to TEMP lit);– turn knob (4) to the required speed;– turn knob (7) to E;-– press buttons (2) √ and (3) vthe
relevant leds will go on.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SWITCHING THE INSIDE AIR
RE-CIRCULATION FUNCTION
ON

Alfawiki.nl
113

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Cooling adjustment

LOOKING AFTER THE SYSTEM

Proceed as follows:

During the winter the climate control system must be turned on at least once amonth for about minutes.

AUTOMATICTWO-ZONE CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM

Before summer, have the system checkedat Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

To start the system (fig. 100):– turn off inside air re-circulation (if on);– turn knob (1) counterclockwise to reduce temperature;– turn knob (4) counterclockwise to reduce the fan speed.

– turn the knob rings to set the required
temperatures (driver’s side – passenger’sside).
– press the AUTO button.
WARNING The climate control system
makes it possible to adjust the temperatures
required for the two sides with a maximum
difference of 7°C between the driver’s andthe passenger’s sides.
WARNING The climate control compressor works only when the engine is running and the outside temperature is morethan 2°C.

Alfawiki.nl
114

The coolant used for the
climate control system is
R134a which meets current regulations and does not harmthe environment in the event of accidental spillage.
Absolutely avoid the use of otherfluids which are incompatible withthe system components.

GENERAL
The car is equipped with a two-zone climate control system, controlled by an electronic control unit which makes it possible
to separately adjust the air temperature on
the driver’s side and on the passenger’s side.
To obtain optimum temperature control in
the two areas of the passenger compartment, the system has an outside sensor, apassenger compartment sensor and a twozone sun ray sensor.
On some versions, the system is integrated
with an incipient misting sensor installed behind the internal rearview mirror, which isable to “monitor” a predefined area of thewindscreen inner surface which can automatically act on the system to prevent or reduce misting, through a series of operations
such as: opening air recirculation, enabling
compressor, air flow to the windscreen, fan
speed sufficient for demisting; and, in caseof heavy misting, enabling the MAX-DEF
function.

For more detailed information on the system and how to make the best use of it,read the instructions given in the following
pages.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
The climate control compressor cannot work when
the outside temperature is lessthan 2°C. Therefore, it is recommended that the internal air recirculation function v is not used
when the outside temperature islow, as the windows could mist
over rapidly.

A0B0382m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 100

115

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

To ensure correct operation of the incipient misting
sensor, stickers (e.g. roadlicence holder) must not be appliedin the “control” area between thesensor and the windscreen. For thisvery reason, both the sensor andthe windscreen must always be
kept clean, to avoid accumulationof dirt or other substances.

WARNING The demisting procedure isenabled every time the ignition key is turned
to MAR, or pressing the AUTO button.
When this procedure is working it can beturned off pressing one of the following buttons: compressor, air recirculation, air distribution, air flow. This operation inhibits theincipient misting sensor signal until the AUTO
button is pressed again or the next time theignition key is turned to MAR.
On certain versions, the system is integrated by an anti-pollution sensor that is able
to switch on the inside air recirculation function automatically, to reduce the unpleasantsmell of polluted air when driving in urban
areas, queues, tunnels, and when the windscreen wash/wiper is operated (with thetypical smell of spirits).

Alfawiki.nl
116

WARNING The function of the anti-pollution sensor is subordinate to safety conditions; therefore disabling the climate control compressor or at an outside temperature
below 4°C, the sensor is disabled. In any
case, the sensor can be re-enabled pressing the recirculation button vuntil taking
it to the automatic mode.

The anti-pollution sensor
is placed in the air flow infront of the combined particle activated carbon filter and,
therefore, must be protectedagainst possible compressed air
jets produced by cleaning equipment. Moreover, the water collected from the windscreen wipers
should not come into contact withthe sensor: otherwise, the internal
air recirculation function could bedisabled for long periods.

The climate control system automaticallycontrols and adjusts the following parameters and functions:– temperature of the air admitted to thepassenger compartment (for the driver’s andpassenger’s side separately)– fan speed– air distribution– inside air recirculation on/off– climate control compressor on/off enable.

The settings of the following functions canbe modified manually:– fan speed– air distribution– inside air recirculation on/off– climate control compressor on/off enable– window defrosting/demisting.
The control of the functions that have notbeen modified manually will always be automatic and, in any case, the temperatureof the air flowing into the passenger compartment is controlled automatically depending on the temperatures set on the driver’s and passenger’s displays.

WARNING Manual selections prevailover automatic ones and remain in storage
until the user decides to resume automatic
control. The settings selected manually are
stored when the engine is switched off andresumed the next time the engine is started.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The air quality control is also entrusted
to a combined particle and activated carbon
filter.

Alfawiki.nl
117

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARCONTROLS (fig. 101)
1 - Inside temperature adjustment knob
(driver’s side)
2 - Inside temperature set display (driver’sside)
3 - Knob for adjusting the fan speed andswitching the system off

10 - Maximum defrosting/demisting
on/off button for windscreen and front side
windows, rearscreen heating and wing mirror coils (function MAX-DEF - -)11 - Button for aligning the temperature
set on the passenger’s side with that on thedriver’s side MONO

13 - Inside air temperature sensor
14 - Button for selecting the system automatic mode AUTO

4 - Fan speed set, air distribution and system off display (OFF)A0B0056m

5 - Inside temperature set display (passenger’s side)
6 - Inside temperature adjustment knob
(passenger’s side)
7 - Inside air recirculation on/off buttonv (manual/automatic)
8 - Air distribution selection button
9 - Rearscreen heating and wing mirror defrosting on/off button (Alfawiki.nl
118

12 - Climate control compressor on/off
enable button √fig. 101WARNING The knob rings are not provided with automatic stopper; therefore,
they are free to rotate in both directions once
they have reached the maximum or minimum values.
The system can be started in different
ways, but it is recommended that the required temperatures are set on thedisplays; then, press (14) AUTO button.
Thus, the system will start operating fully
automatic, to reach the set temperaturesin the shortest possible time and keep them.
During the fully automatic operation of thesystem, the set temperatures can however
be modified at any time: the system will automatically modify its own settings to adapt
itself to the new requirements.

WARNING The temperature difference
between the driver’s and the passenger’s
sides must not be greater than 7°C in order
to be accepted by the system.
The selections made by the system in automatic mode can be customized by manually acting on the following controls:– fan speed adjustment knob (3)– air distribution selection button (8)– inside air recirculation on/off button (7)v– climate control compressor on enablebutton (12) √.

With one or more functions switched on
manually, the temperature control for the air
admitted to the passenger compartment willin any case continue to be monitored automatically by the system (left led on button
14 AUTO on), except with the climate control compressor off.
In fact, in this condition, the temperatureof the air admitted into the passenger compartment cannot be lower than the outside
air temperature; this condition is indicatedby the turning off of the two leds on button (14) AUTO and flashing on the display(2) and/or (5) related with the temperature rate that cannot be obtained.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC
TWO-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL(fig. 101)

Manually selecting one or more of thesefunctions turns off the right led on the button (14) AUTO.

Alfawiki.nl
119

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

AIR TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT KNOBS (fig. 102)

A0B0063m

Turning the rings of knobs (1 or 6) clockwise or counterclockwise, respectively highers or lowers the temperature of the air required in the left zone (knob 1) or rightzone (knob 6) of the passenger compartment. The temperatures set are shown on
the displays (2) and (5) placed below therespective knobs.
Separate operation of the temperatures set
is restored automatically using knob (6) isactuated.
Turning the knob rings clockwise or counterclockwise, until they reach the extreme
selection positions HI or LO, will cause themaximum heating or cooling functions, respectively, to be switched on:

fig. 102

Alfawiki.nl
120

A0B0064m

It is switched on by setting a temperatureof more than 32.5°C on the display, andcan be switched on independently from thedriver’s or passenger’s side, or both of them;this setting brings the system to the “onezone” mode and is shown by both displays.
This functions can be switched on when
you wish to heat the passenger compartment as quickly as possible, by taking thegreatest advantage from the system potential.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

HI function(highest heating power - fig. 103)

The function uses the maximum temperature of the heating fluid, whereas air distribution to feet and 5th fan speed.
With the function switched on, however,
all the manual settings can be made.
fig. 103

To switch the function off, you only needto turn the ring of a knob (1) or (6) of thetemperature set to a value lower than
32.5°C; the opposite display will show
32.5°C.

By pressing button (14) AUTO, the display indicates a temperature of 32.5°C andfalls within an operating condition with automatic temperature control.

Alfawiki.nl
121

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

LO function(highest cooling power - fig. 104)

A0B0065m

It is switched on by setting a temperature
lower than 16.5°C on the display; this setting is shown by both displays.
This function can be switched on when you
wish to cool the passenger compartment as
quickly as possible, by taking the greatest
advantage from the system potential.
The function cuts off air heating, switches
on both internal air recirculation (to prevent
hot air from entering the compartment) andthe climate control compressor, brings air
distribution to E and 5th fan speed.
With the function switched on, however,
all the manual settings can be made.
To switch the function off, you only needto turn the ring of a knob (1) or (6) of thetemperature set to a value greater than
16.5°C; the opposite display will show
16.5°C.

fig. 104

By pressing button (14) AUTO the display
indicates a temperature of 16.5°C and falls
within an operating condition with automatic
temperature control.

Alfawiki.nl
122

A0B0066m

By pressing button (11) MONO the passenger’s side temperature automaticallyaligns with that on the driver’s side and,
therefore, the same temperature can be set
for both areas by simply turning the ring ofknob (1), on driver’s side.
This function is provided to facilitate temperature adjustment inside the entire passenger compartment when only the driveris on board.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MONO BUTTONFOR ALIGNMENT OF
THE TEMPERATURES SET(fig. 105)

Separate operation of set temperatures is
automatically restored when the passenger
operates the ring of knob (6) or by pressing button (11) MONO.

fig. 105

Alfawiki.nl
123

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENTKNOB (fig. 106-107)

A0B0067m

Turning the ring of knob (3), clockwise
or counterclockwise will cause the fan speed- and, therefore, the amount of air flowing
into the passenger compartment - to increase or decrease, respectively; the 16
speeds that can be selected are displayed
by a bar (every 3 clicks), up to a maximumof 6 illuminated bars:– max. fan speed = all bars lit;
– min. fan speed = one bar lit.
The fan can be cut off (all bars off) only
if the climate control compressor has beenswitched off by pressing button (12) √.
To resume automatic fan speed control after a manual setting has been made, press
button (14) AUTO. By fully turning the ringof knob (3) counterclockwise, the system
will be turned off, with the following situation: display (2) OFF; display (5) OFF; central display (4) OFF and left-hand led available on internal air recirculation button (7)v ON and both led on AUTO button
switch OFF.

fig. 106WARNING By pressing the internal air
recirculation button (7) v, it is possible
to let external fresh air into the passenger
compartment.

Alfawiki.nl
124

A0B0068m

WARNING After exiting the condition

OFF, the internal air recirculation v is re-

sumed to the condition preceding the switching off.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

To turn the system on again, you only needto turn the ring of knob (3) clockwise, orpress any button, except the internal air recirculation button (7) and rear window
heater button (9); this operation resumes
all the operating conditions previously stored
in the memory.

fig. 107

Alfawiki.nl
125

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

AIR DISTRIBUTION SELECTION
BUTTON (fig. 108)
By pressing button MODE (8) repeatedly, you can manually choose one of thefive possible modes for air distribution:
E

Flow of air to the dashboard centre
and side outlets and rear outlets.

E Splitting of the air flow between the
Z vents to the lower part of the passenger compartment (warmest air)and the dashboard centre and side
outlets and the rear outlet (coolestair). This air flow distribution is particularly useful in spring and autumn,
when the sun is shining.
Z Air flow towards the front and rear
lower part of the passenger compartment. Due to the natural tendency ofheat to spread upwards, this type of
distribution allows heating of the passenger compartment in the shortest
time, also giving a prompt feeling ofwarmth to the coldest parts of the
body.

126

A0B0069m

fig. 108
Q Splitting of the air flow between the
Z windscreen and side window defrosting/demisting vents and the lower
part of the passenger compartment.
This type of air distribution allows satisfactory heating of the passenger
compartment while preventing possible mistingof the windows.
Alfawiki.nl

Q Air flow to the windscreen and front
side window vents to demist or defrost them.
To resume automatic air distribution control after a manual selection, press button(14) AUTO.

A0B0070m√

Pressing button (12) √ enables the turning on of the climate control compressor.
This condition is shown by the lighting up of
the led placed on the button itself.
When the climate control compressor isturned off, the leds on buttons (14) AUTO
and (12) √ go off; automatic inside air recirculation control is also excluded (both leds
off on button 7 v) which always stays
off to prevent window misting; in any case,the automatic operation of inside air recirculation can be resumed (though it is notrecommended) by pressing button 7 v.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CLIMATE CONTROLCOMPRESSOR ON/OFF
ENABLE BUTTON(fig. 109)

fig. 109

Alfawiki.nl
127

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

When the climate control compressor is off,
it is not possible to admit air to the passenger compartment with a temperature below the outside temperature; in this case,the value flashes on the display concerning
the temperature that cannot be reachedand the left led on button (14 AUTO fig. 110) goes off.

A0B0071m

The switching off of the climate control
compressor remains in storage even whenthe engine has been stopped. To resume automatic control for switching on the climate
control compressor, press button (12) √again, the button led will turn on, or press
button (14) AUTO; in which case, the othermanual settings set will be cancelled.

WARNING
Operation of the climate
control compressor is necessary for cooling and dehumidifying the air; it is advisable to keep
this function always on, to prevent
window misting problems.

fig. 110

Alfawiki.nl
128

A0B0072m

Inside air recirculation is controlled according to three operating logics:– automatic control, indicated by the turning on of the right led on the button;– forced switching on (inside air recirculation always on), indicated by the turning
on of the left led on the button (and by theright led going off at the same time);– forced switching off (inside air recirculation always off, with air inlet from the outside), indicated by the turning off of bothleds.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INSIDE AIR RECIRCULATION
ON/OFF BUTTON v(fig. 111)

These operating conditions are obtainedby pressing in sequence the inside air recirculation button (7) v.
When inside air recirculation is controlled
automatically by the system, the right led
on the air recirculation button (7) v
stays on all the time and the left led shows
the air recirculation condition:
ON = air recirculation operating;fig. 111
If inside air recirculation has been switchedon or off manually, the led on button (14)
AUTO turns off.

OFF = air recirculation off.

In automatic operation, inside air recirculation is switched on automatically when theanti-pollution sensor detects the presence ofpolluted air, for instance in cities, queues,
tunnels, and when the windscreen
wash/wiper is operated (with the characteristic smell of spirit).

Alfawiki.nl
129

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
With the outside temperature below 2°C the climate control compressor is unable
to work. It is therefore inadvisable
to use the inside air recirculation
function v with low outside temperature as windows may mist
over quickly.

WARNING
The inside air recirculation
function makes it possible
to reach the required “heating” or“cooling” conditions faster. It is
however inadvisable to use it on
rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of
the windows misting inside, especially if the climate control system
is off.

WARNING
It is advisable to turn on theinside air recirculation system in queues or tunnels to avoid
admitting polluted air from outside.
The prolonged use of this function
should however be avoided, especially with several persons onboard, to avoid the possibility of thewindows misting inside.

Alfawiki.nl
130

WARNING
In certain weather conditions (e.g. outside temperature around 0°C) and with automatic air recirculation control on,
mist may form on the windows. In
this case press the inside air recirculation button (7) v, toswitch off recirculation (leds on
button off) and if necessary increase the flow of air to the windscreen.

A0B0073m

When button (14) AUTO is pressed, thesystem automatically regulates the amountand distribution of the air admitted into thepassenger compartment, clearing all the previous manual settings.
This condition is indicated by the lightingof both button leds.
When the right led, on button (14) AUTO,
is OFF, it indicates that one or several manual operations have been carried out and,
therefore, that automatic control is not complete (except for temperature control, whichis always automatic) indicated by the left
led on.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

BUTTON AUTO AUTOMATIC
OPERATION (fig. 112)

fig. 112

Alfawiki.nl

131

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARQUICK FRONT WINDOWDEMISTING/DEFROSTING
BUTTON (MAX-DEF function)(fig. 113)

A0B0074m-

Pressing button (10) - the climate control automatically activates timed operationof all the functions needed to quicken
demisting/defrosting of the windscreen andfront side windows, i.e.:– it turns on the climate control compressor;– switches off inside air recirculation, if on(both leds off);– sets the maximum air temperature (HI)on both displays (2) and (5);– operates the fan at a predefined speed;– directs the flow of air towards the windscreen and front side window vents;– turns on rearscreen heating and, if present, the wing mirror coils.

fig. 113
When the maximum demisting/defrosting function is on, the led on button (10)-, the led on the rearscreen heating button (9) ( and the led on button (12)√ come on; at the same time the leds on
button (7) v go out.

Alfawiki.nl

132

WARNING If the engine is not warm
enough, the function will not engage thepredefined fan speed immediately, to limit
the flow to the passenger compartment of
air that is not warm enough to demist thewindows.

A0B0075m

Pressing one of the following buttons:(10) -, (7) v, (11) MONO, (14)
AUTO or (12) √ the system switches off
the maximum demisting/defrosting function, resuming the system operating conditions prior to turning it on, in addition toactivating the last function required, if any.
WING MIRROR AND
REARSCREEN DEFROSTING/
DEMISTING BUTTON(fig. 114)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

When the maximum demisting/defrosting function is on, the only manual operations possible are manual adjustment of the
fan and switching rearscreen heating off.

(

Pressing button (9) ( , turns on demisting/defrosting of the rearscreen and, if present, the wing mirror coils.
The activation of this function is shownby the turning on of the led on the button.
This function is timed and switches off automatically after 20 minutes, or pressing the
button again; the function is also switched
off when the engine is stopped and will not
be switched on again the next time the engine is started.

fig. 114WARNING Rear heated window manual on/off control prevails over automatic
activation decided by the climate control system control unit.

Alfawiki.nl

133

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARThis function is timed and switches off automatically after 20 minutes, or pressing the
button again; the function is also switched
off when the engine is stopped and will not
be switched on again the next time the engine is started.
WARNING The system turns onrearscreen heating automatically if the temperature is below 3°C.
WARNING Do not apply stickers on theinside of the rearscreen over the heating filaments to avoid damage that might cause
it to stop working properly.
WARNING When reconnecting the negative battery cable after having disconnected
it, wait for 2 minutes before turning the key
to enable the climate control system to reset actuator strokes properly.

POLLEN FILTER
This filter has the specific capability of combining the mechanical filtering of the air with
an electrostatic effect so that the outside air
admitted to the passenger compartment ispurified and free from particles such as dust,
pollen, etc.
In addition to the above, it also effectively
reduces the concentration of pollutants.
The filtering action takes place under all
air inlet conditions and it is clearly most effective with the windows shut.
Have the conditions of the filter checked by
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services at least oncea year, preferably on the onset of summer.

Alfawiki.nl

134

If the vehicle is used mainly in polluted
or dusty areas it should be checked and if
necessary replaced, at shorter intervals.

Failure to replace the filter may considerably reduce the effectiveness ofthe climate control system up to
blocking the air flow from the outlets and vents.

(JTD engines) (for versions/markets where applicable)

The car is equipped with an additional
heater (not programmable) which supports
the engine during cold or winter weather
to quickly reach a comfortable temperatureinside the passenger compartment.

CONTROLSHAZARD WARNING LIGHTS(fig. 116)TAILGATE OPENING (fig. 115)

They are switched on by pressing button(A), regardless of the position of the ignition key.

To open the boot pull the lever (A) at theside of the driver’s seat.

When the hazard warning lights are
switched on, the switch itself begins to flash
together with the direction indicator warning lights and the emergency indicator on
the instrument panel. This functions isswitched off by pressing the button again.

The heater operates with the engine running when the outside temperature is below
20°C and the engine has not yet reachednormal operating temperature.
WARNING
Do not operate the boot release lever with the car on
the move.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ADDITIONAL HEATERWARNINGUse of the hazard warning
lights is ruled by the Highway Code of the country in which
the car is used. Observe regulations.

A0B0042m

A0B0036m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 115

fig. 116

135

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARFRONT FOGLIGHTS (fig. 117)
(where required)
These come on when button (A) ispressed and when the external lights are already on.
The warning light 5 will light up on the
instrument panel.
By turning the ignition key to STOP, thefog lights are turned off automatically anddo not come on the next time the engine
is started without pressing button (A).
Press the button (A) again to switch thefront foglights off.
WARNING The front foglights should be
used in compliance with the local traffic
laws.

REAR FOG GUARDS (fig. 117)
These are turned on, with the dipped beam
headlamps or fog lights on, by pressing button (B).
At the same time, warning light 4 on the
instrument cluster lights up.
By turning the ignition key to STOP, thefog guards are automatically turned off andthey do not come on the next time the engine is started unless button (B) is pressed.

DASHBOARD LIGHTING
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 118)
When the outside lights are on, the dashboard lighting is adjusted by pressing button(A).
Each press of the button (A) cyclically selects one of the three lighting levels provided: low-medium-high.

Press button (B) to turn them off.
WARNING Always use the rear fog
guards in accordance with local regulations
in force.

A0B0740m

A0B0326m

Alfawiki.nl

136 fig. 117

fig. 118

This is an automatic safety switch which is
triggered in the event of crash to interrupt
the flow of fuel.
The intervention of the inertial switch is indicated by a message + symbol on the Infocenter display (see “Infocenter Display”
in this chapter) and by the door unlocking.

Inspect the care carefully to make sure that
there are no fuel leaks, for instance in theengine compartment, under the vehicle ornear the tank area.
If no leaks are found and the vehicle canbe restarted again, press button (A) to activate the fuel supply system.

OPENING THE FUEL FLAP
(fig. 120)
The fuel flap is released from inside the car
raising the front part of the lever (A).

After a collision, remember to turn the ignition key to STOP so as not to run the battery down.

WARNING
If a smell of fuel is noted
following an accident, or
the fuel system is leaking, to avoid
the risk of fire do not reset theswitch.

A0B0574m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF
SWITCH (fig. 119)

A0B0044m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 119

fig. 120

137

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARHEADLIGHT CORRECTOR(fig. 121)

position 2: 5 people on-board, luggage
compartment full (50 kg approximately);If the car is fitted with xenon headlights,
beam aiming is electronic and therefore control (A) on the mask near the steering column is not present.

position 3: Driver and 300 kg in luggage
compartment.

The headlights should be aimed correctly
depending on the vehicle load.
The control (A) on the plate at the side of
the steering column can be moved to four
positions corresponding to the vehicle loads
given below:
position 0: 1 or 2 people occupying front
seats, full fuel tank, on-board equipment present;

HAND BRAKE (fig. 122)
The hand brake lever is located between
the two front seats.
To operate the brake when the vehicle is“stationary”, pull the lever (A) upwards until the required braking action is obtained.
When the ignition key is in the MARposition, the x warning light will come on on
the instrument panel.

WARNING
Check the positioning of
the headlight beams every
time you change the load to be carried.

position 1: 5 people on-board;

A0B0240m

A0B0288m

Alfawiki.nl

138 fig. 121

fig. 122WARNING The handbrake lever (A) is
fitted with a safety device which prevents
the brake from being released when, if thelever is pulled, button (B) is pressed. Therefore, to release the brake, in addition topressing button (B), it is also necessary topull lever (A) further upwards to release thesafety device, then lower the lever completely

To release the hand brake:– slightly lift the lever (A) and press therelease button (B);GEARSHIFT LEVER (fig. 123)
Depending on the versions the car is fittedwith a five or six speed mechanical gearbox(see “Technical specifications” chapter).
The position of the individual gears isshown by the pictogram on the gearshift
lever knob.
When changing gear, always fully depress
the clutch pedal. Before engaging reversegear (R) wait for the car to be stationary.

– holding the button down lower the lever.
The x warning light on the instrument
panel will go out.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
The wheels should belocked after a few clicks ofthe hand brake. If this does not occur, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services to have the hand brakeadjusted.

To prevent the car from moving accidentally, keep the brake pedal pressed whenengaging the handbrake.

A0B0290m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 123139

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

For 2.5 V6 24V versions and Diesel versions, to engage reverse gear (R), it is necessary to wait for the car to be stationary,then raise the ring under the grip (with thefingers of the same hand holding the lever).
After engaging reverse gear, release thering. It is not necessary to raise the ring on
the lever when shifting from reverse to another gear.

WARNING Reverse gear can only be engaged with the vehicle completely stopped.
With the engine running, before engaging
reverse gear it is necessary to wait for atleast 3 seconds with the clutch pedal fullypressed, to avoid grating and the possibility of damaging the gears.

WARNINGTo change gear smoothly,
the clutch pedal must be
fully depressed. Therefore, there
should be no hindrances under thepedal unit. Make sure that any
mats are well laid and do not interfere with the pedals.

Alfawiki.nl

140

Do not drive with yourhand resting on thegearshift lever, since theapplied pressure, though slight,
may, with the passing of time,
damage parts inside the gear.

(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)

The 2.0 JTS engine can be supplied witha mechanical gearbox with electronic control, called “Selespeed”.
The Selespeed considerably simplifies theuse of the car, it reduces driving fatigue intown or when frequent gearshifting is necessary, but at the same time it assures brilliant performance.

WARNING To be able to use the Selespeed correctly, this chapter should be readin full to understand the correct, permissible
operations to be carried out right from thestart.
This device comprises a conventional mechanical gearbox to which an electronically-operated electro-hydraulic device has been
added which automatically controls the
clutch and gear engagement.
The clutch pedal has been eliminated andthe vehicle moves off using only the accelerator pedal.

Gearshifting takes place through a floating
control lever (A-fig. 124) with only one
stable central position. Using this lever it ispossible to request increase/decrease of theratio of the gear engaged and/or engagement of reverse gear (R) or neutral (N).
There are also two levers on the steering
wheel spokes (fig. 125) through which,
only with the car on the move (with speed
above 0.5 km/h), it is possible to shift gearup or down.

A0B0271m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SELESPEED GEARBOX

A0B0270m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 124

fig. 125

141

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The gearbox can work in two operating
modes:– the first is semiautomatic(then called
MANUAL), in which the driver directly requests gearshifting through the lever on thecentre console or pressing the buttons at thesteering wheel;– the second is automatic, called CITY
(mode selectable with the specific button
B-fig. 124, the CITY sign appears on thedisplay fig. 126 fitted on rev-counter), in
which the system decides directly when to
shift gear.

With the gearbox in the CITY mode it isstill possible to carry out manual gearshifting, both using the gear lever and the steering wheel controls. The gearbox remains in
the CITY mode.
The gear engaged (fig. 126) is always
signalled on the display regardless of the selected mode.
N = neutral;
1 = first gear;
2 = second gear;
3 = third gear;
4 = fourth gear;
5 = fifth gear;
R = reverse.

A0B0384m

Alfawiki.nl

142

fig. 126

Failures of Selespeed gearbox are signalled
to the driver through a warning light (B-fig.
126) accompanied by an acoustic signal.

WARNING Opening the driver’s door,
the Selespeed starts the hydraulic part ofthe system to prepare it for the engine to be
started. This function (noted by the turningof the electric pump) is deactivated after 10
openings/closings of the door that are notfollowed by actual system activation using
the ignition key.
Turning the ignition key to MAR, all thesegments of the display (A-fig. 126), thegearbox failure warning light (B-fig. 126)
and the word CITYlight up. After about one
second, the display indicates the gear engaged (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, R); from this moment, the Selespeed system accepts
gearshift commands.

OPERATION WITH THE
ENGINE OFF

To request gearshifting, in addition to keeping the brake pedal pressed it is necessary to:

WARNING Before operating the gearshift control lever, always check the gear engaged on the display (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, R).

– to increase gear (+) (fig. 127) push
the lever “forwards” (if the car is in first gear
this shifts to second, if it is in second gear
it goes to third and so on up to fifth). If thesystem is in neutral (N) or reverse (R) the
forward movement on the lever causes engagement of first gear (1).

When the engine is off and the vehicle isstationary, it is possible to engage all thegears.
With the vehicle stationary and with thebrake pedal pressed, requests to shift gear
are accepted only if they are carried out
through the control lever on the central console.

– to shift down (–) (fig. 127) push thelever backwards (if the car is in fifth gear
it moves to fourth, if fourth gear is engaged
it shifts to third and so on down to first).

WARNING If after 10 seconds the display segment do not display the gear engaged or the failure warning light stays on,turn the ignition key to STOP and wait forthe display to go off, then repeat the system activation procedure. If the fault persists, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARSYSTEM ACTIVATION

A0B0272m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 127

143

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

To put the gearbox in neutral (N), starting from the condition with the vehicle stationary and the brake pedal pressed, it isnecessary to move the gearshift control leverto the right (fig. 128).

From any gear (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) andwith the vehicle practically at a standstill,
it is possible to request engagement of reverse gear, pushing the lever to the right andthen backwards (fig. 129). If the vehicle is on the move, the request is not accepted; wait for the car to stop and thenrequest reverse gear engagement again

WARNING If wanting to leave the carparked on a sloping road with a gear engaged to keep it braked, it is necessary tocheck that the Infocenter display shows the
new gear engaged and then wait for 1 to
2 seconds before releasing the brake pedal
to allow complete clutch engagement.

A0B0273m

A0B0274m

Alfawiki.nl

144 fig. 128

WARNING Once a gear has been shifted
it is necessary to release the gearshift control lever immediately after making the request. A prolonged action (over 10 seconds)
causes automatic shifting to CITY; previous
conditions are restored when releasing thelever.

fig. 129

The engine can be started with the gear
engaged or in neutral (N), provided that thebrake pedal is pressed down.
WARNING Keep the brake pedal
pressed during the starting operation. As thebrake pedal stiffens if it is pressed repeatedly with the engine off, in this situation, toallow the engine to be started, it is necessary to increase the pressure exerted on thepedal itself.
After starting, the gearbox automaticallysets to neutral, the display shows the letter (N) and the system selects the operating mode stored before switching off.

WARNING
If the engine fails to startwith the gear engaged, thedriver is alerted of the potentially
dangerous situation due to the factthat the gearbox has automatically
set to neutral by the buzzer andthe display on the rev counter.

TURNING THE ENGINE OFF
AND SYSTEM DEACTIVATION
Turning the ignition key to STOP the engine switches off but the Selespeed systemstill remains active, waiting for the vehicle
to stop completely. After about 2 - 4 seconds
from when the key has been turned to the
STOP position, the hydraulic part is deactivated and immediately afterwards the display on the rev counteralso goes out ; theSelespeed system is only deactivated at thispoint.
The gear selected before turning the engine off remains engaged.
If the engine stops with the gearbox inneutral (N), the buzzer draws the attentionof the driver so that the vehicle can be put
in safety conditions engaging the first gear(1) or reverse (R). In this case, it is necessary to turn the ignition key to MAR andwith the brake pedal pressed, engage firstgear (1) or reverse (R).

WARNING
NEVER leave the car withthe gearbox in neutral (N).

WARNING
Never remove the key
when the car is on themove, because in addition to thefact that the Selespeed system
would not work properly until
stopping the car, the steering
wheel would automatically lock at
the first turn.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

STARTING THE ENGINEWARNING
It is absolutely necessary
to turn off the engine consequently deactivating the Selespeed system keeping the brake
pedal pressed: release the pedal
ONLY when the display on the rev
counter goes off.

Alfawiki.nl

145

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MOVING OFF
With the engine running and the vehicle
stationary, the gears that can be engaged
for moving off are only first (1), second (2)or reverse (R).
To engage them it is possible to use thecontrol lever on the centre console, with thebrake pedal pressed, as the levers on thesteering wheel allow gear engagement only
over 0.5 km/h.
WARNING Reverse gear (R) can be engaged from each of the following other ratios: neutral (N), first gear (1) or second
gear (2). If the car is on the move, the request is not accepted; it is necessary to wait
for the car to be completely stopped andthen request reverse (R) again.
The driver is informed of the reverse gear
engaged condition by the intermittent soundof the buzzer as well as by the display on
the rev counter.
WARNING If while shifting from reverse(R)/first gear (1) to neutral (N)/first gear(1) sticking occurs on the first gear, the system automatically engages second gear
(2).

This should not be considered as a fault as
it is part of the operating logic. For the same
reason, in the event of sticking on reverse,
the system commands partial clutch closing
to allow engagement of the gear; in thiscase engagement of reverse gear (R) willbe less comfortable.
Moving off of the vehicle is obtained:
1) releasing the brake pedal;
2) gradually operating the accelerator
pedal.
The vehicle pick-up torque is higher the
more the accelerator pedal is pressed.

WARNING
After a request to shift
gear with the vehicle stationary, before pressing the accelerator pedal to make the car start,
the driver must always check thatthe gear engaged shown on thedisplay is the one required.

Alfawiki.nl

146

WARNINGS– With the vehicle stationary and a gear
engaged, always keep the brake pedal
pressed until you decide to move off;
– in prolonged stops with the engine running it is advisable to keep the gearbox isneutral;– when the car is parked on a slope, do
not use the pick-up manoeuvre to keep thevehicle stopped; use the brake pedal andwork on the accelerator pedal only when
you decide to move off;
– use second gear only when necessary
to obtain better control of pick-up in low
speed manoeuvres;– if, with reverse gear engaged, you needto engage first gear or vice versa, shift gear
only when the car is completely stationary
and with the brake pedal pressed.

Downhill with the gear engaged and theaccelerator released (if the vehicle is travelling), if a certain pre-established speed isexceeded, the system automatically engages the clutch to provide adequate engine
braking.

Still for safety reasons, when the vehicle
is stationary, with the engine started andgear (1), (2) or (R) engaged, the system
activates the buzzer and shifts to neutral(N) automatically when:– there is no action on the accelerator
and/or brake pedal for at least 3 minutes;– the brake pedal is pressed for over 10
minutes;– the driver’s door is opened and the accelerator and brake pedal are not pressed
for at least 1 second.

STOPPING THE CAR
To stop the vehicle, simply release the accelerator pedal and, if necessary, operate
the brake pedal.
Regardless of the gear engaged and of theoperating mode activated (MANUAL or
CITY), the system automatically disengages the clutch and downshifts gear.
If you intend to move off again without
having completely stopped the car, this way
the most suitable gear ratio for re-accelerating will be available.
Stopping the vehicle, the system automatically engages first gear (1).

Due to safety reasons, the Selespeed system activates the buzzer when:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Though strongly inadvisable, if due to unforeseen circumstances when driving downhill the car is allowed to travel with the gearbox in neutral (N), when the engagementof a gear is requested, the system automatically engages the best gear to allow
transmission of the torque to the wheels in
relation to the speed of the car.

– clutch overheating occurs during vehicle
starting; in this case, it is necessary to“force” moving off avoiding hesitations or
to release the accelerator and use the brake
pedal to park the vehicle if the car is on aslope;– the car moves in the opposite direction
to the gear engaged, (e.g.: vehicle moving
forward with reverse engaged); in this situation it is necessary to stop the vehicle andkeeping the brake pedal pressed, engage
the gear correctly.

Alfawiki.nl

147

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

OPERATION
The gearbox can work in two operating
modes:– the first is semiautomatic (MANUAL),
in which the driver directly decides when to
shift gear;– the second is completely automatic(CITY), in which the system decides directly when to shift gear according to thetype of driving.
The CITY mode can be selected by pressing the specific button CITY on the gearbox
lever knob; when this mode is selected, the
CITY sign appears on the display fitted on
rev counter.

SEMIAUTOMATIC OPERATION(MANUAL)
In the MANUAL operating mode the display on the rev counter shows the gear engaged.

The MANUAL operating mode is set
when, with the CITY mode selected, the
CITY button (B-fig. 130) is pressedagain, excluding the previously selectedmode.

In this operating mode, the decision tochange gear is left to the driver who decides
the most appropriate moment.
The requests to change gear can take placethrough:– the control lever on the centre console(A-fig. 130);– the levers on the steering wheel(fig. 131), which can be used only whenthe vehicle speed exceeds 0.5 km/h.

A0B0271m

A0B0270m

Alfawiki.nl

148

fig. 130

fig. 131

With the accelerator pedal pressed by over
60% of its stroke and with an engine speedof over 5,000 rpm, gearshifting becomesquicker.

– reduce and then increase the engine
torque;In the MANUAL mode there are some
automatic/safety devices which make driving easier:– adapt the engine speed to the new gear
ratio engaged.
When downshifting, double de-clutching(acceleration of the engine to bring it to the
speed necessary with the new gear ratio) is
carried out automatically.
The move to neutral (N) command is accepted when the car speed exceeds 20 km/h.
The command to engage reverse gear (R)is accepted only if the car is stationary.

– when slowing down, the clutch is
opened and the gear ratio is reduced automatically to be ready for possibly picking up
speed again; if not, stopping the vehicle,
first gear (1) will be engaged automatically;– request to change gear that could takethe engine above the maximum rpm or below the minimum permissible rpm are notaccepted;– if the engine reaches the maximum permissible rpm and accelerating continues(without coming into operation of the VDC
system), the system automatically engages
a higher gear; with the activation of the VDC
system, with the maximum engine rpm,
gear shifting is excluded;– if sticking occurs during the engagementof a gear, the system firstly tries to engage
the required gear again and, if it is still notpossible, it automatically engages the immediately higher one to avoid leaving thevehicle in neutral speed.
WARNING It is advisable to wait for agearshift to end before requesting anotherone, this will avoid multiple requests in quick
succession.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

When shifting gear, releasing the accelerator pedal is not necessary because the Selespeed system directly controls the engine
so as to:

Alfawiki.nl

149

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

AUTOMATIC OPERATION (CITY)FAILURE SIGNALLINGThe CITY automatic operating mode is selected pressing the button (A-fig. 132),
at the base of the gearshift lever.

Failures to the Selespeed gearbox are indicated by the t (A-fig. 133) warning light on the instrument cluster.

In addition to the gear, the display on therev counter will show the word CITY.

When the system is turned on (turning theignition key to MAR), the warning lightshould turn on glowing steadily for about
4 seconds and then turn off.

The system decides directly when gearshifting according to the engine running speed
and the driving style.
Quickly releasing the accelerator pedal, thesystem does not engage a higher gear in order to maintain an adequate level of engine
brake.

If the warning light stays on it means thata fault to the gearbox has been detected; atthe same time a buzzer sounds intermittently for 4 seconds to attract the driver's
attention.

If the warning light t
comes on, contact the Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services
as soon as possible to remove thefault.

In the case of a fault to the gearshift lever,the system automatically activates the automatic CITY mode to allow the car toreach the nearest Authorized Alfa Romeo
Services to have the fault detected eliminated.
In the event of faults to other componentsof the gearbox, the system only allows theengagement of certain ratios: first gear (1),second (2) and reverse (R).

A0B0269m

A0B0383m

Alfawiki.nl

150 fig. 132

fig. 133WARNING
In case of transmission
fault, contact the Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services assoon as possible to check the system.

PARKING THE VEHICLE

TOWING THE VEHICLE

The buzzer is activated when:

To park the car safely it is absolutely
necessary to engage first gear (1) or reverse (R) and, when on a sloping road, also
engage the hand-brake.

WARNING For towing the vehicle, adhere to local regulations. Make sure that the
gearbox is in neutral (N) (checking that the
car moves when pushed) and proceed as for
towing a normal car with mechanical gearbox following the instructions given in thechapter “In an emergency”.

– reverse gear (R) is engaged;– the vehicle is parked with the gearbox
at neutral (N); this can be seen turning theignition key to STOP;– clutch overheating takes place during
pick-up;– the car moves in the opposite direction
to the gear engaged (e.g.: the car tends to
do downhill with reverse gear engaged);– in the event of gearbox failure;– the system has automatically engaged
neutral (N) after:

Turning the engine off with the car facing
uphill and a gear engaged, it is absolutely
necessary to wait for the display on therev counter to go off before releasing thebrake pedal, so that the clutch has innested
completely.

Should it be impossible to set to neutral,
do not tow the vehicle; contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.

If the gearbox is in neutral (N) and you
want to engage a parking gear, it is necessary to activate the system and engage thegear (1) or reverse (R) with your foot on
the brake pedal.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SIGNALLING WITH THE BUZZERWARNING
Do not start the engine
when towing the vehicle.

• there is no action on the accelerator
and/or brake pedal for at least 3 minutes;• the brake pedal is pressed for over 10
minutes;• the driver’s door is opened and the accelerator and brake pedal are notpressed for at least 1 second;• detection of a gearbox fault.

Alfawiki.nl

151

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Q-SYSTEM
AUTOMATIC GEARBOX(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)

The 2.5 V6 24V engine can be suppliedwith an automatic gearbox which in addition to the normal functions, makes it possible to shift gear by hand moving the selector lever to the special sector, Q-System
device.
WARNING To be able to use the automatic gearbox correctly, the description givenin this chapter should be read thoroughly
in order to learn the correct, allowed operations also in concerning the Shift-lock andKey-lock safety devices with which the gearbox is fitted right from the start.

STARTING THE ENGINE

MOVING OFF

The engine can only be started with thegearshift lever (fig. 134) in position P
or N.

After starting, with the engine idling andkeeping the brake pedal pressed (Shift-locksafety device), move the gearshift lever(fig. 134) to position D, or to the manual position. Release the brake pedal andgradually press the accelerator pedal.

For safety reasons, you are advised to start
the engine with the brake pedal pressed.
WARNING When moving off, after having started the engine, do not press the accelerator pedal before and while moving thegearshift lever. This is particularly importantwhen the engine is cold.

To move the lever, raise the ring (Afig. 134) under the gearshift lever knob.

A0B0268m

Alfawiki.nl

152

WARNING Moving the lever from position P, with the ignition key at MAR, isonly allowed with the brake pedal pressed(Shift-lock safety device).

fig. 134

WARNING The ignition key in the
STOP position can only be removed fromthe ignition switch provided that thegearshift lever is at P (Key-lock).

In an emergency (failures, flat battery,etc.), it is possible to remove the ignition
key also with the selector lever not positioned at P.

SELECTING AUTOMATIC/MANUAL GEARSHIFTING

Press the release device (A-fig. 136),
next to the ignition switch inside the trim,
with your finger removing the key at thesame time.

The main feature of this gearbox is the possibility of using it either automatically or
manually. The choice of the operating modeis carried out positioning the gearshift leverin the right sector (automatic gearshifting)or in the left sector (manual gearshifting).

Do not take the car to peak performance
until the engine has reached normal operating temperature.

The gearbox operating mode and the gear
engaged are shown on the display inside therev counter (A-fig. 137).

A0B0267m

A0B0266m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

In an emergency (failures, flat battery,etc.), it is possible to move the lever fromposition P, pressing the special mechanicalbutton under the gearshift lever cover, in thearea (A-fig. 135); at the same time
move the lever from position P to the required position. If the engine is being
started, move the lever to position N, whichis the only one that allows this operationin this case.

A0B0385m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 135

fig. 136

fig. 137

153

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Selector lever
For automatic gearshifting, move thegearshift lever to the right sector(fig. 138) in one of the following positions:P - park (the engine can be started)

P - Park

R - Reverse

To prevent accidental engagements, moving the lever to position P is only allowedraising the ring (A-fig. 138) placed under the gearshift lever knob.

Move the gearshift lever to R with the car
stationary, the engine idling and the brake
pedal pressed.

When the car is being parked, move thelever to this position. A device in the gearbox will lock the driving wheels.

With the lever in position R the reversing
lights turn on and a beep is sounded forsafety reasons to indicate that reverse gearhas been engaged.

R - reverse
N - neutral (the engine can be started)D - automatic forward gear.
Raise the ring (A-fig. 138) placed under the gearshift lever knob for shifting:– from P to R and vice versa– from N to R.

WARNING
Always pull the handbrake completely before
leaving the car.
Move the gearshift lever to position P when getting out of the carleaving the engine running.

A0B0265m

Alfawiki.nl

154 fig. 138

To prevent accidental engagements, moving the lever to this position is only allowedraising the ring (A-fig. 138) placed under the gearshift lever knob.

Before moving the lever, press the brake
pedal: the car must be stationary.
WARNING With the lever in position R,
reverse gear is not engaged if the vehicle
speed is above the established level. Whenthe car speed falls below this level, reversegear is engaged and remains engaged even
if the speed returns above the limit.

D - Automatic forward gear

This is the neutral position to be used when
the car has to be pushed or towed.

This is the position to be used always under “normal” driving conditions, for example on the motorway and urban roads andwhen wanting to minimise fuel consumption(combined with the CITY driving mode).

WARNING
With the engine idling,when moving the lever toposition N the car tends to moveeven if it is on level ground: keep
the brake pedal pressed when thelever is in position N.

When the lever is in this position, the gearbox automatically selects the four available
speeds. It is also the position to be used
for the ICE driving mode.

Shifting to lower gear
(Kick down)
In the event of the need to accelerateheavily (e.g. for overtaking) pressing theaccelerator fully home beyond the stiff point
will cause automatic kick down to a shorter
ratio, engine speed conditions permitting.
Releasing the accelerator pedal as soon as
the stiff point has been passed, the gearbox
shifts to the optimum ratio in relation to thedriving mode, throttle opening position andselector lever position.
The Kick-down function is advised only forovertaking or fast accelerating to avoid increasing fuel consumption.

WARNING
With the engine idling andthe lever in position D thevehicle tends to move: always
keep the brake pedal pressed until moving off.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

N - Neutral

Kick-down is cut off automatically in the
ICE driving mode.

Alfawiki.nl

155

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SELECTING THE DRIVINGMODES

SPORT (buttonpressed):The automatic gearbox for this car is controlled electronically and includes the selection of three different driving modes, thereby
giving the best response in terms of driving
comfort, consumption levels, sporty performance and travelling safety.

This is selected when wanting to avail ofthe vehicle’s peak performance for sporty
driving or on demanding routes.

The three driving modes CITY, SPORT
and ICE are selected by 2 buttons on thecentre console (fig. 139).
The C/S button (A-fig. 139) selects the
CITY or SPORT functions, the ICE button(B-fig. 139) selects the ICE mode.
With the ignition key at MAR, the driving
mode selected is indicated by the lighting
up of the corresponding word on the display
on the instrument cluster (rev counter):C/S(A-fig. 139)

Driving in the SPORT mode increases fuelconsumption.
WARNING The CITY or SPORT driving modes can be selected under any condition (vehicle stationary or on the move).
WARNING When the car is started witha cold engine, the system selects the
SPORT driving mode, even if the CITY
mode has been selected, until the engine
reaches normal operating temperature.

CITY ( C/S button (A-fig. 139)
pressed):
A0B0264m

This is used under normal operating conditions; it gives preference to comfortable
driving and balanced consumption control
engaging gears at relatively low engine
speed.

Alfawiki.nl

156

fig. 139

ICE ( ICE button (B-fig. 133) pressed):This driving mode is recommended when
the road surface offers poor grip (snow, ice,etc.). Moving off takes place in 2nd gear.
The ICE driving mode is available only withthe selector lever at D.
Moving the lever from D, the ICE mode
is automatically cut off.
WARNING The ICE driving mode canbe engaged pressing the corresponding button also with the car on the move, provided
that the speed is below 45 km/h.

For manual gearshifting, move the leverto the left sector (fig. 140).
Moving the gearshift lever to the manual
sector is only possible from position D.
Passing to manual gearshift control is possible under all driving conditions; however,the system will allow engagement only of
the gear consistent with engine rpm and thecurrent speed of the vehicle.
Gearshifting takes place as for a normal
manual gearbox.

WARNING
When manual operation isset (Q-System device) anda high gear is engaged, to accelerate rapidly, for example for overtaking, it is necessary to shift toa lower gear by hand, as for normal cars with mechanical gearbox.

Moving the lever back to position D the
gearbox will resume automatic operation instantly, engaging the ratio in accordancewith the driving characteristics and driving
mode selected.

STOPPING THE CAR
To stop the car, simply press the brake
pedal, regardless of the position of thegearshift lever.

WARNING
With the engine idling evenon level ground, if thebrake pedal is not kept pressed,
the car tends to move.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MANUAL OPERATING MODE,
Q-SYSTEM ACTIVATION

A0B0263m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 140

157

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

FAULT SIGNALLING

Warning light glowing steadily

Warning light flashing

Automatic gearbox faults are indicated by
the t warning light (A-fig. 141) on
the instrument cluster as follows:

If the warning light turns on and glows
steadily when the car is travelling, it indicates that the gearbox oil has reached the
maximum established temperature.

The flashing of the warning light when travelling indicates a fault in the automatic gearbox.

– warning light glowing steadily= maximum automatic gearbox oil temperature;– warning light flashing = automatic
gearbox fault.
Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light should turn on and go out after
approx. 4 seconds.
If the warning light stays on or turns on
during travelling, it indicates a gearbox fault(flashing) or overheated gearbox oil (glowing steadily).

The automatic control system provides an
emergency programme.
It is however advisable to stop the car,move the lever to P or N and let the engine
idle until the warning light goes out. Resume
driving without demanding high performance from the engine.
If the warning light comes on again, it isnecessary to stop again with the engine
idling until it goes out again.
If the interval between one lighting up of
the warning light and the next is below 15
minutes, you are advised to stop the car,turn off the engine and wait for the enginegearbox unit to cool down completely.

A0B0386m

Alfawiki.nl

158 fig. 141

The automatic control system provides an
emergency programme. Under these circumstances, you are advised to stop the car
and turn off the engine; in fact, the nexttime the engine is started, the self-diagnostics system could cut off the fault which
will, however, be memorised by the electronic control device.
Conversely, if the fault remains (warning
light (A- fig. 141) flashing), it is necessary to select the gears manually as if driving a car with mechanical gearbox, bearing in mind that the only two speeds
available are the 2nd and 4th gear, as shownin the table below:
Gear engaged
manually

Gear ratio
available

1st

2nd

2nd

2nd

3rd

4th

4th

4th

If the indicator light remains flashing, contact the
Alfa Romeo Authorized
Service Centers as soon as possible to remove the fault.

If a fault is indicated when the engine isstarted, this means that the gearbox control
system had detected and memorised a fault
during the journey prior to switching the engine off. In this case, too, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services to have the automatic gearbox checked over.

WARNING
When travelling with afaulty gearbox, the reverse
lock might not work: absolutely
never move the lever to position
R with the car on the move.

ACOUSTIC WARNING
This comes into operation for about 18 seconds when:– the driver’s door is open and/or the engine is off with the selector lever in a position other than P;– position R (reverse) is engaged.

WARNING
When driving with a faulty
gearbox, drive with the utmost care considering the restrictedperformance levels (in terms of acceleration and speed) the car canoffer.

PUSH STARTING
Starting the car by pushing or towing is notpossible. In the event of an emergency,
when the battery is flat, start the car witha suitable emergency battery, following the
instructions given in the chapter “In an emergency”.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

It is possible to engage reverse gear.

Alfawiki.nl

159

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

TOWING THE CARWARNING For towing the car, abide bycurrent local regulations. Also follow the instructions given in the chapter “In an emergency”.

WARNING
Do not start the engine
when the vehicle is being
towed.

If the car needs to be towed, observe thefollowing recommendations:– if possible, put the car on a rescue vehicle;– if this is not possible, tow the car by raising the driving wheels (front) from theground;The failure to follow theabove instructions may
cause serious damage tothe automatic gearbox.

– if this, too, is not possible, the car may
only be towed for 50 km at a speed below
50 km/h.
The gearshift lever should be at position N
for towing.

Alfawiki.nl

160

Cars with automatic gearbox may be towed only forshort distances and at low
speed: if longer towing is necessary, the driving wheels must be
raised to prevent the gearbox frombeing pulled into rotation during
towing.

GLOVEBOX
On the dashboard there is a key glovebox
with light.

The compartment is lit by a courtesy lightwhen it is open (when the ignition key is
at MAR (B-fig. 143).
There is a recess on the lid (C-fig. 143)
for inserting a pen or pencil. For the versions/ markets where provided, the closure flap
is fitted with a lock. The lock can be
opened/closed using the ignition key.

GRAB HANDLES (fig. 144)
Grab handles are set above the front doors.
Two grab handles (A) fitted with a coat
hook (B) are located above the rear doors.

WARNING
Do not travel with theglovebox open; it could
harm the passenger in the event ofan accident.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INTERNAL FITTINGS

To open the glovebox use lever (Afig. 142).
A0B0587m

A0B0261m

A0B0124m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 142

fig. 143

fig. 144

161

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CEILING LIGHTS
The car is fitted with passenger’s compartment ceiling lights (front/rear) with
gradual switching on/off. Timings, defined
as max. switching on time elapsing between
the end of gradual switching on and the startof gradual switching off are as follows:

WARNING With ignition key at STOP
or when opening a door or the tailgate 15
minutes timing is activated, then ceilinglights go off. Timing restarts each time adoor/tailgate is opened.
Front roof light (fig. 145)
The roof light comprises two lights with thecontrol switch.

1) approx. 6 seconds when:– unlocking the doors manually or by theremote control– closing the driver’s door to get into the
car and fit the key into the ignition switch– removing the key from the ignition
switch.
2) approx. 3 minutes from the door opening.

With switch (A) in the central position(1), both lights turn on when a door is
opened.
When the doors are closed, a timer is activated for about 7 seconds, to allow the car
to be started. The lights go out when the ignition key is turned to MAR (with the doors
closed).
Moving switch (A) to the left (position 0),
the lights stay off (position OFF).

A0B0575m

Alfawiki.nl

162 fig. 145

Moving switch (A) to the right (position 2) both lights stay on.
The spot function is operated by switch(B).
Moving switch (B) to the left (position 1)
the left spot light turns on. Moving switch
to the right (position 2) the right spot lightturns on.
With switch (B) in the central position (position 0) the spotlights stay off.
WARNING Before leaving the car, makesure that both switches are in the central position. This way, the roof lights will go out
when the doors are closed. If a door is left
open, the lights will go out automatically after a few seconds.
To turn them on again, simply open another door or close the same one and open
it again.

Rear roof light (fig. 147)
(except versions with sunroof)

Centre rear roof lamp (fig. 148)
(only versions with sunroof)

Lowering the passenger’s sun visor, thecourtesy light on the roof lining can be seen.

In correspondence with each rear door
there is a light which turns on automaticallywhen a door is opened.

On the roof lamp there is a switch withthree positions.

This light makes it possible to use the courtesy mirror under conditions with dim light.
On Sportwagon versions there is also a
courtesy light under the driver’s sun visor.
Use switch (A) to turn it on and off, with
the ignition key at MAR.

They are timed and work in the same way
as described for the front roof light.
They can be turned on and off by handpressing the transparent cover (A) on thecircular impression.

When the switch (A) is in the central position (0) the roof lamp turns on automatically when a door is opened.
Lighting up is timed and it works as described for the front roof lamp.
Moving the switch to the right (position 1)
the roof lamp stays off all the time.
Moving the switch to the left (position 2)
the roof lamp stays on all the time.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Courtesy light (fig. 146)
(where required)

WARNING Before leaving the car makesure that the switch (A) is in the central position (0), so that the lamp goes out when
the doors are closed.

A0B0259m

A0B0258m

A0B0257m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 146

fig. 147

fig. 148

163

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARFRONT ASHTRAY AND CIGAR
LIGHTER (fig. 149)
To open the ashtray push and release thefront of the ashtray.
To use the cigar lighter press, with the ignition key at MAR, button (B); after someseconds the knob will return automaticallyto its initial position and the cigar lighter isready for use.

WARNING
The cigar lighter gets extremely hot. Handle withcare and prevent its use by children:
danger of fire and/or burning.

REAR ASHTRAYS (fig. 150)
An ashtray (A) is fitted to each rear door.
To open, pull downwards as shown below.

Always ensure that thecigar lighter has turned off.

Remove the tray (A) to empty and clean
the ashtray.

WARNING
Do not use the ashtray as
paper bin: it could set on
fire on contact with cigarette stubs.

A0B0256m

A0B0255m

Alfawiki.nl

164

fig. 149

fig. 150

ODDMENTS RECESSESON DASHBOARD

FRONT DOORSCOMPARTMENTS AND POCKETS(fig. 153)

Centre recess

Left side recess (fig. 152)

On the centre console near the handbrakelever, there are the following oddments recesses:

An oddments recess (A) is provided on thelower side of the dashboard, on the left ofthe steering column.

Each front door has an oddments pocket(A).

– oddments recesses (A) and (B);– coin recess (C).

A0B0283m

A0B0254m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARODDMENTS RECESSES ON
CENTRE CONSOLE (fig. 151)

A0B0253m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 151

fig. 152

fig. 153

165

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SUN VISORS
They can be adjusted frontally and laterally.
On the back of the visors there is a courtesy mirror with sliding cover (A-fig. 154),
lit by the lamp (B).
The passenger’s sun visor bears also thesymbol for correct use of children’s seats incars equipped with passenger’s airbag. For
further information, see the descriptions
given in paragraph “Passenger’s front
airbag” in this chapter.

TELEPHONE
PROVISION(on request for versions/markets where applicable)
On request for versions/markets whereapplicable, the car may be fitted with a provision for the installation of a cellular telephone.
This provision comprises:– sound system two-function aerial + cellular phone;– supply and connection cables with specific connector for voice kit connection.

A0B0252m

166 fig. 154

The voice kit must be purchased separately by thecustomer, since it has to becompatible with the customer’s
own cellular phone.
For the installation of thecellular phone and connection to the provision in thecar, contact only Alfa Romeo Authorized Services; this will guarantee first-rate results with nopossibility of any inconveniencethat may compromise the safety of
Alfawiki.nl
the vehicle.

ACCESSORIESPURCHASEDBY THE OWNER
If, after purchasing your car, you want toinstall electric accessories that require permanent power supply (burglar alarm, voicefunction, radionavigator with satellite burglar alarm, etc.) or other accessories that affect the vehicle’s electric load, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services, whose qualified
staff is able to recommend the most suitableequipment of the Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo,
and also assess the electric absorption of thesame, checking if the vehicle can withstandthe required load or if a battery of greater
power must be used.

Cellphones and other radio transmitters(e.g. CB radios) cannot be used inside thevehicle, unless you use a separate aerial
mounted outside the vehicle.
The transmission and reception efficiencyof this equipment may also be affected by
the shielding effect of the vehicle’s body.

WARNINGThe use of cellphones, CB
radios or similar inside thepassenger compartment (without
an outside aerial) produces electromagnetic RF fields; if these are amplified by the resonance inside thepassenger compartment, they may
not only result in a potential healthhazard, or poor functioning of theelectronic systems such as engine
control units, ABS/EBD control
units, etc., fitted to the vehicle, butalso put the safety of your vehicle
in jeopardy.

SUNROOF(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
The sunroof can only be operated when
the ignition key is in the MAR position.

WARNING
Improper use of the sunroof
can be dangerous. Before
and while operating it, always
make sure that the passengers are
not exposed to the risk of harmcaused either directly by the sunroof
in motion or by personal items
drawn or knocked by it.

Do not open the sunroof
when snow or ice are on
the roof as this may damage it.

WARNING
When leaving the vehicle,
the ignition key should always be removed to avoid accidents involving the sunroof which
could be inadvertently operated byany passenger remaining in the vehicle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

RADIO
TRANSMITTERS
AND CELLPHONES

Alfawiki.nl

167

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARSLIDING FORWARDS/
BACKWARDS (fig. 155-16)
Press control button (A) on rear end (1)to open the roof; press on front end (2) toclose it.
When the button is released, the sunroof
will stop in that position.
For versions/markets where applicable,
during opening the roof stops automaticallyin an intermediate position called “Comfort”, which is advised for average speeds.
In this case, complete opening is obtainedpressing the rear end (1) of button (A)again. When closing, the roof does not stopin the “Comfort” position.

The sunroof is fitted with a curtain below,
which prevents sun radiation and is drawn
by hand using a catch.
The curtain is drawn by the roof when theroof opens and is pushed completely inside
the roof panel when the roof is opened completely. With the closing movement the curtain will come out partially so that the handcatch is accessible (A-fig. 157).

RAISING TO THE
QUARTERLIGHT POSITION
This can only be achieved (fig. 158)
when the sunroof is completely closed,pressing front end (2) of the control button(A-fig. 159).
Press the rear end (1) of the button (Afig. 159) to return the sunroof to the horizontal position (roof closed).

WARNING
Open and close the roof
only when the vehicle isstationary.
A0B0041m

A0B0249m

A0B0248m

Alfawiki.nl

168 fig. 155

fig. 156

fig. 157

If the electrical control device does notwork, the sunroof can be opened manuallyas follows:

WARNING At the end of the operation,
before removing the screwdriver or thewrench, it is necessary to turn it by half aturn in the direction opposite to that used,until a click is felt.

– apply leverage to the points indicatedby the arrows and remove the plate withswitch (D-fig. 159);

LUGGAGECOMPARTMENT
The boot lid can be opened from outside
the vehicle (pressing the button on the key)and from inside the vehicle.
WARNING If the boot is not properly
shut, the warning light ´ will come on on
the instrument panel or (where applicable)on the Infocenter display (together with relevant message).

– use the outfit screwdriver or the special
wrench (B-fig. 160) supplied for the versions / market where provided, and locatedin the object holder drawer, push on and turnthe sunroof control bushing (C-fig. 160)
clockwise to open it and anti-clockwise to
close it.

A0B0247m

A0B0246m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

EMERGENCY OPERATION

A0B0245m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 158

fig. 159

fig. 160

169

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Lifting the boot lid is made easier by theaction of gas springs.

OPENING FROM INSIDE(fig. 161)

The luggage compartment can be opened
by remote control from outside pressing the
button (C), also when the electronic alarmis on (where applicable).

To open the boot from inside the passenger compartment, pull the lever (A), at theside of the driver’s seat.

WARNING
Only use the boot opening
lever with the vehicle stationary.

OPENING WITH REMOTE
CONTROL (fig. 162)

the gas springs are calibrated to guarantee correct
operation with loading
specified by the manufacturer. Arbitrary additions to the boot lid(spoiler, etc.) may affect its operation and safety.

In this case, the alarm system switches offvolumetric protection and the boot lid control sensor. The system also sounds two
beeps and the arrows light up for about
three seconds (with the exception of versions for certain markets).
Closing the boot again the control functions
are restored, the system sounds two beeps
and the arrows light up for about three seconds (with the exception of versions for certain markets).

A0B0042m

A0B0743m

Alfawiki.nl

170 fig. 161

fig. 162

BOOT LIGHTING (fig. 163)

To close the boot, lower it and press down
above the locking mechanism until it isheard to click into place.

Opening the boot, the light (A) in the upper part of the boot turns on automatically.
The light goes out closing the boot or after a few minutes (about 15) if the boot isleft open. In this case, to turn it on again
close the boot, then open it again.

A0B0000m

SECURING THE LOAD
(fig. 164-165)
The load carried may be blocked withstraps hooked to the special rings in the bootcorners.
The rings also serve to secure the luggage
retaining net (available upon request, forversions/markets where applicable) c/o
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

A0B0242m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CLOSING THE BOOT

A0B0243m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 163

fig. 164

fig. 165

171

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CAUTIONS FOR CARRYINGLUGGAGE
Travelling at night with a load in the bootit is necessary to adjust the height of the low
beam headlights (see next paragraph“Headlights” in this chapter). For correct useof the aiming device, also make sure thatthe load does not exceed the values givenin the same paragraph.

WARNING
Do not load the luggage
compartment above thepermitted maximum (see “Technical specifications”). Also makesure that the objects contained in
the boot are well secured to prevent them from being thrown forward causing harm to the passengers in the event of sharp braking.

WARNINGA heavy load that has notbeen secured may cause
serious harm to passengers in theevent of an accident.

BONNET
The lever used to open the bonnet is located under the left end of the dashboard.
To open:– Pull the lever (A-fig. 166) until thebonnet clicks open.

WARNING
When wanting to carry aspare can of petrol, thismust be done in compliance withthe law, only using a certified can,appropriately fastened to the load
restraint eyelets. Even so, the riskof fire is increased.

WARNING
Only with the car stationary.

A0B0049m

Alfawiki.nl

172

fig. 166

– Press the safety lever (fig. 167) upwards.

WARNINGDANGER-SERIOUS INJURY.
When carrying out checks
or maintenance operations in theengine compartment, take special
care not to bump the head on theraised bonnet.

To close:– lower the bonnet to approx. 20 cm fromthe engine compartment, then let it drop.
Try lifting it to make sure that it is shut completely and not simply caught in the safety
position.
If the bonnet does not close properly, do
not push it down but open it again and repeat the above procedure.

– Raise the bonnet.
WARNING Bonnet raising is aided by
two gas springs. Do not tamper with these
springs and accompany the bonnet whileraising it.

A0B0576m

WARNINGIf checks need to be carriedout in the engine compartment when the engine is still
warm, keep away from the fan as
it could start up even when the key
is removed from the ignition. Wait
until the engine cools down.

WARNING
Scarves, ties and loose
clothing may be caught inthe moving parts.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Before lifting the bonnet,
make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are not raised
from the windscreen.

WARNINGFor safety reasons thebonnet shall always be
perfectly closed when travelling.
Always check for proper bonnet
locking. If the bonnet is left inadvertently open, stop the car immediately and close the bonnet.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 167

173

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ROOF RACKPROVISION
The car is set for mounting special roof
racks.

WARNING
Distribute the load evenly
and when driving, bear inmind the increased sensitivity toside wind.

Roof racks, especially designed for this car,must be fastened to pins (A-fig. 168) set
under the packing, as shown in the figure.

A0B0142m

LIGHT BEAM AIMINGWARNING The adjustment of the headlights is vital to your safety and comfort andto that of other road users. The adjustmentof the headlights is also governed by precise
regulations. To guarantee both to yourself
and to the other drivers the best visibility
conditions when travelling with the headlights on, the vehicle must have its headlights properly adjusted.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services tohave the headlights correctly adjusted.

WARNING
After a few kilometres,check that the fastening
screws are firmly tightened.

IMPORTANT On the inside surface ofthe headlight there could appear a slightcoat of fogging; this does not show a defect,
since it is a natural occurrence due to lowtemperature and to the degree of humidity
in the air; it will soon disappear as soon as
the lights are turned on. The presence ofdrops inside the headlight shows water seepage: refer to the Alfa Romeo Dealership.

Strictly comply with theregulations in force concerning the maximum overall dimensions.

Alfawiki.nl

174

HEADLIGHTS

fig. 168

If the car is fitted with xenon headlights,
beam aiming is electronic and therefore control (A) on the mask near the steering column is not present.
When the vehicle is loaded, the beam fromthe headlights is raised due to the backwards tilt of the vehicle.
In this case the headlights must be adjusted using control (A) located on the plateat the side of the steering column.

This control has four positions corresponding to various vehicle loads given below:– position 0: 1 or 2 people occupying
front seats, full fuel tank, on-board equipment present;– position 1: 5 people on-board;

ADJUSTING THE FRONTFOGLIGHTS(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
To adjust the height of the beam of thefront foglights, act on adjusting screw (Afig. 170).

– position 2: 5 people on-board, luggage
compartment full (50 kg approximately);– position 3: driver and 300 kg in luggage compartment.

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to havethe headlights correctly ad-

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

COMPENSATION FOR TILT
(fig. 169)

justed.

A0B0240m

WARNING
Check the positioning of
the headlight beams every
time you change the load to be carried.

A0B0239m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 169

fig. 170

175

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARGAS DISCHARGE HEADLIGHTS(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
The gas (xenon) discharge headlights operate with a voltaic arc, in an ambient saturated with pressure xenon, instead of theglow filament.
The resulting illumination is sensibly higher
to that of conventional lamps, both for light
quality (clearer light) and for the width andpositioning of the illuminated area.
The advantages of better illumination canbe perceived (due to less eyesight fatigue
and greater orientation capacity for the driver, which in turn means higher driving
safety) especially in case of bad weather,
fog and/or insufficient road signs, thanks
to the better illumination of the side partsof the visual field, normally obscured.

The large increase of the side part illumination increases driving safety since it allows
the driver to better see the other users on
the edge of the road (pedestrians, cyclists
and bikers).
The triggering of the voltaic arc requires avery high voltage, while subsequent power
supply can take place at a low voltage.

The xenon lamps have very long life whichmakes possible fault very unlikely.

The headlights achieve their top luminosity approx. 15 seconds after they areswitched on.
The intense light produced by this type ofheadlights requires the use of an automatic
system to keep headlight trim constant andavoid dazzling the vehicles coming from the
opposite direction in case of braking, acceleration or when carrying loads.

Alfawiki.nl

176

The electromechanical system to automatically keep constant trim makes theheadlight tilt compensating device unnecessary.

WARNINGIf necessary, have the system checked and repairs (ifany) made only by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

As regards cars equipped with gas discharge headlights (xenon lamps)(optional
for versions/markets where applicable) withvery great lighting power, when passing
from a country with right-hand driving to one
with left-hand driving, or vice versa, it is necessary to modify the orientation of thedipped beam headlights, to optimize the illumination of the road edge and avoid dazzling the vehicles coming from the opposite
direction.

To have this operation
carried out, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

WARNING
When you go back to yourcountry of origin, remember to have the dipped beam headlight orientation modified again.

ABS
The car is fitted with an ABS system which
prevents wheel lock when braking, better
exploits wheel grip and keeps the vehicle
controllable within the limits of the available
grip also during emergency braking.
The driver can feel that the ABS is operational by a light pulsing of the brake pedal,
accompanied by noise.
This should not interpreted as malfunctioning of the brakes, but it is the signal tothe driver that the ABS system is working:it is the warning that the car is travelling at
the limit of grip an that, therefore, it is necessary to adapt the speed to the type of roadon which you are travelling.
The ABS system is an additional part of thebasic braking system; in the event of a fault
it is disabled, leaving the braking systemin the same conditions as a car without ABS.

In the event of a failure, though being unable to rely on the antilock effect, there isabsolutely no adverse effect on vehicle braking performance in terms of braking capacity.
If you have never used a car with ABS before, you are advised to learn how to use
it with a few preliminary trials on a slippery
surface, naturally under safety conditions
and fully adhering to the Highway Code of
the country concerned. You are also advised
to carefully read the following information.
The advantage of the ABS compared withthe conventional system is that it makes it
possible to maintain maximum vehicle handling performance also in the case of hardbraking under grip limit conditions, avoiding
wheel lock.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT
AIMING FOR LEFT-HAND/
RIGHT-HAND DRIVING(only for versions with gas
discharge headlights)

Do not however expect the braking distance always to be reduced with the ABS
system: for example, on soft surfaces suchas gravel or fresh snow on slippery surfaces,
the distance might increase.

Alfawiki.nl

177

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

In order to be able to exploit as far as possible the possibility of the antilock systemin the case of need, it is wise to follow a few
pieces of advice:

WARNING
The ABS exploits the available grip in full, but it cannot increase it; therefore, caution
is required on slippery surfaces,
without running unnecessary risks.

WARNING
If the ABS cuts in, it meansthat the grip limit between
the tyres and the road surface has
been reached: it is necessary toslow down and adapt driving to
the grip available.

WARNINGIn the event of a systemfault, with lighting up of
the > warning light on the instrument cluster (together with themessage + symbol shown by thedisplay), have the vehicle checked
immediately by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, driving slowly
to be able to regain full system
performance.
Braking on corners always requires the utmost caution, even with the help of the ABS.
The most important piece of advice, however, is the following:

WARNING
When the ABS cuts in andyou feel the pedal pulse, do
not reduce the pressure, but keep
the brake pedal firmly pressedwith no fear; this way you willstop in the shortest possible space,compatibly with the conditions of
the road surface.

Alfawiki.nl

178

Following these instructions you will bein a condition to obtain peak braking performance at all times.
WARNING Cars fitted with ABS must
only be fitted with wheel rims, tyres andbrake linings of the type and brand approvedby the Manufacturer.
The braking system is completed by theelectronic control braking distribution systemcalled EBD (Electronic Braking Force Distributor) which distributes the braking action
through the ABS system control unit andsensors.

WARNING
The car is fitted with anelectronic brake distributor(EBD). If the > and x warning
lights, where required, come on at
the same time (together with themessage + symbol shown by thedisplay) when the engine is running, there is an EBD system fault;
in this case, violent braking may
lock the rear wheels too early, withthe possibility of skidding. Drive
extremely carefully to the nearest
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services tohave the system checked over.

WARNING
The turning on of the >warning light (together
with the message + symbol shownby the display) with the engine
running normally indicates an ABS
system fault. In this case the braking system preserves its effectiveness, without however making
use of the antilock device. Under
these circumstances, the EBD system may fail to give top performance. In this case, too, you arerecommended to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services immediately, driving in such a way as to
avoid abrupt braking, to have thesystem checked.

VDC AND ASRSYSTEMS(where required)
VDC SYSTEM (VEHICLE
DYNAMICS CONTROL):
GENERAL
The VDC is an electronic vehicle stability
control system which, acting on the torqueand braking the wheels in a differentiatedmanner, helps to bring the car back to thecorrect course in the event of loss of grip.
While travelling the car is subjected to lateral and longitudinal forces that may becontrolled by the driver up to when thetyres offer adequate road-holding; when
this falls below the minimum level, the car
starts to deviate from the course requiredby the driver.
Above all on rough surfaces (such as cobbles, or due to the presence of water, iceor soil), changes in speed (when accelerating or braking) and/or course (bends or theneed to avoid obstacles) can cause the tyres
to lose grip.

When the sensors detect the conditions
that would lead to skidding, the VDC systemacts on the engine and brakes generatinga stabilising torque.

WARNING
The system performancelevels, in terms of active
safety, should not induce the driver to run pointless and unjustified
risks. Driving conduct should always be suited to the conditions of
the road surface, vision and traffic. The responsibility for roadsafety is always and anyway thevehicle driver’s concern.
The VDC system helps the driverto keep control of the car in theevent of loss of tyre grip.
The forces induced by the VDC system to control the lack of stabilityof the car always and anyway depend on the grip between the tyreand the road surface.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
If the x low brake fluid
warning light comes on (together with the message + symbol
shown by the display), stop the car
immediately and contact the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. Indeed, any leak of fluid
from the hydraulic system compromises the effectiveness of boththe conventional brake system andthe system with antilock system.

Alfawiki.nl

179

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

VDC SYSTEM OPERATIONThe VDC system turns on automaticallywhen the car is started and cannot beswitched off. It is however possible to cut
off operation of the ASR system pressing thecorresponding button on the centre console.
The main components of the VDC systemare:– an electronic control unit which
processes the signals received from the various sensors and brings about the most appropriate strategy;– a sensor that detects the position of thesteering wheel;– four sensors that detect the rotation
speed of each wheel;– a sensor that detects rotation of the cararound the vertical axis;– a sensor that detects lateral acceleration(centrifugal force).

The heart of the VDC system is the VDC
control unit which with the data supplied by
the sensors installed on the car, calculates
the centrifugal forces generated when the
car is cornering. The yawing sensor detects
the rotations of the car around its own vertical axis. The centrifugal forces generated
when the car is cornering are detected bya highly sensitive lateral acceleration sensor.
The stabilising action of the VDC system isbased on calculations made by thesystem’s electronic control unit which
processes the signals received from thesteering wheel rotation, lateral accelerationand individual wheel rotation sensors. Thesesignals allow the control unit to recognise
the manoeuvre the driver intends to dowhen turning the steering wheel.
The control unit processes the information
received from the sensors and is therefore
capable of detecting the position of the car
and comparing it with the trajectory the driver would like to follow instant by instant.
In the event of a discrepancy, the control
unit chooses and commands the most suitable action to bring the car back to the required course within a fraction of a second:braking one or more wheels at a different
braking force and, if necessary it reduces thepower transmitted by the engine.

Alfawiki.nl

180

The corrective actions are changed and controlled continuously until the car returns to
the required course.
The action of the VDC system considerablyincreases the active safety of the vehicle under many critical situations and it is particularly useful also when the road surface grip
conditions change.

WARNINGFor the VDC, ASR and ABS
systems to work correctly,
the tyres must be of the samebrand and type on all wheels, in
perfect conditions and above all of
the specified type, brand and size.

WARNING
During use of the compact
spare wheel, the VDC system continues working. It should beborne in mind that the spare wheel
is smaller than a normal tyre,
therefore its grip is lower than thatof the other tyres of the car.

The action of the ASR system is particularly
helpful under the following conditions:

TURNING ON THE ASR
FUNCTION

The ASR system integrates the VDC system controlling the vehicle drive and coming into operation automatically each time
one or both driving wheels skid.

– Skidding of the inner wheel on a bend,
due to the effect of the dynamic changes ofthe load or over-accelerating.

The ASR function turns on automaticallyeach time the engine is started.

Two different control systems are activated,depending on the skidding conditions:– If skidding concerns both driving wheels,
because it is caused by the excessive powertransmitted, the ASR system cuts in reducing the power transmitted by the engine.
– If skidding concerns only one driving
wheel, the ASR system cuts in automaticallybraking the skidding wheel, with an effectsimilar to that of a self-locking differential.

– Excessive power transmitted to thewheels, also in relation to the conditions of
the road surface.
– Acceleration on slippery, snowy or icy
surfaces.
– In the case of loss of grip on a wet surface (aquaplaning).
CUTTING IN OF THE VDCSYSTEM
The cutting in of the VDC system is indicated by the flashing of the warning lightá on the instrument cluster, to inform thedriver that the car is in critical conditions ofstability and grip.

When travelling it is possible to switch thesystem off and on again pressing the switch(A-fig. 171) on the centre console.
Function disconnection is shown by the ledon the ASR button being turned on. If thefunction is turned off while travelling, it willturn on again automatically the next timethe engine is started.
WARNING When driving on snow, withsnow chains fitted, if may be helpful to switch
off the ASR function: in these conditions infact, skidding of the driving wheels whenmoving off helps to obtain better traction.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARASR FUNCTION (ANTISLIPREGULATION): GENERAL

A0B0557m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 171

181

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING LIGHT ON
INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the ignition key is turned to MAR,the dial warning light á comes on but mustgo out after a few seconds.
If the warning light does not go out, or if it
stays on (together with the message + symbol on the display and the coming on of the
ASR button led) when the vehicle is running,
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
The flashing of the warning lamp when thevehicle is running indicates the actuation of
the VDC system.
VDC system failure warning
In the event of a failure the VDC systemdisengages automatically and the á warning light on the instrument cluster turns on
glowing steadily (together with the message+ symbol shown on the display and the coming on of the ASR button led).
In the event of a VDC system failure thecar behaves like a vehicle not fitted with thissystem: in any case it is advisable to contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon
as possible.

EOBD SYSTEMThe EOBD (European On Board Diagnosis)
system fitted in the car conforms with the
98/69/EC (EURO 3) Directive and the
2001/1/EC Directive, level B (EURO4) for
2.0 JTS, 2.0 JTS Selespeed and JTD 20V
Multijet versions.
This system continuously monitors thecomponents of the vehicle related to emissions; it also indicates, when the warning
light U comes on on the instrument panel(together with the message + symbol
shown by the display) that the components
in question are in poor conditions.
The objective is the following:– to keep under control the efficiency ofthe system;– to indicate when a malfunction causes
an increase in the emissions beyond thethreshold established by European regulations;– to indicate the need to replace the deteriorated components.
The system also has a diagnostic connector, which can be interfaced with adequate instruments, that enables the error codes stored
in the control unit to be read, together witha series of specific parameters concerning theoperation and diagnosis of the engine.

Alfawiki.nl

182

This check can also be made by the traffic control agents.

If, when the ignition key
is turned to MAR, the U
warning light does notcome on or if, when driving, itlights up and emits a fixed light ora flashing one (together with themessage + symbol shown by thedisplay), contact an Alfa Romeo
Authorized Service Station as soon
as possible. The operation of the
U warning light can also bechecked by means of special equipment available to the traffic control officers. Comply with the regulations in force in country where
you drive your car.

WARNING After the problem has beelresolved, to completely check the system,
the Alfa Romeo Authorized Services mustcarry out tests on a test bench and, if necessary, road tests that could be long.

(where applicable)
The fixed sound system, with cassette
player (radio with cassette player) or CD
player with parametric sound equalizer (radio with CD player) has been designed tosuit the specific characteristics of the passenger compartment, with a personalised
design that matches the style of the dashboard. The sound system instructions for use
are described in the attached supplement.

SOUND SYSTEMPRESETTING SYSTEM(for versions/markets whereapplicable)

The sound system shall be installed in theproper housing occupied by the glove compartment that can be removed by pressing
the two retaining tabs in the glove compartment: here are the power cables.

The car, if not delivered with sound system, is fitted with a glove compartment(fig. 172) on the instrument panel.
Sound system presetting system includes
the following:– sound system power cables;– front and rear speaker power cables;– aerial power cable;– sound system housing;– aerial on car roof (where provided).

If after buying the car you
want to install the soundsystem, contact first Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services whose
qualified personnel, in addition tosuggesting the most suitable devices, will evaluate the overall
electric absorption to safeguard thebattery. Excessive loadless absorption could damage the battery
and lose warranty.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SOUND SYSTEM

A0B742m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 172183

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The wiring diagram is the following (fig.
173):
Connector A
A1 N.C.
A2 N.C.
A3 N.C.
A4 + 30 (battery-powered)
A5 Aerial power supply

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

AerialSpeakers (fig. 174-175)

For versions/markets where applicable,
the aerial can be built into the rear heatedwindow or can be located on the car roof.

For cars fitted with presetting system, thesound system includes the following:– 2 tweeters (A-fig. 174), with 30W
power;– 4 speakers (B-fig. 174) and (A-fig.
175), 165 mm diameter (2 front and 2rear), with 40W power.

A0B387m

A6 Light
A7 + 15 (key-powered)
A8 Ground
Connector B
B1 RH rear speaker
B2 RH rear speaker
B3 RH front speakerfig. 174

B4 RH front speaker

A0B741mA0B237m

B5 LH front speaker
B6 LH front speaker
B7 LH rear speaker
B8 LH rear speaker

Alfawiki.nl

184

fig. 173

fig. 175

In order to prevent the vehicle being filledwith leaded petrol, the diameter of the filler
neck is smaller than the nozzle used onpumps delivering leaded petrol.

PETROL ENGINESThe anti-pollution devices
present on the vehicle impose the use of four-star
unleaded fuel with an octane number (R.O.N.) above 95.

If the catalyst is notworking properly, harmful
emissions reach the exhaust, resulting in environment pollution.
JTD ENGINES

Under no circumstances
should conventional leaded
petrol be used, as thiswould irreparably damage the catalyst. If the tank is accidentally
filled with leaded fuel, even inminute quantities, DO NOT START
THE ENGINE. Do not attempt to dilute the petrol with lead free fuel.
Drain the entire fuel circuit andtank.

The car must be refuelled
only with fuel oil for motor
vehicles, in conformity with
European specification EN590. The
use of other products or mixtures
may damage the engine irreparably, resulting in invalidation of thewarranty for the damage caused.
If the tank is accidentally filledwith another type of fuel, do notstart the engine but drain the tank.
If the engine has been run even fora brief period, the tank must be
drained together with the entire
fuel circuit.

At low temperatures, the degree of fluidity of fuel oil may become insufficient due
to the formation of paraffins leading to danger of clogging the fuel oil filter.
Therefore, to avoid inconveniences, summer and winter fuel oils are normally distributed depending on the season.
However, during the intermediate season,
characterised by a large difference between
outside temperatures (0°C to 15°C), thequality of the fuel oil distributed to thepumps may not be adequate.
In this case, and above all if the use of the
car involves stopping and then starting again
at low temperatures (e.g. mountains),
make sure the car is filled with winter fueloil; if not, you are advised to mix the fueloil with a DIESEL MIX additive in the proportions stated on the can, pouring first theantifreeze and then the fuel oil into the tank.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

REFUELLINGThe DIESEL MIX antifreeze should bemixed with the fuel oil before reactions due
to cold take place. Adding it too late will
prove pointless.

Alfawiki.nl

185

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

FUEL CAP (fig. 176)
The fuel flap is released from inside thecar, raising the front part of the lever (A).

WARNING For your safety, make surethat the fuelling pump nozzle is inserted correctly into the housing, before starting theengine.

The fuel cap (A-fig. 177) has a catchto prevent misplacing it (B) that fastens it
to the flap (C).
WARNING The fuel tank is sealed hermetically and pressure may build up inside.
Any noise of rushing air when the cap is removed is perfectly normal.

In case of need, replace
the fuel cap only with an
original one; otherwise,
the efficiency of the petrol vapour
recovery system could be badly affected.

EMERGENCY FLAP OPENING
DEVICEWARNING
Do not get near the fuelfiller with naked flames or
lit cigarettes: danger of fire. Also
avoid going too near the filler withthe face to avoid inhaling harmful
vapours.

A0B0044m

If the lever (A-fig. 176) fails to work,
it is still possible to open the flap by pullingthe cord (A-fig. 178) on the right-handside of the luggage compartment.

A0B0045m

A0B0388m

Alfawiki.nl

186 fig. 176

fig. 177

fig. 178

(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)

ACOUSTIC SIGNAL
When the reverse gear is engaged an intermittent acoustic signal is automatically
activated.
The acoustic signal:

The parking system detects and informs
the driver (through an intermittent acoustic
signal) about the presence of obstacles in
the rear part of the car (fig. 179).

– raises with the reduction of distance between the car and the obstacle;

ACTIVATION– is constant if the distance is unvaried.
If this situation takes place for side sensors,
the signal is stopped after about 3 seconds
to prevent sound indications when performing manoeuvres near walls.

The sensors are automatically activatedwhen the reverse gear is engaged.
The sound produced by the acoustic alarm
becomes continuous when the distance between the car and the obstacle is less that30 cm.

– becomes continuous when the distance
between the car and the obstacle is less that30 cm and stops if the distance raises.

ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION
The design and construction of the vehicle have not only been developed with thetraditional aspects of performance andsafety in mind, but also take into accountthe increasingly pressing problems tied toprotecting the environment.
The choice of materials, techniques andparticular parts are the result of work which
has made it possible to drastically reduce
the harmful effects on the environment andguarantee respect for the severest international norms.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

PARKING SENSORS(WHERE PROVIDED)USE OF NON-TOXICMATERIALS

A0B0609m

None of the components of the vehicle contains asbestos. The padding and the climate
control system do not contain CFCs which
are held to be responsible for the depletionof the ozone layer.
The colouring agents and the corrosion inhibitors used on the nuts, screws and bolts
do not contain cadmium any more, which
could pollute the atmosphere or water tables.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 179

187

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

EMISSION REDUCING DEVICES(petrol engines)
Trivalent catalytic converter(catalytic silencer)
The exhaust system is fitted with a catalyzer formed of alloys of noble metals. It
is housed in a stainless steel container which
is able to resist the high operating temperatures.
The catalyzer converts the unburnt hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxides present in the exhaust gas (even if insmall quantities thanks to the electronic injection and ignition system) into harmlesscompounds.

Lambda probe
A sensor (lambda probe) measures thecontent of oxygen present in the exhaustgas. The signal transmitted by the lambda
probe is use by the injection and ignition
electronic control unit to adjust the air-fuelmixture.

Anti-evaporation system
As it is impossible, even when the engine
is switched off, to prevent the formation offuel vapours, a system has been devised
which imprisons the vapours in a special activated carbon container.
During operation of the engine, thesevapours are sucked up and sent to combustion.

Oxidising catalytic converter
Converts the polluting substances present
in the exhaust gases (carbon monoxide, unburned hydrocarbons and particulate) into
harmless substances, thus reducing thefumes and smell that are typical of diesel
engines.
The catalytic converter consists of a stainless steel case that houses a ceramic honeycomb body coated with noble metal used
as a catalyst.
Exhaust gas recirculation system(E.G.R.)
This system recycles, i.e. re-uses, a varying percentage of the exhaust gases, depending on engine operating conditions.
It is used, when necessary, to control nitric oxides.

WARNING
Due to the high temperatures reached during operation of the catalytic converter, thevehicle should not be parked over
inflammable materials (paper, fueloils, grass, dry leaves, etc.).

Alfawiki.nl

188

EMISSION REDUCING DEVICES(JTD engines )STARTING
THE ENGINEWARNING The car is fitted with an electronic engine lock device. If the engine fails
to start see “Alfa Romeo CODE system”.

In addition to the notes
and specifications given below we recommend that,during the initial period, you do not
drive to full vehicle performance(for example excessive acceleration, long journeys at top speed,
hard braking, etc.).

WARNING
Running the engine in confined areas is extremely
dangerous. The engine consumes
oxygen and produces carbon
monoxide which is a highly toxic
and lethal gas.

The ignition switch is fitted with a safety
device which obliges the driver to return theignition key to the STOP position before repeating the starting operation if the engine
does not start immediately.
Similarly, when the engine is running, thedevice prevents the key being moved from
the MAR to the AVV position.

To avoid useless consumption of power andpossible draining the battery, never leave the ignition key
in the MAR position when the engine is not running.

PROCEDURE FOR PETROLENGINESWARNING It is important not to press
the accelerator until the engine has started.
1) Make sure the handbrake is engaged.
2) Move the gear lever to neutral.
3) Fully depress the clutch pedal so thatthe starter motor is not forced to crank the
toothed wheels of the gearbox.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

4) Ensure that the systems and electricaldevices, especially if they absorb high quantities of energy (e.g. heated rear windscreen) are switched off.
5) Turn the ignition to the AVV position
and release it as soon as the engine starts.
6) If the engine does not start, return the
key to the STOP position and repeat theoperation.
WARNING If it is difficult to start the engine do not insist with extended attempts
which may damage the catalyzer but contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Alfawiki.nl

189

CORRECT USE OF THE CARWARNING The electric devices that absorb much energy (air conditioner,rearscreen heating, etc.) are disengaged automatically during engine starting.
If the engine does not start at the first attempt, move the ignition key back to the
STOP position before repeating starting.

– Do not drive at full performance for the
initial kilometers of the journey, Wait until
the engine coolant temperature is between
50 and 60°C.

PROCEDURE FOR JTD VERSIONS

If starting is difficult (with the Alfa Romeo
CODE system efficient), do not insist withprolonged attempts.

SWITCHING OFF

1) Make sure the handbrake is engaged.
2) Move the gearshift lever to neutral.
3) Turn the ignition key to the MAR position. The warning light m on the instrument cluster will turn on.
4) Wait for the m warning light to go
off, which will depend on how warm the engine is. With the engine very hot the warning light may stay on for such a short timethat it is not noticed.

Only use an auxiliary battery if it is notedthat the cause is due to low charge of the
car’s battery. Never use a battery charger tostart the engine (see “If the battery is flat”
in the chapter “In an emergency”).

5) Fully depress the clutch pedal.
6) Turn the ignition key to AVV as soon
as the m warning light goes off. Waiting
too long would make the glow plug heating
work pointless.

Alfawiki.nl

190

WARMING THE ENGINEWARNING On the 2.0 JTS version,
keep the brake pedal pressed when starting
the engine. As the brake pedal stiffens if itis pressed repeatedly with the engine off. In
this situation, to allow the engine to be
started, it is necessary to increase the pressure exerted on the pedal itself.

– Drive off slowly, at medium revs without accelerating abruptly.

– Release the accelerator pedal and wait
until the engine reaches idle speed.
– Turn the ignition key to the STOP position and switch off the engine.
WARNING After a taxing drive it is better to allow the engine to “catch its breath”
before turning it off by letting it idle to allow the temperature in the engine compartment to fall.

WARNING If the engine turns off withthe car on the move, the next time it isstarted, the Alfa Romeo CODE warning light
Y may turn on. In this case, check thatswitching off and starting the engine again
with the car stationary, the warning lightstays off. If not, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

EMERGENCY STARTING
If the Alfa Romeo CODE system does notrecognise the code transmitted by the ignition key (Alfa Romeo CODE Y warning
light on the instrument cluster on glowing
steadily) emergency starting may be carriedout using the code of the CODE card.
For the correct procedure see the chapter“In an emergency”.

Starting by pushing, towing or running downhill
must
absolutely
beavoided. These manoeuvres may
cause fuel to flow into the catalyst
and damage it irreparably.

WARNING
Remember that the servobrake and power steering
are not activated until the engine
is started, therefore considerably
greater effort is required on thebrake pedal and steering wheel.

Alfawiki.nl

PARKING
When the vehicle is parked, proceed as follows:– Switch off the engine.
– Engage the handbrake.
– Engage first gear if the car is facing uphill or reverse if the car is facing downhill.
– Turn the front wheels so that the car will
immediately come to a half if the handbrakeslips.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

For vehicles equippedwith turbocharger in particular and for other vehicles in general, revving the engine
before switching off should be
avoided.
Revving the engine serves no purpose and consumes fuel for no reason. It may also cause damage tothe bearings on the rotor of theturbocharger.

To avoid useless consumption of power andpossible draining the battery, never leave the ignition key
in the MAR position when the engine is not running.

WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the car. Always
remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the car and take itwith you.

191

CORRECT USE OF THE CARSAFE DRIVING
In designing your Alfa 156, Alfa
Romeo has worked thoroughly to achieve avehicle able to offer top levels of safety toits passengers. However, the behaviour ofthe driver is still a decisive factor for roadsafety.
Below you will find a few simple rules fortravelling safely under different conditions.
You are certainly familiar with many of thembut it is still helpful to read them all carefully.
BEFORE DRIVING OFF– Make sure the lights and headlights areworking properly.

– Carefully adjust the headrests so thatthe head and not the neck rests on them.
Check that nothing (mats, etc.) can get under the foot pedals.
– Make sure that any child restraint system (seats, cradles, etc.) are correctly fastened on the rear seat.
– Place any objects in the boot with care
to prevent abrupt braking from throwing
them forwards.
– Avoid heavy meals before a journey. A
light meal will help to keep reflexes ready.
Above all avoid alcohol.
Routinely remember to check:– The first rule for safe driving is care.
– Care also means being able to predict
the actions of other road users.
– Strictly respect the traffic regulations in
all countries, especially the speed limits.
– Ensure that both yourself and your passengers are wearing their seat belts, thatchildren are carried with the appropriate
seats and that any animals are in appropriate compartments.
– Long distances should be trackled ingood health.

– tyre pressure and conditions;– engine oil level;– Adjust the seat, steering wheel andrearview mirrors, in order to obtain a correct
position for driving.

– engine coolant level and system conditions;– Adjust the seat back upright and keep
your head as close as possible to the headrestraint.

– power steering oil level;– brake fluid level;– windscreen washer fluid level.

Alfawiki.nl

192

WHEN TRAVELLINGWARNING
Driving under the influenceof drugs and/or somemedicines is highly dangerous foroneself and for others.

WARNING
Make sure any mats areappropriate in size: even aslight inconvenience to the braking
system may require a higher pedal
stroke than normal.

NIGHT DRIVING
Here are some suggestions for night driving.
– Drive with particular care: night driving
involves a greater degree of concentration.
– Reduce speed, especially on unlit roads.
– At the first signs of drowsiness stop thecar: continuing the journey is dangerous foryourself and others. Continue driving only
after sufficient rest.

WARNING
Take care when fitting additional spoilers, alloy
wheels and wheel caps: they might
reduce ventilation of the brakes,
thus their efficiency, during abrupt
and repeated braking, or long
downhill slopes.

WARNING
Never drive with objects
on the floor in front of thedriver’s seat: they might get stuckunder the pedals making it impossible to accelerate or brake.

WARNING
Water, ice and salt on theroads may deposit on thebrake discs, reducing the effectiveness of the brakes the firsttime they are used.
– Do not drive for long periods without abreak. During breaks get out of the vehicle
and move around a bit to shake off thedrowsiness.
– Make sure the air in the passenger compartment is changed constantly.
– Never coast the vehicle downhill withthe engine switched off as this eliminates
the engine braking and power steering effect thus requiring a greater effort on thepedal and steering wheel.

Alfawiki.nl

CORRECT USE OF THE CARWARNING
Always fasten the front
and rear seat belts including those of any child’s seat. Travelling without seat belts increases
the risks of serious injury or evendeath in the event of an accident.

– Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front than in the day: it is more difficult to judge the speed of the vehicle when
only the lights can be seen.
– Ensure that the headlights are correctlyaligned: if they are too low, visibility is reduced and eyesight is tired. If they are toohigh they may cause disturbance to otherroad users.
– Use the main beams only outside builtup areas and only when you are certain that
other drivers are not disturbed by their use.
– When meeting vehicles coming in the
opposite direction, switch off the main
beams and drive with the dipped-beamheadlights on.
– Keep headlights and lights clean.
– Outside built-up areas take care of animal crossings.

193

CORRECT USE OF THE CARDRIVING IN THE RAINDRIVING IN THE FOG

MOUNTAIN DRIVING

Rain and wet roads can be dangerous.

– If fog is very thick, avoid travellingwhere possible. If travelling with mist,
ground fog or the possibility of fog banks:– When driving downhill, use the engine
braking by engaging a low gear, to preventthe brakes from overheating.

– Drive at moderate speed.

– Never coast downhill with the engine off
or in neutral and especially not with the ignition key removed.

If the road is wet, the traction between
wheel and asphalt is greatly reduced, thusincreasing the stopping distance and decreasing road holding.
Here are few suggestions in the case ofrain:– Reduce speed and keep further backfrom the vehicle in front.
– If it is raining particularly heavily, visibility is also reduced. In these cases, switch
on the dipped headlights even if it is still daylight so you can be seen more easily.
– Do not drive through puddles at speed
and hold on tightly to the wheel if you do: apuddle taken at high speed might cause you
to lose control of the car (“aquaplaning”).
– Position the ventilation controls fordemisting (see chapter “Getting to know
your car”), to prevent visibility from worsening.
– Routinely check the conditions of thewindscreen wiper blades.

– Also in the day turn on the dipped-beamheadlights, rear fog guards and front fog
lights. Do not use the main beam headlights.
WARNING On stretches of road withgood visibility, switch off your rear foglights;
the brightness of these lights could annoy
the people travelling in the cars behind.
– Remember that fog also involves wetasphalt, thus greater difficulty in all types ofmanoeuvres and longer stopping distances.
– Keep well away from the vehicle infront.
– Where possible avoid sudden changes
in speed.
– Possibly avoid overtaking other vehicles.
– If the vehicle is forced to stop (faults,
impossibility to continue due to poor visibility, etc.), firstly try to pull off the road.
Then turn on the hazard warning lights and,if possible the dipped beam headlights. Rythmically sound the horn if you note anothercar coming.

Alfawiki.nl

194– Drive at moderate speed and avoid “cutting” corners.
– Remember that overtaking up hill isslower and therefore requires a greater
length of clear road. If you are being overtaken on a hill, move over to enable theother vehicle to pass in safety.

DRIVING WITH ABS

Here are few suggestions for driving inthese conditions:

The ABS is a part of the braking system
which essentially offers two advantages:– Keep your speed down.

1) It prevents wheel lock-up and consequent skidding in emergency stops, particularly when the road does not offer muchgrip;

– On a snowy road, fit winter tyres orsnow chains; see the related paragraphs inthis section.
– Use exhaust brake where possible andavoid abrupt braking.
– Avoid abrupt acceleration and changesof direction.
– During cold weather even apparently dryroads may be covered with occasional
patches of ice. Pay great attention therefore
when driving on roads which are in theshade, or where rocks or trees line the roadand on which ice may persist.
– Keep further back from the vehicle infront.

2) It makes it possible to brake and steer
at the same time so you can avoid unexpected obstacles and direct the car where
you want while braking. The extent to which
this can be done will depend on the physical limits of the tyre’s sideways grip.

REDUCING RUNNING
COSTS ANDENVIRONMENTPOLLUTION
Some suggestions which may help you tokeep the running costs of your vehicle down
and lower the amount of toxic emissions released into the atmosphere are given below.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

To make the most of the ABS:

Vehicle maintenance– In emergency braking or when grip islow, a slight pulsing can be felt on the brake
pedal: this means that the ABS has comeinto action. Do not release the pedal, but
continue pressing it to give continuity to thebraking action.

The overalll state of the vehicle is an important factor which has a marked influence
over fuel consumption and driving comfort
and on the life span of your vehicle. For thisreason care should be taken to maintainyour vehicle by carrying out the necessary
checks and regulations in accordance withspecifications given in the “Scheduled Maintenance Programme” (see sections... spark
plugs, air cleaner, timing).

– The ABS prevents the wheels from locking but it does not increase the physical limits of grip between the asphalt and the road.
Therefore, also with a car fitted with ABS,
keep within a safety distance from the vehicle in front and limit speed when approaching bends.

CORRECT USE OF THE CARDRIVING ON SNOW AND ICE

The ABS serves to increase car controllabilty not to go faster.

Alfawiki.nl

195

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

Tyres

Electrical devices

Tyres should be checked at least every four
4 weeks: if the pressure is too low, fuel consumption increases as the resistance to therolling movement of the tyre is higher. In
this state, tyre wear is increased
and vehicle handling suffers which will affect safety.

Use the electric devices for the necessary
time only. The heated rear window, supplementary lights, windscreen wipers, heating
system blower require large amounts of energy and, increasing the request for power
also increases fuel consumption (up to+25% when driving in built-up areas).

Unnecessary loads

Air conditioner

Do not travel with too much luggage stowed
in the boot. The weight of the vehicle (especially when driving in town) and its trim
greatly affects consumption and stability.

The air conditioner is an additional load
which greatly affects the engine leading tohigher consumption (on average up to+20%). When the temperature outside thevehicle permits it, use the air vents where
possible.

Luggage/ski rack
Remove luggage or ski racks from the roofof the vehicle as soon as they are no longer
needed. These accessories reduce the aerodynamic penetration of the vehicle and will
increase consumption. When transporting
particularly large objects, use a trailer where
possible.

Spoilers
The use of aerodynamic optional extras
which are not certified for the specific useon the vehicle, may reduce the aerodynamic
penetration of the vehicle and increase consumption.

Alfawiki.nl

196

STYLE OF DRIVING
Starting
Do not warm the engine when the vehicle
is stationary or at high or low revs: in thisway the engine will warm up gradually increasing consumption and emissions. You
should drive off slowly straight away avoiding high revs so that the engine will warm
up more quickly.
Unnecessary actions
Avoid revving the engine when stopped attraffic lights or before switching off the engine and avoid doubling the clutch as theseactions have no purpose on modern vehicles
and serve only to increase consumption andpollution.
Gear selection
As soon as the traffic and road conditions
allow it, shift to a higher gear. Using a lower
gear to liven up acceleration greatly increases consumption. In the same way, improper use of the higher gears will increase
consumption, emissions and wear and tearon the engine.

Fuel consumption increases considerablyas speed increases. For example, when accelerating from 90 to 120 kph, fuel consumption increases by about +30%. Your
speed should be kept as even as possible
and superfluous braking and acceleration
avoided as this increases both consumption
and emissions. A “soft” way of driving
should be adopted by attempting to anticipate manoeuvres to avoid imminent danger
and to keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front in order to avoid braking sharply.
Acceleration
Accelerating violently increasing the revs
will greatly affect consumption and emissions: acceleration should be gradual andshould not exceed the maximum torque.

CONDITIONS OF USE
Cold starting
Short journeys and frequent cold starting
will not enable the engine to reach optimalrunning temperature. It follows therefore
that consumption will be higher (from +15%
to +30% in built-up areas) as will the production of toxic emissions.
Traffic and road conditions
Heavy traffic and higher consumption aresynonymous; for example, when driving
slowly with frequent use of lower gears orin large towns where there are numerous
traffic lights.
Winding roads, mountain roads andbumpy roads also have a negative effect on
consumption.
Enforced halts
During prolonged hold-ups (traffic lights,
level crossings) the engine should beswitched off.

ECONOMY ANDENVIRONMENTFRIENDLY DRIVING
Environment protection is one of the principles that guided the development of yourAlfa 156.
It is not merely by chance that its antipollution devices obtain results far beyond thosespecified by current regulations.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

Top speeds

The environment, however, still needs theutmost care from all of us.
By following few simple rules it is possible
to avoid damage to the environment andvery often at the same time to limit fuel consumption. On this subject we are giving
some helpful suggestions to be added tothose marked with the #, in various pointsof this manual.
Kindly read them all carefully.

Alfawiki.nl

197

CORRECT USE OF THE CARPROTECTING EMISSION
REDUCING DEVICES
Correct operation of the antipollution devices not only guarantees respect for the environment but also influences car performance. Keeping these devices in good condition is therefore the first rule for both environment-friendly and economy driving.
The first precaution is to closely follow the“Scheduled Maintenance Programme ”. For
petrol engines only use unleaded petrol (95RON) (specification EN228), for diesel engines only use fuel oil for motor vehicles(specification EN590).
If difficulty with starting is experienced do
not insist with extended attempts. Especiallyavoid bump, tow or coast starts: these may
all damage the catalyst. Only use an auxiliary battery to start the car in an emergency.

If the engine is “not running smoothly”
when the vehicle is travelling, reduce the request for performance to a minimum andcontact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services assoon as possible.
When the fuel reserve warning light comeson fill up as soon as possible. A low fuel levelmay cause an irregular supply to the engine
with inevitable increase of the exhaust gas
temperature; this would result in serious
damage to the catalyst.
Never run the engine, even as a test, with
one or more spark plugs disconnected. Do
not warm the engine at idle speed before
moving off, unless the outside temperature
is very low and, in this case too, for no morethan 30 seconds.

WARNING
Do not install other heatguards and do not remove
the existing ones on the catalyst
and exhaust pipe.

Alfawiki.nl

198

WARNING
Do not spray anything on
the catalyst, lambda sensor and exhaust pipe.

WARNING
During normal service thecatalyst reaches high temperatures. Do not therefore park
the car over inflammable materials(grass, dry leaves, pine needles,etc.): fire hazard.

WARNING
The failure to follow theserules may cause a fire
hazard.

WARNINGS AND
SUGGESTIONS
For towing caravans or trailers the vehicle must be fitted with a certified tow hook
and an adequate electric system. Installation should be carried out by specialised personnel who release a special document forcirculation on the road.
Install any specific and/or additional rearview mirrors as specified by law. Rememberthat when towing a trailer, steep hills are
harder to climb, the braking spaces increase
and overtaking takes longer depending on
the overall weight.

To make sure the maximum towableweight is not exceeded (given in the logbook) account should be taken of the fully
laden trailer, including accessories and personal belongings.
Drive within the permitted speed limits forvehicles with trailers. In any case the maximum speed should never exceed 100 km/h.

WARNING
The ABS system withwhich the car may be fitted
does not control the trailer braking
system. Particular care is therefore
necessary on slippery surfaces.

INSTALLING THE TOW HOOK
The towing device should be fastened tothe body by specialised personnel according
to the following instructions and any additional and/or integrative information supplied by the Manufacturer of the device.
The towing device must meet current regulations with reference to 94/20/EC Directive and subsequent amendments.
For any version the towing device usedmust match the towable weight of the vehicle on which it is to be installed.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

TOWING TRAILERS

For the electric connection a unified connector should be used which is generally
placed on a special bracket normally fastened to the towing device.

Engage a low gear when driving downhill,rather than constantly using the brake.
The weight the trailer exerts on the vehicle tow hook reduces by the same amountthe actual vehicle loading capacity.

WARNING
Under no circumstances
should the vehicle brakesystem be altered to control the
trailer brake. The trailer braking
system must be fully independentof the vehicle’s hydraulic system.

Alfawiki.nl

199

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

For the electrical connection, a 7 pin
12VDC connection is to be used
(CUNA/UNI - 9128 Standard). Follow the
instructions provided by the car manufacturer and/or the tow hitch manufacturer.
An electric brake should be supplied directlyby the battery through a cable with a crosssection of no less than 2.5 mm2. In addition
to the electrical branches, the car’s electric
system can only be connected to the supply
cable for an electric brake and to the cablefor an internal light, though not above 15W.

INSTALLATION LAYOUT (fig. 1)
The tow hook structure must be fastenedin the points shown by the symbol Ø using 4 M8 screws and 7 M10 screws.
Inner plate (2) should be at least 6 mm
thick.

MAX. LOAD ON BALL 60 kg

Inner plate (3) should be at least 4 mm
thick.
Outer plate (4) should be at least 5 mm
thick.
The fastening points (1) must be fittedwith spacers with 25 mm diameter and 6
mm thickness.

Alfawiki.nl

200

WARNING It is compulsory to fasten alabel (clearly visible) of suitable size andmaterial at the height of the hook ball withthe wording:

WARNING
After assembly, the fastening screw holes should
be sealed to prevent the infiltration of exhaust gas.

Existing holes

Existing holes

Section A-A

Fully laden vehicle

Existing holes

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

A0B0143m

2 M10 screws

3 M10 screws
2 M10 screws

4 M8 screws
Regulation ball

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 1201

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

WINTER TYRES

It is therefore necessary to limit their use
to the purposes for which they are certified.

SNOW CHAINS

These tyres are specially designed for driving on snow and ice, to be fitted in placeof the existing tyres.

WARNING When snow tyres are usedwith a max. speed index below the one thatcan be reached by the car (increased by5%), place a notice in the passenger compartment, plainly in the driver’s view whichstates the max. permissible speed of thesnow tyres (as per EC Directive).

Use of snow chains should be in compliance with local regulations.

Use snow tyres of the same size as thenormal tyres provided with the car.
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services will beglad to provide advice concerning the mostsuitable type of tyre for the customer’s requirements.
For the type of tyre to be used, inflationpressures and the specifications of snow
tyres, follow the instructions given in chapter “Technical Specifications”.
The winter features of these tyres are reduced considerably when the tread depth
is below 4 mm. In this case, they should be
replaced. Due to the snow tyre features, under normal conditions of use or on long motorway journeys, the performance of thesetyres is lower than that of normal tyres.

All four tyres should be the same (brandand track) to ensure greater safety whendriving and braking and better driveability.
Remember that it is inappropriate tochange the direction of rotation of tyres.

– for tyres 185/65 R15” e 205/60
R15” use snow chains with reduced sizewith max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.
– for tyres 205/55 R16” use snow
chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.

Tyres 215/45 R17” cannot be fitted with snow
chains due to interferencewith front suspension support.
WARNING
The max. speed for snow
tyres with “Q” marking is
160 km/h, 190 km/h for tyres
with “T” marking and 210 km/h
for tyres with “H” marking. The
Road Traffic Code speed limits musthowever be always strictly observed.

Alfawiki.nl

202

Use snow chains with reduced size:

Snow chains should only be applied to thedriving wheels (front wheels).
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services should firstbe contacted before purchasing or using
snow chains.
Check the tension of the chains after the
first few metres have been driven.

Keep your speed
down when snow
chains are fitted.
Do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoid
potholes, steps and pavements andavoid also to drive for long distances on roads not covered withsnow to prevent damaging the car
and the roadbed.

VEHICLE INACTIVITY– Clean and protect the shiny metal parts
using special compounds readily available.

If the car is to be left inactive for long periods, the following precautions should be
noted:– Sprinkle talcum powder on the rubber
windscreen and rear window wiper blades
and lift them off the glass.

– House the vehicle under cover in a dry
and possibly ventilated place.

– Slightly open the windows.

– Engage a gear.
– Check that the handbrake is not engaged.

– Cover the car with a cloth or perforated
plastic sheet. Do not use sheets of non-perforated plastic as they do not allow moisture on the car body to evaporate.

– Clean and protect the painted parts using protective wax.

– Inflate the tyres to 0.5 bar above thenormal specified pressure and check it at intervals.

– Disconnect the negative terminal (–)
and check the battery charge. This check is
to be repeated every three months.
Recharge if the optical indicator shows adark colour without the central green area.

– If you don’t disconnect the battery fromthe electric system, check its charge every
month and recharge it if the optical indicator shows a dark colour without the central
green area.

WARNING Where applicable, switch off
the electronic car alarm with the remote control.

– Do not drain the engine cooling system.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

Snow chains cannot be
fitted to the spare wheel
so, if a front (drive) tyre ispunctured and chains must be fitted, the rear wheel should be fitted to the front of the vehicle (inflate the tyres to the specified
pressure as soon as possible) andthe spare tyre should be fitted to
the rear. A snow chain can then besafely fitted to the front wheel.

Alfawiki.nl

203

CORRECT USE OF THE CARREMOVING FROM STORAGE– Check the state of the drive belts.

Before using your vehicle after a long period of inactivity, the following operations
should first be carried out:

– Reconnect the battery negative terminal (–) after checking that the charge is adequate.

– Do not dust the outside of the vehicle.

– With the gear lever in neutral start theengine and allow the engine to run for a few
seconds whilst repeatedly working the clutch
pedal.

– Visually check that there are no leaks(oil, brake and clutch fluid, engine coolant,etc.).

– Check the air cleaner and replace if necessary.
– Check tyre pressure and ensure that they
are not damaged, cracked or cut. If they are
they must be replaced.

In addition to the legal requirements, werecommend keeping the following in the car(fig. 1):– first aid kit with non-alcoholic base disinfectant, steril gauzes, a roll of gauze, plasters, etc.;– torch;– Replace engine oil and filter.
– Check:- brake-clutch fluid level- level of engine coolant fluid.

USEFUL ACCESSORIESWARNING
This operation must be performed in the open. The
exhaust gases contain carbon
monoxide which is extremely toxic
and may also be lethal.

– round-ended scissors;– work gloves.

A0B0389m

Alfawiki.nl

204

fig. 1

EMERGENCY
STARTING
If the Alfa Romeo CODE system is not able
to deactivate the engine inhibitor, warning
lights Y and U remain lit and the engine
cannot be started. To start the engine it isnecessary to follow the emergency starting
procedure.
WARNING You are advised to carefully read the entire procedure before carrying it out.

3) Fully depress the accelerator pedal andkeep it pressed. The warning light U will
come on for eight seconds approximately
and will then go out; now release the accelerator pedal.
4) The warning light U begins to flash:after it has flashed for the same number oftimes as the first digit on the code of thecard, press completely and hold down theaccelerator pedal until the warning light U
comes on (for 4 seconds) and then goes out
again; now release the accelerator pedal.

If a mistake is made during the emergency
procedure, the ignition key should be turned
to STOP and the operations must be repeated from the start (point 1).

5) The warning light U will begin toflash: after it has flashed for the same number of times as the second digit on the codeof the card, press completely and hold down
the accelerator pedal.

1) Read the 5-figure electronic code on
the CODE card.

6) Repeat this procedure in the same way
for the other digits on the CODE card code.

2) Turn the ignition key to the MAR position.

7) After entering the last figure, keep theaccelerator pedal pressed. The warning light
U turns on (for four seconds) and then goes
off; now release the accelerator pedal.

8) A quick flash of the warning light U(for appr. 4 seconds) confirms that the operation has taken place correctly.
9) Start the car turning the ignition key
from the MAR position to the AVV position without returning the key to the STOP
position.

IN AN EMERGENCY

IN AN EMERGENCY

Conversely, if the warning light U stays
on, turn the ignition key to STOP and repeat the procedure starting from point 1.
WARNING After emergency starting it
is advisable to turn to an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service, because the procedure described must be repeated each time the engine is started.

Alfawiki.nl

205

IN AN EMERGENCY

STARTING WITH AN
AUXILIARY BATTERY
If the battery is flat (for battery with optical hydrometer: dark in colour with nogreen area in the centre), the engine can bestarted using another battery of the sameor a little higher capacity than the flat one.
This is what you should do fig. 1:
1) Remove the protecting cover on thebattery positive pole by pressing the relatedside wings (front side), then connect thepositive terminals (plus sign + next to theterminal) of the two batteries with a special
cable.

WARNING Do not directly connect thenegative terminals of the two batteries: any
sparks may set fire to the gas that may bereleased from the battery. If the auxiliary battery in installed on another car, no metal partshall accidentally come into contact with thiscar and the one with the flat battery.
3) Start the engine.
4) When the engine is running remove thecables in reverse order.
If after a few attempts the engine does notstart, do not insist but contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.

2) Connect a second cable to the negative
terminal (–) of the auxiliary battery withan earth point E on the engine or the gearbox of the car to be started.

A0B0181m

Never use a quick battery
charger to start the engine
in an emergency as this
could damage the electronic systems of your vehicle, particularly
the control units which manage thestarting and supply functions.

Alfawiki.nl

206 fig. 1

WARNING
This starting proceduremust be carried out by
qualified personnel as incorrect operations may provoke electricaldischarge of great intensity. The
liquid contained in the battery is
toxic and corrosive. Avoid contact
with skin and eyes. Keep naked
flame and lighted cigarettes awayfrom the battery. Do not cause
sparks.

The battery terminal connecting and disconnecting
operations generate current that may cause problems to
the car’s electronic systems. Therefore, this operation should be carried out by skilled personnel.

Never push, tow or coast
start the vehicle. This could
cause fuel to flow into thecatalyst damaging it irreversibly.

IN THE EVENT OF A
PUNCTURE
WARNING If the car is equipped with
“Fix&Go kit for tyre quick repair”, see theinstructions contained in the following
chapter.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Wheel changing and correct use of the jackand compact spare wheel call for some precautions as mentioned below.

WARNING
Remember that the engine
brake and power steering
are not operational until the engine
is started, therefore, much greater
effort than usual is needed on thebrake pedal and steering wheel.

WARNING
Signal the presence of thestationary vehicle according to the current regulations: hazard warning lights, reflecting triangle, etc.
Any passengers should leave the
car and wait for the wheel to bechanged out of harm of the traffic.
If parked on a slope or uneven roadsurfaces, place wedges or othersuitable devices under the wheels
to prevent the car from rolling.
Never start the engine when the
car is raised on the jack.
When towing a trailer, always
remove the trailer before lifting
the car.

IN AN EMERGENCY

STARTING BY INERTIA

Alfawiki.nl

207

IN AN EMERGENCYWARNING
The spare wheel (for versions/markets where required) is specific to your model ofcar; do not use it on other models,or use the spare wheel of othermodels on your car.
Should the type of wheels used bechanged (alloy rims instead ofsteel), it is also necessary to replace the complete kit of fastening
bolts with others of suitable size.
The compact spare wheel should
only be used in an emergency andeven then its use should be kept toa minimum. Do not drive at speedsof over 80 km/h.

WARNINGOn the compact spare
wheel there a sticker withthe main warnings regarding thecompact spare wheel use and limitations. The sticker shall never be
removed or covered. The sticker
bears the following instructions infour languages:
ATTENTION! ONLY FOR TEMPORARY USE! 80 km/h MAX! REPLACE IT AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
WITH A STANDARD WHEEL. DO
NOT COVER THIS INDICATION.
No wheel cap shall be placed on
the compact spare wheel.
The car will handle differently
when the spare wheel is fitted.
Avoid sudden acceleration or braking, sharp corners and fast bends.

Alfawiki.nl

208

WARNINGThe life of the spare wheel
is approx. 3,000 km. After
this distance it should be replacedwith another of the same type.
Never attempt to fit a traditional tyre to a rim designed for use ascompact spare wheel. Have thepunctured wheel repaired and replaced as soon as possible.
Two or more compact spare
wheels should never be used together.
Do not grease the threads of thebolts before installing them; theymight slip out.
The jack only serves for changing wheels on the car with which itis provided or on cars of the samemodel. It must not be used for other purposes such as for instanceraising cars of other models. In nocase should it be used for repairs
under the vehicle.
The vehicle may fall if the jack is
not positioned correctly.
Do not use the jack for higher capacities than stated on its label.

CHANGING A WHEEL(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)– Stop the engine and engage the handbrake.
– Engage first gear or reverse.
– Lift the boot carpet and hook it as shownin (fig. 1a).

You are informed that:– The jack mass is 2,100 kg.

– Loosen the clamping device (handle)(A-fig. 2).

– The jack requires no adjustment.
– The jack cannot be repaired, in the eventof breakage it must be replaced by another original one.

IN AN EMERGENCYWARNING
Snow chains cannot be fitted to the compact spare
wheel, so, if a front wheel is punctured and chains need to be used,
the front axle should be fitted withnormal wheels and the spare
wheel fitted to the rear. In thisway, as two normal tyres are fitted to the front of the vehicle,
snow chains can be mounted,
thereby overcoming an emergency.
Absolutely never tamper with the
inflation valve.
Do not insert tools of any kind between the rim and the tyre.
Routinely check that the pressureof the tyres and of the compact
spare wheel is as specified in the“Technical specifications” chapter.

A0B0234m– No tools other than its operating crank
can be fitted to the jack.
To change the wheel proceed as follows:– Stop the car in such a position that it is
not dangerous for the traffic, where it is possible to change the wheel safely. Where possible, park on a level, compact surface.

A0B0577m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 1afig. 2209

IN AN EMERGENCY– Take out the tool container (B) and takeit near the wheel to be changed.

– Place the jack under the car near thewheel to be changed.

– Take the spare wheel (C).

– Work the jack crank (A-fig. 5)to extend it until the groove (B-fig. 6) on theupper part of the jack is correctly inserted
on the lower profile of the body (C-fig. 6)
at about 40 cm from the profile of thewheelhouse.

– Remove the wheel cap (A-fig. 3) (forversions wuth steel rims only).
– Loosen the fastening bolts by approx.
one turn (B-fig. 4).

– Install the spare wheel by matching oneof the holes (A-fig. 7) with the corresponding pin (B-fig. 7).
– Tighten the five fastening bolts.
– Lower the car and remove the jack.

– Work the jack and raise the car until thewheel is a few centimetres from the ground.
A0B0229m

A0B0232m– Completely unscrew the bolts (Bfig. 4), and remove the wheel.
– Make sure that the contact surfaces of
the compact spare wheel with the hub areclean and free of impurities which may latter cause the fastening bolts to slacken.

fig. 3

fig. 6
A0B0230m

A0B0231m

A0B0226m

Alfawiki.nl

210 fig. 4

fig. 5

fig. 7

REFITTING A NORMAL WHEEL– Following the procedure described previously, raise the car and remove the spare
wheel.
For versions with steel rims:– Fit a normal wheel bearing in mind thatthe pin (B-fig.7) must match one of theholes (A-fig.7).
– Make sure that the contact surfaces of
the compact spare wheel with the hub areclean and free of impurities which may latter cause the fastening bolts to slacken.

– Screw the fastening bolts.

After refitting the wheel:– Tighten the bolts following the order previously described for the compact spare
wheel fig. 7.

– stow the spare wheel in the space provided in the luggage compartment;– Place the cap near the wheel so that the
inflating valve can come out through thecountersunk hole. Press the wheel circumference starting from the area next to thevalve countersunk hole until it is completely inserted.
For cars with alloy rims:– insert the jack in its container forcing it
lightly to prevent it from vibrating during
travelling;– place the tools used in the housings provided on the support;

IN AN EMERGENCY– Fully tighten the bolts in the sequence
shown in fig. 8, without refitting the cap.

– place the tool container on the spare
wheel and secure everything with the clamping device (A-fig. 2).

– Tighten the pin (A-fig. 9) in one of
the fastening bolt holes.
– Fit the wheel on the pin and fasten itwith four bolts.
– Remove the centering pin (A-fig. 9)
and tighten the last bolt.

A0B0227m– Lower the car and remove the jack; thentighten the bolts as described previously forthe spare wheel (fig. 7).

A0B0228m

WARNING Incorrect fitting might cause
the wheel cap to come off when the car ison the move.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 8

fig. 9211

IN AN EMERGENCY

FIX&GO KITFOR QUICK TYREREPAIRING

The quick repairing kit is placed in the bootinside the appropriate container A-fig. 10.
• a tool A to remove the valve body;• a small cylinder C containing sealer andfitted with a filling pipe, and a sticker bearing the notice “max 80 km/h”, to beplaced in a position visible to the driver (onthe instrument panel) after fixing the tyre;• a compressor B with pressure gauge andfittings;• a “spout” D to be connected to the filling pipe.

The quick repairing kit includes fig. 11:(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
The car can be equipped (for versions/markets where applicable) with a tyre quick
repairing kit called FIX&GO, replacing thetools and the compact spare wheel usuallyprovided with the car.

A0B0390m

A0B0332m

Alfawiki.nl

212 fig. 10

fig. 11

In fig. 12 it is possible to identify:
A tyre area which can be fixed (holes orcracks with diameter of max 4 mm);
B areas which CANNOT be fixed.

A0B0333m

WARNING
It is not possible to fix
cracks on the tyre sides
and permanent sealing of cracks on
the tread within 25 mm from thetyre side is not guaranteed.

WARNING
Do not use the quick repairing kit if the tyre isdamaged due to driving with thewheel flattened. That it is why it
is necessary to check accurately thetyre sides.

WARNING
In case of damages to thewheel rim (the deformation
is such that there is an air leakage)or the tyre outside the limit areas
previously indicated, fixing is notpossible. Do not remove foreign
bodies (screws or nails) which havepenetrated the tyre.

IN AN EMERGENCYWARNING In the event of a puncturecaused by foreign bodies, it is possible to fix
tyres having cracks with maximum diameter up to 4 mm.

WARNING
Warning! The small cylinder contains propylene glycol; this substance is toxic: do not
swallow it; avoid contact with theeyes, the skin and the clothes. In
case of contact, rinse with abundant water. If any allergy reaction
should take place call a medical
doctor. Keep the small cylinder in
the appropriate compartmentaway from heat and children.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 12213

IN AN EMERGENCYIT IS NECESSARY TO KNOWTHAT:WARNING
Do not operate the compressor for more than 20
minutes. Risk of overheating.

The sealer included in the quick repairing
kit, good for temperatures between –30°C
e +80°C, is not adequate for permanent
fixing.
The liquid inside the tyre can be easily removed with water.
The sealer has no expire date.

INFLATING PROCEDURE
1) Place the wheel in the position illustrated in the figure (A-fig. 13) for the operation with the valve, then engage thehandbrake.
2) Screw the filling pipe (B-fig. 14) tothe bottle (C).
3) Unscrew the tyre valve plug, remove
the element inside the valve by using theappropriate tool (D-fig. 15); be careful
not to place it on the sand or on a dirty surface .
4) Introduce the filling pipe (B-fig. 16)
in the tyre valve, keep the bottle (C-fig.
16) with the pipe directed downwards, thenpress it so that the whole sealer can get into the tyre.

5) Screw again the element inside thevalve with the tool (D-fig. 17).
6) Use the appropriate lever (E-fig. 18)
to insert and clamp the air compressor pipe(F) to the tyre valve.
7) Start the engine, insert the plug (Gfig. 19) in the lighter (or socket 12V) andinflate the tyre according to the right pressure value (see “Cold inflation pressures” inthe “Technical specification” chapter). You
are advised to check the tyre pressure value on the pressure gauge (H-fig. 18) withthe compressor off, in order to have a moreaccurate reading.

A0B0334m

A0B335m

Alfawiki.nl

214

fig. 13

fig. 14

If, in spite of the last operation, the prescribed pressure is not achieved, do not
move the vehicle and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
Once the correct tyre pressure has beenreached, start driving immediately so thatthe sealer is distributed evenly inside thetyre.

WARNING
Place the sticker in a position where it can be clearly seen by the driver as a noticethat the tyre has been treated with
the quick repairing kit. Drive carefully especially in a bend. Do not
overcome 80 km/h. Avoid sudden
acceleration or braking.

WARNING
If the pressure is below
1,3 bars, do not drive any
further; FIX & GO cannot guarantee proper hold because the tyre is
too much damaged. Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
Conversely, if at least 1,3 bars aredetected, restore the correct pressure (with the engine running andthe handbrake engaged) and startdriving the car with great care.

IN AN EMERGENCY

If it is not possible to reach the prescribedpressure, move the car forwards or backwards for about 10 metres, so that the sealer is distributed inside the tyre, then repeat
inflation.

After about 10 minutes, stop and checkthe tyre pressure once again; remember toengage the handbrake.

A0B0336m

A0B0337m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 15

fig. 16215

IN AN EMERGENCYWARNINGIf, during the pressure
restoring operation, it is
not possible to reach at least 1,8
bars, do not drive any further because the tyre is too much damaged and the quick repairing kit
cannot guarantee proper hold. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

WARNING
Tyres fixed with the quick
repairing kit must be used
only temporarily.

A0B0338m

Drive carefully to the nearest Alfa Romeo
Authorized Service to check the tyre conditions, then have it fixed or replaced.
It is absolutely necessary to communicatethat the tyre has been fixed with the quick
repairing kit.

A0B0339m

A0B0391m

Alfawiki.nl

216 fig. 17

fig. 18

fig. 19WARNING
Alterations or repairs to
the electric system not carried out correctly and without taking into account the specificationsof the system may cause malfunctioning and the risk of fire.

WARNING
Where possible the bulbs
should be replaced by Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services. The
correct operation and positioningof the external lights are vital to
the safety of the vehicle and its
passengers and the subject of specific laws.

WARNING
Halogen bulbs must be
handled touching only themetallic part. If the transparent
bulb is touched with the fingers its
lighting intensity is reduced and thelife of the bulb may be compromised. If touched accidentally, rub
the bulb with a cloth moistenedwith methylated spirits and allow
to dry.

WARNING
Possible replacement of alight on vehicles equippedwith Xeno lamps must be carriedout by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

IN AN EMERGENCY

WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULBWARNING
Halogen bulbs containpressurised gas, in the caseof breakage they may burst.

Alfawiki.nl217

IN AN EMERGENCY

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONSTYPES OF BULBS (fig. 20)– When a light is not working check thecorresponding fuse is intact before replacing
the bulb.

Various types of bulbs are fitted to your vehicle:– For the location of fuses, refer to theparagraph “In the event of a burnt fuse”
in this chapter.

A.

All glass bulbs
They are pressure-fitted. Pull to remove.

B.

Bayonet type bulbs
Press the bulb, turn counter-clockwise
to remove this type of bulb from its
holder.

C.

Tubular bulbs
Free them from their contacts to remove.

– Before changing a bulb check the contacts for oxidation.
– Burnt bulbs must be replaced with others of the same type and power.
– Always check the height of the headlightbeam after changing a bulb to ensure they
are safe.

D.

A0B0233m

Alfawiki.nl

218

Halogen bulbs
To remove free it from the clip on its
seating.

fig. 20

FIGURE 20

TYPE

POWER

High beam

D

H1

55W

Low beam

D

H7

55W

Front sidelight

B

H6W

6W

Foglight (where required)

D

H1

55W

Front direction indicator

B

PY21W

21W

Side direction indicator

A

W5W

5W

Rear direction indicator

B

P21W

21W

Stop/side lightB

P21/5W

21W/5W

Additional stop light

B

3.2W

3.2

Reversing light

A

P21W

21W

Rear fog guard

B

P21W

21W

Number plate light

B

W5W

5W

Front roof light

A

C10W

10W

Boot light

C

C10W

10W

Rear roof light

C

C5W

5W

Courtesy light (where required)

C

C5W

5W

Glovebox light

C

C5W

5W

IN AN EMERGENCY

BULBS

Alfawiki.nl219

IN AN EMERGENCYIF ONE OF THE
EXTERNAL LIGHTS
GOES OUTWARNING
Alterations or repairs to
the electric system not carried out correctly and without taking into account the specificationsof the system may cause malfunctioning and the risk of fire.

FRONT LIGHT UNITS
The front light units contain the direction
indicators, side lights/dipped and main
beam light bulbs.

When the bulbs havebeen replaced refit the cover in the correct position
turning clockwise and ensuring thatit clicks into place.

To replace these bulbs the cover must be
removed turning counter-clockwise.
The bulbs are arranged inside the lightunits as follows (fig. 21):
A. Direction indicators

Fig. 22: Dipped beam headlights with
Xeno lamp

B. Dipped beam headlights

A. Sidelight/main beam headlights

C. Sidelight/main beam headlights.

B. Dipped beam headlights/sidelight.

WARNING For the type and power ofthe light refer to what described in the previous chapter “If one of the lights needs tobe replaced”.
A0B0224m

A0B0392m

Alfawiki.nl

220

fig. 21

fig. 22

Xenon lights have a very long life, therefore breakdowns are unlikely.

WARNINGIf necessary, have the system checked and repaired
only by Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.

WARNINGAny operation regarding
the front light units must
be carried out with the lights
turned off and the ignition key removed from the ignition switch:risk of electric discharges.

– Rotate the connector (B-fig. 24) of
the Xenon lamp by a quarter of a turncounter-clockwise, as indicated in fig. 25,
and remove it.

Dipped-beam headlamps

IN AN EMERGENCYREPLACEMENT OF XENONLIGHTS (optional for versions/markets where applicable)

A0B0349m

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:– Unscrew the three locking screw (Bfig. 23) and remove the protective (A)cover.

Hereafter you find the description of thecorrect procedure to replace a Xenon light.

fig. 24
A0B0348m

A0B0351m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 23

fig. 25221

IN AN EMERGENCY

The Xenon lamp must be
handled touching only themetallic part. If the transparent bulb is touched with the fingers, rub it with a clean clothmoistened with methylated spirits and allow to dry before refitting the bulb.

– Turn ring (A-fig. 26) counter-clockwise and remove it.
– Remove the Xenon lamp (B-fig. 26).
– Fit the new bulb by placing it so that thenotch matches the groove on its housing.
– Refit the protective cover correctly(A-fig. 23).

Main beam headlamps
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:– Turn the protective cover counter-clockwise (C-fig. 23) in order to reach the highbeam headlight bulb (A-fig. 24).
– Remove connector (A-fig. 27) and remove the bulb operating the clips (B) as
shown in the figure.
– Fit the new bulb.
– Refit the protective cover correctly (Cfig. 23).

WARNING Once the operation has been
completed, turn dipped beam headlamps on
and check that the headlight parabola
moves when positioning the light itself. If
not, re-engage the lamp.

A0B0352m

A0B0350m

A0B0354m

Alfawiki.nl

222 fig. 26

fig. 27

fig. 28

Sidelights

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:– Turn the cover counter-clockwise(A-fig. 29).

– Turn the protective cover (C-fig. 23)
counter-clockwise in order to reach the sidelight bulb.

– Turn the bulb holder (B) counter-clockwise.
– Remove the bulb from the bulb holder,pushing lightly and turning counter-clockwise.
– Replace the bulb and refit the bulb holder in its housing.

– Remove the bulb (A-fig. 28) from thebulb holder (B), pushing lightly and turning
counter-clockwise.
– Replace the bulb and refit the bulb holder (B-fig. 28) in its housing.

FRONT DIRECTION
INDICATORSTo replace the bulb (orange colour), proceed as follows:– Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise(A-fig. 30) and remove it.
– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 31) from thebulb holder (A-fig. 31), pushing lightly
and turning counter-clockwise.

IN AN EMERGENCY

Direction indicators– Replace the bulb (B-fig. 31).

– Refit the protective cover correctly(C-fig. 23).

A0B0353m

A0B0225m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 29

fig. 30223

IN AN EMERGENCY– Refit the bulb holder (A-fig. 31) bymaking its notches coincide with the grooves
in the headlight unit body and turn it clockwise.

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:– Fit the new bulb making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooves in theheadlamp parabola and hook the bulb catch(B).

– Remove the protective cover– Reconnect the electrical connector (A).

– Disconnect the electrical connector (A).

– Refit the protective cover correctly.

DIPPED-BEAM HEADLAMPS(fig. 32)

– Release the bulb catch (B).
– Withdraw the bulb and replace it.

A0B0221m

A0B0222m

Alfawiki.nl

224 fig. 31

fig. 32

To replace the bulb proceed under the car
as follows:– Disconnect the connector (A-fig. 33)
from the light unit.
– Turn the cover counter-clockwise (Bfig. 33) and remove it.

– Fit a new bulb making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooves in
the lamp lens and hook the bulb stopper(D-fig. 34).

To adjust the front foglights contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.

– Re-connect the supply cable terminal(C-fig. 34).
– refit the cover (B-fig. 33) and connect the connector (A-fig. 33) to the lightunit.

– Withdraw the supply cable terminal(C-fig. 34).

IN AN EMERGENCYFRONT FOG LIGHTS(where required)

WARNINGThe efficiency of the lights
will be decreased and may
inconvenience other road users if thelight units are not correctly adjusted. If in doubt contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services to have themchecked and adjusted if necessary.

– Release the bulb stopper (D-fig. 34)
and remove the bulb.

A0B0215m

A0B0216m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 33

fig. 34225

IN AN EMERGENCYFRONT SIDELIGHTS
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:

MAIN-BEAM HEADLAMPS(fig. 37)

– Remove the protective cover (Afig. 35).

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:– Remove the bulb holder (B-fig. 35)
which is snap-fitted.

– Release the clip holding the bulb (A).

– Remove the bulb (C-fig. 36) from thebulb holder, pushing lightly and turning
counter-clockwise.
– Replace the bulb and refit the bulb holder (B-fig. 36) in its housing.

– Remove the protective cover.

– Fit the new bulb making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooves in theheadlamp parabola.
– Lock the bulb in place with the clip (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.

– Withdraw the power supply (B) cableconnector.
– Remove and (C) replace the bulb.
– Reconnect the power cable (B) to thebulb.

– Refit the protective cover correctly(A-fig. 35).

A0B0217m

A0B0218m

A0B0223m

Alfawiki.nl

226 fig. 35

fig. 36

fig. 37

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:– Push the transparent cover towards therear of the car to compress the tab (Afig. 38). Release the front part and remove the unit.
– Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise(B-fig. 39) and remove it from the transparent cover (D-fig. 39).

– Withdraw the bulb (C-fig. 39) which
is of the pressure-fitted type and replace it.
– Insert the bulb holder (B-fig. 39) inthe transparent cover (D-fig. 39) and position the unit ensuring that the clip clicks into place (A-fig. 38).

REAR LIGHT UNITS
Rear light units contain the reversing lights,
rear fog guards, direction indicators, number plate lights, stop/side lights and the additional stop light (3rd stop).
REVERSING LIGHTS AND REAR
FOG GUARDS

Take care not to damage
the bodywork or the transparent cover when removing the side direction indicator unit.

A0B0219m

IN AN EMERGENCY

SIDE DIRECTION INDICATORSTo replace the bulbs proceed as follows:– Open the boot.
– Slacken the screws (A or B-fig. 40)
fastening the boot trim in correspondencewith the light concerned.

A0B0220m

A0B0211m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 38

fig. 39

fig. 40227

IN AN EMERGENCY– Lower the boot lid trim in the corresponding area and remove the bulb holder
unit (C-fig. 41) releasing the retainer tab(B-fig. 41).
– Remove and replace the spherical typebulb with bayonet attachment pushingit gently and turning counter-clockwise(fig. 42):

– Refit the bulb holder unit fastening it correctly in place with the retainer tabs (Bfig. 41).
– Refit the boot trim fastening it with thescrews removed previously.

DIRECTION INDICATORS/SIDELIGHTS AND STOP LIGHTS
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:– Open the boot.
– Slacken the two fastening screws(A-fig. 43) and remove the protective cover (B-fig. 43).

(D) reversing light bulb

– Withdraw the bulb holder unit (Afig. 44) releasing the retainer tabs (Bfig. 44).

(E) rear fog guard bulb.

A0B0212m

A0B0213m

A0B0214m

Alfawiki.nl

228 fig. 41

fig. 42

fig. 43

(C) side light/stop light bulb(D) direction indicator bulb.

NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:– Remove the number plate light unit using a flat screwdriver protected by a soft
cloth on the stopper (A-fig. 46).

– Refit the bulb holder (C-fig. 47) turning gently.
– Refit the complete unit (B-fig. 46)
firstly inserting the catches and then pressing in correspondence with the stopper(A-fig. 46).

– Remove the unit (B-fig. 46).

– Refit the bulb holder unit fastening it
correctly in place with the retainer tabs (Bfig. 44).

– remove the bulb holder (C-fig. 47)
turning lightly and replace the bulb (Dfig. 47) which is pressure-fitted.

– Refit the protective cover (B-fig. 43)
fastening with nuts (A-fig. 43).

IN AN EMERGENCY– Remove and replace the bulb concerned(spherical with bayonet coupling) pushingit gently and turning counter-clockwise(fig. 45).

A0B0209m

fig. 46
A0B0207m

A0B0208m

A0B0210m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 44

fig. 45

fig. 47

229

IN AN EMERGENCY

ADDITIONAL STOP LIGHT(3rd STOP)– Refit the transparent cover and install theunit locking it with the knob (B-fig. 49).

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:– Re-position the trim correctly and fasten
with its buttons (A-fig. 48).

– Open the boot.
– Turn the fastening buttons (A-fig. 48)
until they release and lower the trim.

IF ONE OF THE
INTERNAL LIGHTS
GOES OUTFRONT ROOF LIGHT
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:– Slacken the knob (B-fig. 49)and withdraw the complete unit.
– Slacken the screws (C-fig. 50).

A0B0204m– Remove the roof light (A-fig. 52) levering in the points shown by the arrows.
– Open the cover (B-fig. 53).

– Remove the transparent cover (Dfig. 51) and replace the bulb concerned.

– Replace the bulb concerned (Cfig. 53) by pulling it outwards and freeing
it from the lateral contacts ensuring that the
new bulb is correctly fitted between the contacts.

fig. 49
A0B0192m

A0B0205m

A0B0206m

Alfawiki.nl

230 fig. 48

fig. 50

fig. 51

When
refittingtherooflight ensure that theelectrical wiring is correctly arranged and does not interferewith the edges of the light or retaining clips.
A0B0578m

REAR ROOFLIGHT BULBS(except versions with sunroof)

CENTRE REAR ROOF LAMP
(only versions with sunroof)

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

To remove the bulb proceed as follows:– Remove the rooflight (A-fig. 54) levering in the point shown by the arrow.

– Remove the roof light (A-fig. 56) levering in the point shown by the arrow.

– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 55) pullingoutwards and releasing it from the side contacts.

– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 57) pulling
it outwards and releasing it from the side
contacts.

– Fit the new bulb making sure that it ispositioned correctly and locked between thecontacts.

– Fit the new bulb making sure that it ispositioned correctly and locked between thecontacts.

– Refit the light firstly inserting the sidewith the connector and then pressing on theother side until the catch clocks into place.

– Refit the roof light firstly inserting theside (C-fig. 57) and then pressing on theother side until the catch clicks into place.

IN AN EMERGENCY

To refit the rooflight reverse the procedure
followed for removal.

fig. 52
A0B0201m

A0B0202m

A0B0203m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 53

fig. 54

fig. 55

231

IN AN EMERGENCY

COURTESY LIGHTS(where required)
To remove the bulb proceed as follows:– Remove the roof light (A-fig. 58) levering in the point shown by the arrow.

– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 59) pulling
it outwards and releasing it from the side
contacts.
– Fit the new bulb making sure that it ispositioned correctly and locked between thecontacts.

GLOVEBOX LIGHT
To remove the bulb proceed as follows:– Remove the light pushing with a screwdriver on the tab (A-fig. 60).
– Remove the cover (B-fig. 61).

– Refit the roof light, inserting it in the correct position firstly on one side and thenpressing on the other until the tab clicks.
A0B0196m

A0B0199m

fig. 56

fig. 59
A0B0197m

A0B0198m

A0B0195m

Alfawiki.nl

232 fig. 57

fig. 58

fig. 60

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
LIGHT– Refit the cover (B-fig. 61).

To remove the bulb proceed as follows:– Re-install the light inserting it in the correct position firstly on one side and thenpushing on the other until the tab clicks.

– Open the boot.
– Turn the fastening buttons (A-fig. 63)
until they click and lower the trim.

– Replace the bulb (B-fig. 65)of thecylindrical type pulling it outwards ensuringthat the new bulb is correctly positioned between the contacts.
– Refit the transparent cover ensuring thatthe retaining tabs click into place (Cfig. 65).

– Withdraw the clear plastic cover andbulb (A-fig. 64) using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
A0B0194m

IN AN EMERGENCY– Change the bulb (C-fig. 62) which
is pressure-fitted.

A0B0191m

fig. 61

fig. 64
A0B0193m

A0B0192m

A0B0190m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 62

fig. 63

fig. 65233

IN AN EMERGENCY

IN THE EVENT OF A BURNT FUSE
GENERALITIES(A) - Intact fuse

The fuse is (fig. 66) a protective elementof the electrical system: basically it operates(i.e. it gets disconnected) in case of breakdown or wrong operation on the system.

(B) - Fuse with broken filament.

When an electrical devices ceases to function, make sure it has not fused. The filament must not be broken: if so, replace theburnt fuse with another of the same value(same colour).

A0B0189m

Extract the fuse to be replaced using thepincers (C)situated on the fuse box.

Never replace a broken
fuse with anything otherthan a new fuse. Use always an intact fuse of the same
colour.

WARNING
Never replace a fuse withanother with a higher amp
rating, DANGER OF FIRE!

Alfawiki.nl

234 fig. 66

WARNING
If a main protective fuse
(MAXI-FUSE o MEGA-FUSE)
intervenes, do not fix it but contact
an Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

WARNING
Before replacing a fusecheck that the key has
been removed from the ignition
and that all the services are
switched off and/or disengaged.

WARNING
If a fuse blows again contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

FUSE AND RELAYS IN THE
MAIN FUSEBOX (fig. 69)

A. Dipped beam light relay.

The fuses for the main devices are housed
in a control unit under the dashboard, to theleft of the steering column.
To gain access to them, remove the panel (A) releasing the tabs (B) in the direction of the arrow below and remove thescrew (C).

A0B0188m

A0B0172m

B. Relay for sunroof , seat heater, rearwindow power control, seat electric adjustment.
The symbols that identify the main electriccomponent protected by each fuse, areshown on the label (fig. 70) on the inner side of the panel (A-fig. 69).

IN AN EMERGENCY

The general protection fuses of Alfa
156 are in the engine compartment, inside a container near the battery positive terminal; to gain access to the fuses lift the twolids (fig. 67 and fig. 68).

Some spare fuses are housed at the rightof the control unit (D-fig. 69); you are advised to replenish the stock of spare fuses
when they are used.

fig. 67
A0B0579m

A0B0185m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 68

fig. 69

fig. 70

235

IN AN EMERGENCYFUSES ABOVE THE MAINFUSEBOX (fig. 71)

To gain access to the fuses remove (Afig. 72) the pressure-fitted lid.

FUSES AND RELAYS IN ENGINEBAY

The protection fuses of certain devices aregrouped together on three containers located above the main fusebox to which accessis gained removing the panel (A-fig. 69).

Access to the relays is gained by removing
the glovebox: contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

In the engine compartment, housed on abracket in front of the battery and protected by a special cover, there is a variable
number of fuses and relays depending on
the versions.

FUSES AND RELAYS ACCESSIBLE
FROM THE GLOVEBOXB. Headlamp washer timer (where required).

A. Fog light relay (where required).

Some fuses and relays for services supplied
on request or only for certain specific market versions are located on a bracket behind
the glovebox.

A0B0184m

WARNING The arrangement of the fuses and relays may vary depending on theversions and markets. In the event of a suspected anomaly, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

A0B0141m

A0B0154m

Alfawiki.nl

236 fig. 71

fig. 72

fig. 73

For JTD 20v Multijet version refer tofig. 75

A. Engine radiator cooling fan 2nd speed
relay (T.SPARK versions).

For Diesel versions, depending on the options installed, there is a second bracket fastened to the engine compartment rear bulkhead for the following fuses (fig. 76):
A. MAXI-FUSE 30A: additional passenger
compartment heater 2nd level relay.

B. Engine radiator cooling fan 1st speed relay.

B. MAXI-FUSE 30A: additional passenger
compartment heater 1st level relay.

C. Fuel pump relay
D. Electronic injection relay
A0B0618m

E. Climate control compressor relay

IN AN EMERGENCY

Remove the cover (A-fig. 73) togain access to the following relays/fuses(fig. 74):WARNING Strictly observe the specified
fuse ampere value: in case of doubt, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

F. Timing variator relay (1.6 T.SPARK only) or engine radiator fan 2nd speed relay(only 2.5 V6 24V, JTD and JTD 16V Multijet versions).
G. Fuel oil heater relay (only Diesel versions).

A0B0183m

A0B0619m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 74

fig. 75

fig. 76237

IN AN EMERGENCYFUSE SUMMARY TABLE
LIGHTSFIGUREAMPERESFUSE

Left front side light

7

10A

69

Right front side light

6

10A

69

Left rear side light

6

10A

69

Right rear side light

7

10A

69

Left dipped-beam headlamp/Xenon lamps (optional)

8

20A

69

Right dipped-beam headlamp/Xenon lamps (optional)

4

20A

69

Left main-beam headlamp

2

10A

69

Right main-beam headlamp

1

10A

69

Cruise Control (optional)

13

10A

69

Left number plate light

7

10A

69

Right number plate light

6

10A

69

Reversing lights/Sound system

13

10A

69

Left rear fog guard

7

10A

69

Right rear fog guard

6

10A

69

Direction indicators - Hazard warning lights

14

10A

69

Fog lamps

16

15A

71

Car interior and glovebox lights

12-13

10A

69

Alfawiki.nl
9

25A

71

HI-FI BOSE system

238

FUSE

AMPERESFIGURE

Windscreen wiper, windscreen washer/Rearscreen wiper/Rain sensor (optional)

10

20A

69

Horns

11

20A

69

GSM Box for Connect/Navigator-electronic warning system

13

10A

69

Front power windows

5

30A

69

Left rear power window

4

20A

71

Right rear power window

5

20A

71

Door locking system - Boot light

3

20A

69

Boot electric opening

7

30A

71

Rearscreen heating

15

30A

69

Wing mirror adjustment

13

10A

69

Wing mirror defrosting

15

30A

69

Cigar lighter/Odour sensor

9

15A

69

Headlamp washer

1

20A

72

Headlamp aiming device

4

10A

69

Instrument cluster

12

10A

69

Main-beam headlamp warning light

2

10A

69

Rearscreen heating warning light

15

30A

69

Sound system/Diagnosis socket

12

10A

69

Electronic alarm system

12

10A

69

20A

71

Supplementary electrical socket in the boot (Sportwagon versions)10
Alfawiki.nl

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICES

239

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICES

FUSE

AMPERESFIGURE

Remote control

13

10A

69

Controls lighting/Stop lights

3

10A

71

Rear control lighting from sidelights

6

10A

71

Seat heating/Sunroof/Seat electrical adjustment

8

30A

71

Air bag system

2 (*)

10A (*)

71

ABS system911 (*)60A
10A (*)

68
71

Alfa Romeo CODE system

13

7.5A

71

Climate control system

9

15A

69

First speed– T.SPARK and JTS versions– diesel versions– 2.5 V6 24V versions

6
6
6

50A
60A
40A

68
68
68

Second speed– T.SPARK and JTS versions– diesel versions– 2.5 V6 24V versions

7
7
7

30A
40A
40A

68
68
68

Passenger compartment fan (petrol versions)

1

40A

68

Passenger compartment fan (diesel versions)

4

40A

68

Electronic ignition and injection system

13
14
15
5

7.5A
15A
15A
30A

71
71
71
68

70A

68

Engine cooling radiator fan:

Glow plugs and resistances on fuel oil filter (diesel versions)240

8
Alfawiki.nl

FUSE

AMPERESFIGURE

Fuel oil heater (JTD versions, JTD 16V Multijet)

H

25A

74

Services switched off with starting

1

7.5A

71

Battery power supply for Alfa Romeo CODE/Injection system

12

7.5A

71

(+15) key-controlled service supply (ignition switch)

2

30A

68

General service supply (petrol versions)

4

80A

68

General service supply (diesel versions)

1

80A

68

General service supply

3

70A

68

Additional heater (diesel version only)

10

70A

68

Oil pump supply (Selespeed versions only)

10

30A

68

Selespeed gearbox(2.0 JTS version)

7
8

30A
20A

68
68

Automatic gearbox(2.5 V6 24V version)

7
8

40A
20A

68
68

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICES(*) Specific components and values depending on the version/market. If in doubt, especially for the replacement of fuses which protect safety circuits
and/or systems (Air bag, ABS, etc.), you are recommended to contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, also to locate the cause of the fuse tripping.

Alfawiki.nl

241

IN AN EMERGENCY

IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT BATTERYFirst of all, you are advised to refer to the“Car maintenance” chapter for precautions
to be adopted in order to prevent the battery from getting flat and to ensure its long
durability.

– Disconnect the terminal from the battery negative (–) pole.

CHARGING THE BATTERY– Turn on the charger.

WARNING The description of the battery charging procedure is described only for
informative purposes. This operation should
be carried out by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

– After charging turn off the charger before disconnecting it from the battery.

Charge the battery as follows:– Connect the charger cables to the battery, respecting polarity.

– Reconnect the terminal to the battery
negative (–) pole.
STARTING WITH AN AUXILIARYBATTERY

Charging should be slow at a low amp rating for about 24 hours. Charging for a longer
time may damage the battery.

See “Starting with an auxiliary battery” inthis chapter.
WARNING
The fluid contained in thebattery is poisonous andcorrosive. Avoid contact with theskin or eyes. The battery should becharged in a well ventilated place
and kept away from naked flamesor sources of sparks: danger of explosion and fire.

Alfawiki.nl

242

WARNING
Never attempt to charge afrozen battery before
thawing it, the danger of explosion
exists. If it has frozen, always
check that the inside elements are
not broken (risk of short circuit)and that the body is not cracked,
with the risk of acid coming out
which is poisonous and corrosive.

The tow ring supplied with the vehicle ishoused in the tool box under the boot mat.

– Firmly screw the ring in its housing.

To install the tow ring, proceed as follows:– Take the tow ring from the tool box.
– Remove the cover (A) snap-fitted on thefront (fig. 77) or rear bumper (fig. 78).
If the supplied flat screwdriver is used to carry out this operation, protect the tip with asoft cloth to prevent damaging the car.

WARNING
Carefully clean the threaded housing before tightening the ring. Before beginning to
tow the car make sure that the
tow ring is firmly tightened in its
threaded housing.

A0B0593m

A0B0594m

WARNING
Before beginning to tow
the car, turn the ignition
key to MAR and then to STOP, do
not remove it. Removing the key
automatically engages the steering
lock resulting in the impossibility
to steer the wheels. When towing
remember that without the help of
the servo-brake and power steering, it is necessary to exert more
effort on the brake pedal and forsteering. Do not use flexible cables
for towing and avoid jerks. During towing operations make surethat fastening the joint to the cardoes not damage the components
in contact with it. When towing the
car it is compulsory to comply withthe specific traffic regulations concerning both the towing device andbehaviour on the road.

IN AN EMERGENCYIF THE VEHICLE IS TO BE TOWED

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 77

fig. 78243

IN AN EMERGENCY

TOWING THE 2.0 JTS
SELESPEED VERSIONWARNING For version with Selespeed
gearbox, make sure that it is in neutral (N)(checking that the car moves when pushed)and proceed as for towing a normal car withmechanical gearbox following the instructions given on the previous page.
Should it be impossible to set to neutral,
do not tow the vehicle; contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.

TOWING THE VERSION WITH
AUTOMATIC GEARBOX(2.5 V6 24V Q-SYSTEM)WARNING
Do not start the engine
when the vehicle is being

WARNING For towing the vehicle comply with current local regulations. Also follow the instructions given on the previous
page.

towed.

If the car needs to be towed, observe thefollowing recommendations:

The failure to follow theabove instructions may
cause serious damage tothe automatic gearbox.

– if possible, put the car on a rescue vehicle;– if this is not possible, tow the car raising the driving wheels (front) from theground;WARNING
Do not start the engine
when towing the vehicle.

– if this, too, is not possible, the car may
only be towed for 50 Km at a speed of
50 km/h.
The gearshift lever should be at position N
for towing.

Alfawiki.nl

244

Cars with automatic gearbox may be towed only forshort distances and at alow speed: if longer towing is necessary, the driving wheels must be
raised to prevent the gearbox frombeing pulled into rotation during
towing.

USING THE JACKSee paragraph “In the event of a puncture” in this chapter.
You are informed that:– the jack mass is 2,100 kg;

WARNING
The car may fall if the jackis not positioned correctly.
Never use the jack for higher capacities than the one stated on its
label.

WARNING
The car is to be lifted positioning the jack or theworkshop lift arm plate only in the
points shown (fig. 79).

IN AN EMERGENCYIF THE VEHICLE IS TO BE LIFTED– the jack requires no adjustment;– the jack cannot be repaired and in caseof breakage it must be replaced by another original one;
– no tool other than its cranking lever may
be installed on the jack.

WARNING
The purpose of the jack isonly for replacing wheelson the car with which it is provided or on cars of the same model. It
must never be used for other purposes such as for example raisingcars of other models. In no casemust it be used for repairs under
the car.

USING AN ARM LIFT OR
WORKSHOP LIFT
The vehicle must only be lifted laterally positioning the ends of the arms or the workshop lift in the areas illustrated, approx. 40
cm from the profile of the wheelhouse(fig. 79).
A0B0588m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 79245

IN AN EMERGENCY

IF AN ACCIDENTOCCURS– It is important to keep calm.
– If you are not directly involved in the accident, stop at least ten metres away fromthe accident.
– If you are on a motorway do not obstruct the emergency lane with your car.
– Turn off the engine and turn on the hazard lights.
– At night, illuminate the scene of the accident with your headlights.

– Act carefully, you must not risk being run
over.
– Mark the accident by putting the red triangle at the regulatory distance from the car
where it can be clearly seen.
– Call the emergency services making theinformation you give as accurate as you can.
On the motorway use the special columnmounted emergency phones.
– In pile-ups on the motorway, particularly when the visibility is bad, there is a highrisk of other vehicles running into those already immobile. Get out of the vehicle immediately and take refuge behind the guard
rail.
– If the doors are blocked, do not try to
get out of the vehicle by breaking the stratified windscreen. The rear and side windows
are easier to break.
– Remove the ignition keys of the vehicles involved.

Alfawiki.nl

246– If you smell petrol or other chemicals,
do not smoke and make sure all cigarettes
are extinguished.
– Use a fire extinguisher, blanket, sand or
earth to put out fires, no matter how small
they are. Never use water.
– If it is not necessary to use the lighting
system, disconnect the terminal from thebattery negative (–) pole.

FIRST-AID KIT– Never leave the injured person alone.
The obligation to provide assistance exists
even for those not directly involved in theaccident.

It is advisable to have also a fire extinguisher and a blanket besides the first-aid
kit.

– Do not congregate around the injured
person.
– Reassure the injured person that help
is on its way and will arrive soon. Stay closeby to calm him/her down in case of panic.

IN AN EMERGENCY

IF ANYONE IS INJURED– Unfasten or cut seat belts holding injured
parties.
– Do not give an injured person anything
to drink.
– Never move an injured person except in
the following cases.
– Pull the injured person from the car only if it risks catching fire, it is sinking in water or is likely to fall over a cliff or similar.
Do not pull his/her arms or legs, do notbend the head and, as far as possible, keep
the body horizontal.

Alfawiki.nl

247

CAR MAINTENANCECAR MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMMEDMAINTENANCE
Correct maintenance is essential for ensuring long car life under the best conditions.
This is why Alfa Romeo has programmed
a series of checks and maintenance operations every 20,000 km.
WARNING At 2000 km from the maintenance deadline, the Infocenter display willshow “SCHEDULED SERVICE WITHIN” whichis shown again turning the ignition key toMAR, every 200 km. For further details,
see “Service” in the “Display Infocenter”
paragraph in “Getting to know your car”
chapter.

It is however wise to remember that Programmed Maintenance does not completely cover all the car’s requirements: also in
the initial period before 20,000 km service
coupon and later, between one coupon andanother, ordinary care is still necessary suchas for example routinely checking and topping up the level of fluids, checking the tyrepressure, etc...
WARNING The Programmed Maintenance coupons are specified by the Manufacturer. The failure to have them carried out
may invalidate the warranty.
The Programmed Maintenance service iscarried out by all Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, at pre-established times.

Alfawiki.nl

248

If during each operation, in addition to theones programmed, the need arises for further replacements or repairs, these may be
carried out only with the explicit agreementof the customer.
WARNING You are advised to contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services in the eventof any minor operating faults, without waiting for the next service coupon.

Thousands of km

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if necessary

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights,
boot lights, passenger compartment lights, glovebox light, warning lights, etc..)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of windscreen wiper/washer system, adjust spray jets

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check position/wear of windscreen/rearscreen wiper blades

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check front disk brake pad wear indicator

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check conditions of rear disk brake pads

●

●

●

Sight check for the conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection,
pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel - brakes),
rubber parts (boots - sleeves - bushes - etc.)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check for bonnet and boot lock cleanness, lever cleanness and lubrication

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check condition of timing drive belt●●

Sight check for conditions of Poly-V accessory drive belt

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check petrol engine exhaust emissions

●

●

●

●

Check engine smoke (diesel versions)

●

●

●

●

Check/adjust handbrake lever stroke
Check/adjust valve clearance (1.9 JTD 8V versions)

Check operation of antievaporation system (petrol engines)●

Alfawiki.nl●

CAR MAINTENANCESCHEDULED MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME●

249

CAR MAINTENANCE

Thousand of km
Change fuel filter (diesel versions only)

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Change air cleaner cartridge (petrol engines)●●

Change air cleaner cartridge (diesel versions only)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check and if necessary top up fluid levels (brakes, hydraulic clutch, power steering,
windscreen wiper, battery, engine coolant, etc..)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check and if necessary top up Selespeed oil level (2.0 JTS version)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Replacement of timing drive belt (*) and Poly-V accessory drive belt●

Replacement of counter-rotating shaft drive belt (only 2.0 JTS)●●

Replacement of spark plugs (T.SPARK 16V, 2.0 JTS and 2.5 V6 24V versions)●

Check operation of engine control systems (through diagnosis)

●

●

●

●

Check gearbox and differential oil level●

Check automatic gearbox oil level (2.5 V6 24V version)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Change engine oil and oil filter

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Change brake fluid (or every 2 year)
Replacement of dust/pollen filter

●

●

●

●
●

●

(*) Or every 3 years in harsh conditions (cold – hot climates, stop and go city traffic, dusty areas or roads covered with sand and/or salt)
Or every 5 years, regardless of the mileage.

Alfawiki.nl

250

●

●

●
●

●

●

An annual inspection programme
has been established for cars thet
cover less than 20,000 km (e.g.
10,000 km). It consists of the following:– Visually check the following: engine,
gearbox, transmission, piping (exhaust - fuel - brakes) rubber components (casings sleeves - bushings, etc..), brake and fuelhoses
– Check battery charge condition– Visually check the condition of the belts
and various controls

ADDITIONALOPERATIONSEvery 1000 km or before long journeys
check and if necessary top up:– engine coolant level– brake fluid/hydraulic clutch control fluid level– Check tyre conditions/wear and adjustpressure if required (including the compact
spare wheel)– Check and top up if necessary, the fluid levels (coolant, brake fluid, windscreen
washer fluid, battery, etc.)– Check lighting system operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights,
boot lights, passenger compartment lights,
glovebox light, warning lights of instrument
panel, etc.)– Change engine oil– windscreen washer and headlamp washer fluid level– Replace engine oil filter– tyre pressure and conditions.

– Change pollen filter.

Every 3000 km check the level of theengine oil and top up if necessary.

– Check windscreen and rear-screen
wiper/washer operation, adjust nozzles

CAR MAINTENANCE

ANNUAL INSPECTION
PROGRAMME– power steering fluid level

You are recommended to use products of
the FL Selenia, designed and developed
expressly for Alfa Romeo cars (see the table“Specifications of fluids and lubricants” inthe “Technical specifications” chapter).

– Check windscreen/rear-screen blade position/wear– Check condition and wear of the front
brake pad
– Check for bonnet and boot lock cleanness, lever cleanness and lubrication

Alfawiki.nl

251

CAR MAINTENANCEWARNINGEngine oil

WARNING
Fuel oil filter

WARNING
Air cleaner

Should prevailing use of the car be under
one of the following specially heavy conditions:

The variety of the degree of purity of thefuel oil in commerce may make it necessary
to change the fuel oil filter more frequently
than stated in the Scheduled Maintenance
Programme. If the engine is “sobbing” itis a sign that the filter needs changing.

Using the car on dusty roads, change theair cleaner more frequently than stated in
the Scheduled Maintenance Programme.

– trailer or caravan towing– dusty roads– short distances (less than 7-8 km) repeated and with external temperatures below zero.
– frequently idling engines or long distancelow speed driving (e.g. taxis or door-to-doordeliveries) or in case of a long term inactivity.
Replace engine oil more frequently thanrequired on SERVICE SCHEDULE.

Alfawiki.nl

252

For any doubts about the intervals between engine oil and air cleaner changes
in relation to how the car is used, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

WARNING
Pollen filter

You are recommended to have the battery
charge conditions checked, preferably at theonset of winter, to avoid the possibility offreezing the electrolyte.

If the car is used frequently in dusty or
heavily polluted environments it is advisable
to replace the filtering element more frequently; in particular it should be replaced if
a reduction of the amount of air admitted tothe passenger compartment is noted.

This check should be carried out more frequently if the car is used prevailingly forshort journeys, or if it is fitted with services
that absorb high amounts of current permanently with the ignition key off, especially
if installed in the after market.

Car maintenance should be
entrusted to Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services. For
routine and minor maintenance operations you wish to carry out
yourself, always make sure you
have the proper equipment, genuine
Alfa Romeo spare parts and thenecessary fluids; do not however
carry out these operations if you
have no experience.

CAR MAINTENANCEWARNING
Battery

In the case of use of the car in hot climatesor particularly harsh conditions, it is wise
to check the level of the battery fluid (electrolyte) at more frequent intervals than stated in the Scheduled Maintenance Programme.

Alfawiki.nl

253

CAR MAINTENANCE

A0B00174m

CHECKING FLUIDLEVELSWARNING
Never smoke while working in the engine compartment; gas and inflammablevapours may be present, with therisk of fire.

When topping up takecare not to confuse the various types of fluids: they
are all incompatible with one another and could seriously damage
the car.

254

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid 4 Windscreen washer fluid - 5 Engine
coolant fluid - 6 Power steering fluid

fig. 1 - 1.6 T.SPARK, 1.8 T.SPARK versions
A0B00436m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 2 - 2.0 JTS version

CAR MAINTENANCE

A0B00175m

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid 4 Windscreen washer fluid - 5 Engine
coolant fluid - 6 Power steering fluid
fig. 3 - 2.5 V6 24V version
A0B00176m

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid 4 Windscreen washer fluid - 5 Engine
coolant fluid - 6 Power steering fluid

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 4 - JTD version

255

CAR MAINTENANCE

A0B0558m

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid 4 Windscreen washer fluid - 5 Engine
coolant fluid - 6 Power steering fluid
fig. 5 - JTD 16V Multijet version
A0B0616m

256

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid 4 Windscreen washer fluid - 5 Engine
coolant fluid - 6 Power steering fluid

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 6 - JTD 20V Multijet version
To improve picture detail, the engine compartment is illustrated without the bonnet

WARNING
When the engine is hot,take care when working
inside the engine compartment toavoid burns. Remember that whenthe engine is hot, the fan may cut
in: danger of injury.

Fig. 7: T.SPARK versions
Fig. 8: 2.0 JTS version
Fig. 9: 2.5 V6 24V version
Fig. 10: JTD versions
Fig. 11: JTD 16V Multijet version
Fig. 12: JTD 20V Multijet version
The engine oil level should be checked
when the car is standing on a level surface
a few minutes (about 5) after the engine
has been switched off.
Remove the dipstick (A), clean it, put itback completely, remove it once again andcheck that the level is between the MIN
and MAX marks on the dipstick.
The interval between the MIN and MAX
marks corresponds to approximately 1 literof oil.

Never add oil with characteristics (classification,
viscosity) which are different from those of the oil already inthe circuit.
If the oil level is near or even below theMIN, mark, add oil trough the filler neck(B), until reaching the MAX mark.

CAR MAINTENANCE

ENGINE OILWARNING
Scarves, ties and otherloose clothing might bepulled by moving parts.

A0B0170m

A0B0437m

A0B0169m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 7 - T.SPARK versions

fig. 8 - 2.0 JTS version

fig. 9 - 2.5 V6 24V version

257

CAR MAINTENANCEWARNING If a routine check reveals
that the oil level is above the MAX mark,contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services tohave the correct level restored.
WARNING After adding or changing theoil, run the engine for a few seconds andwait a few minutes after stopping it.

Engine oil consumption
Max. engine oil consumption is usually
400 grams every 1000 km.
During the initial period of use the engine
settles, therefore the engine oil consumption can only be considered stabilised after
the first 5000 ÷ 6000 km.

Used engine oil and filter
contain pollutants. Contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services to have the oil and filter
changed as these are equipped todispose of the waste oil and filters
respecting the environment andlaws.

WARNING Engine oil consumption depends on the way of driving and the conditions of use of the car.

A0B0165m

A0B0559m

A0B0617m

Alfawiki.nl

258 fig. 10 - JTD version

fig. 11 - JTD 16V Multijet version

fig. 12 - JTD 20V Multijet version

The oil level of the Selespeed systemshould be carried out with the car on a level surface and with the engine stopped andcold.

Do not add oil with different characteristics thanthose of the oil already inthe system.

To check the level, proceed as follows:

WARNING
When the engine is hot,take care when working
inside the engine compartment toavoid burns. Remember that whenthe engine is hot, the fan may cut
in: danger of injury.

CAR MAINTENANCESELESPEED GEARBOXHYDRAULIC SYSTEM OIL(fig. 13)– turn the ignition key to MAR;– disconnect the breather tube and remove the cap (A) checking that the level
corresponds with the MAX mark on the dipstick of the actual cap;
– if the level is below the MAX mark, top
up with oil until reaching the correct level;– after screwing the cap back on, insert
the breather tube completely on the cap
spout and turn the ignition key to STOP.

Used gearbox oil containpollutants. Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services
to have the oil changed as theseare equipped to dispose of thewaste oil respecting the environment and laws.

A0B0162m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 13259

CAR MAINTENANCE

Q-SYSTEM AUTOMATIC
GEARBOX OIL LEVEL (fig. 14)
The oil should be checked with the engine
idling and at operating temperature, thegearshift lever at position P and the car onlevel ground.
To check the level, proceed as follows:

The level should be between the MIN andMAX marks of the sector identified by theword COLD (+40°C).
WARNING After long journeys with thegearbox/differential unit very hot, the oillevel should be between the MIN andMAX marks of the sector identified by theword HOT (+80°C).

– remove the dipstick (A);– clean it with a clean lint free cloth;– insert the dipstick in its housing pushingwell down to the bottom;– remove it to check.

A0B0163m

WARNING
When the engine is very
hot, take care when working inside the engine compartment
to avoid burns. Remember thatwhen the engine is hot, the fan may
cut in: danger of injury.

If the oil level is near or below the MIN
mark, add TUTELA GI/2 oil through thedipstick housing.

Alfawiki.nl

260 fig. 14

The oil level should never exceed the
MAX mark on the dipstick on the COLD
side, if the level is checked cold and on the
HOT side if the level is checked with thegearbox/differential unit hot.

Do not add oil with different characteristics thanthose of the oil already inthe system.

WARNING
Used gearbox oil containpollutants. Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services tohave the oil changed as these are
equipped to dispose of the waste
oil respecting the environment andlaws.

WARNING
Do not remove he cap
when the engine is hot:danger of burns.

Fig. 15: T.SPARK, 2.0 JTS and diesel versions
Fig. 16: 2.5 V6 24V version

The level of the coolant in the header tank(reservoir) should be checked with the engine cold and the car on a level surface andit should be between the MIN and MAX
marks on the tank. If the level is low, loosen
the header tank cap (A) and slowly poura mixture of the fluid specified in the ”Fluids and lubricants ” table in section “Technical Specifications”, through the filler neck
until nearing the MAX mark; have this operation carried out at Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services.

Top up only with the same
fluid contained in the cooling circuit. PARAFLU UP(red) cannot be mixed with
PARAFLU 11 (blue) or with otherfluids. Should this take place, do
not start the engine and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

The antifreeze mixture contained in thecooling circuit guarantees protection down
to –35°C.

The cooling system ispressurised. If necessary,
replace the cap only withanother genuine one, otherwise
system efficiency could be compromised.

A0B0161m

CAR MAINTENANCE

ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

A0B0160m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 15 - T.SPARK, 2.0 JTS and JTD versions

fig. 16 - 2.5 V6 24V version

261

CAR MAINTENANCE

POWER STEERING OIL LEVEL
Fig. 17: T.SPARK versions
Fig. 18: 2.0 JTS versions
Fig. 19: 2.5 V6 24V and JTD versions
Check that the oil level in the reservoir isat the MAX level.
This operation must be carried out with the
car on level ground and when the engine
is stationary and cold.
Check that the level reaches the MAX reference notch on the reservoir or coincides
with the upper notch (maximum level) on
the dipstick integral with the reservoir cap.

If the level of the oil in the reservoir falls
below the specified level, top up only with
one of the products listed in the table“Fluids and lubricants” in the “Technicalspecifications” chapter as follows:– Start the engine and allow the oil in thereservoir to settle.
– When the engine is running turn thesteering wheel lock to lock a few minutes.
– Top up to the MAX level notch andthen replace the cover.

WARNING Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services for maintenance and repair
operations.

Oil consumption is very
low, if topping up again isneeded shortly afterwards,
have the system checked for possible leaks by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

WARNING
Power steering fluid ishighly inflammable. Do not
let it come into contact with hot engine parts.

A0B0159m

A0B0158m

A0B0158m

Alfawiki.nl

262 fig. 17

fig. 18

fig. 19

From time to time check the instrument
panel warning light x by pressing cover(B) of the reservoir (A) (with the ignition
key at MAR) instrument panel warning
light should come on.

When loosening the reservoir cap do not allow thefluid to come into contact
with painted parts. If it does, wash
it off immediately with water.

WARNING
Brake and clutch fluid ispoisonous and highly corrosive. In the event of accidental
contact, wash the parts involved
immediately with neutral soap andwater, then rinse thoroughly. Seea doctor at once if the fluid is swallowed.

WARNING Brake and hydraulic clutch
fluid is hygroscopic (i.e. it absorbs moisture).
For this reason, if the car is mainly used inareas with a high degree of atmospheric humidity, the fluid should be replaced at more
frequent intervals than specified in the
Scheduled Maintenance Programme.

CAR MAINTENANCE

BRAKE AND HYDRAULIC
CLUTCH FLUID (fig. 20)

WARNING
Symbol π on the container indicates synthetic typebrake fluid distinguishing it fromthe mineral kind. Using mineral
type fluids damages the special
rubber braking system gaskets beyond repair.

A0B0157m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 20

263

CAR MAINTENANCE

WINDSCREEN/HEADLIGHTWASHER FLUID
Fig. 21: T.SPARK, 2.0 JTS and diesel versions
Fig. 22: 2.5 V6 24V version.
Check the level in the reservoir removing
the cap (A).

If necessary top up using a mixture of water and TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35
as follows:– 30% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 70% water in summer;– 50% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 50% water in winter;

WARNING
Do not travel with thewindscreen washer reservoir empty: the action of the windscreen washer is fundamental for
improving vision.

– in the case of temperatures below–20°C use TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 fluid neat.
WARNING
Some commercial additives
for windscreen washers
are inflammable. The engine compartment contains hot components
which could set it on fire.

A0A0156m

A0A0155m

To avoid damaging thepump motors, do not use
the windscreen washers
when the reservoir is empty.

Alfawiki.nl

264 fig. 21

fig. 22

The air cleaner is connected to the temperature and air flow sensors which send theelectrical signals needed for correct operation of the injection and ignition system tothe control unit.

When the car is habitually driven in dusty areas,
the cleaner should bechanged at shorter intervals thanthose given in the Programmed
Maintenance Schedule.

It must therefore always be in perfect conditions to ensure correct operation of the engine, low consumption and exhaust emission levels.

If they are not carried out
correctly and with the due
precautions, the operations
involving cleaner replacement described herein may compromise thesafety of the car.
This operation should be carriedout by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Any attempt to clean the
air cleaner may cause serious engine damage.

DIESEL FILTERDRAINING CONDENSATION
WATER

Water in the supply circuit
can seriously damage thewhole injection system andcause malfunctions to engine operation. Should the warning lamp cturn on, available for the provided versions/markets, contact assoon as possible the Alfa Romeo
Authorised Service for drainage operations.

CAR MAINTENANCE

AIR FILTER

Alfawiki.nl

265

CAR MAINTENANCEPOLLEN FILTERBATTERY

This has mechanical/electrostatic air filtering actions, provided that the windows
and doors are shut.

The battery is of the “Limited Maintenance” type and is fitted with an optical indicator (A-fig. 23) for checking the electrolyte level and charge.

Have the pollen filter checked once a year
by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, preferably at the onset of summer.
If the car is mainly used in dusty or heavily polluted areas, the filter should bechanged at more frequent intervals thanspecified in the Scheduled Maintenance Programme.
WARNING The failure to replace the filter can considerably reduce the effectivenessof the climate control system.

Under normal conditions of use the electrolyte does not need topping up with distilled water. To make sure that it is in efficient conditions, at routine intervals checkthe indicator on the battery cover whichshould be dark in colour with a green central area.
If the indicator is a bright light colour, or
dark without the green central area, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

A0B0147m

Alfawiki.nl

266

fig. 23

Batteries contain substances that are very
harmful for the environment. You are advised to have thebattery changed at Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services, which areproperly equipped for disposing ofused batteries respecting natureand the law.

WARNINGThe liquid in the battery ispoisonous and corrosive.
Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
Do not bring naked flames or possible sources of sparks near to thebattery: risk of fire and explosion.

WARNING
When doing any work on
the battery or near it, always wear special protective goggles.

CHECKING THE CHARGE
The battery charge may be checked satisfactorily using the indicator, and acting according to the colour the indicator shows.
Refer to the table below or to the label
fig. 24 on the battery.

CAR MAINTENANCE

Incorrect fitting of electrical accessories can seriously damage the car. If after
buying the car, you wish to installelectric accessories (alarm, soundsystem, radiotelephone, etc.) contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services who will be able to suggest
the most suitable devices andabove all advise about the need touse a more powerful battery.

WARNING
Working with a low fluid
level may damage the battery irreversibly, even causing it toburst.
If the car is to remain stationary for a long time invery cold weather, remove
the battery and take it to a warm
place, otherwise it might freeze.

A0B0146m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 24

267

CAR MAINTENANCE

CHARGING THE BATTERYWARNING The description of the battery charging procedure is described only for
informative purposes. This operation should
be carried out by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
Charging should be slow at a low amp rating for about 24 hours. Charging for a longer
time may damage the battery.
Charge the battery as follows:– Disconnect the terminal from the battery negative (–) pole.
WARNING When reconnecting the negative battery cable after having disconnected it, wait for 2 minutes before turning the
key to enable the climate control system
to reset actuator strokes properly.

268– Connect the charger cables to the battery terminals ensuring that the bias is correct.
– Turn on the charger.
– After charging turn off the charger before disconnecting it from the battery.
– Reconnect the battery negative terminal (–).
WARNING If the car is fitted with analarm system, turn off the alarm with theremote control and deactivate the system
turning the emergency key to “OFF” (see“Electronic alarm” in “Getting to know yourcar” chapter).

Brightwhite colour

Top up electrolyte

Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services

Dark colour
without green central area

Low battery charge

Charge the battery(advisable to contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services)

Dark colourwith green central area

Electrolyte level
and charge sufficient

No action needed

Alfawiki.nl

WARNING
Never attempt to charge afrozen battery before
thawing it, the danger of explosion
exists. If it has frozen, always
check that the inside elements are
not broken and that the body is notcracked, with the risk of acid coming out which is poisonous and corrosive.

WARNING A battery kept at below
50% of its capacity is damaged by sulphation, the capacity is reduced and startingis difficult, there is also more possibility offreezing (this can occur at –10°C). In theevent of a prolonged stop, refer to “Vehicle inactivity”, in the chapter “Getting thebest out of your car”.

If required, replace the battery with a genuine spare part having the same specifications. If a battery with different specifications is fitted, the service intervals given in
the Programmed Maintenance Schedule inthis section will no longer be valid. Referto the instructions provided by the battery
manufacturer.

USEFUL HINTS TO EXTEND
THE LIFE OF YOUR BATTERY
To avoid quickly draining the battery andto preserve its operating conditions over thecourse of time, carefully follow the instructions below:– The terminals must always be tightened.
– As far as possible, avoid keeping services on for a long time with the engine
stopped (radio, hazard lights, parking lights,etc.).
– When leaving the car parked in agarage, make sure that the doors, bonnet,
boot and interior lids are properly shut toprevent lights from staying on.

– If after purchasing the car, you wish to
install electrical accessories which need apermanent electrical supply (alarm, handsfree phone, radio-navigator with satellite anti-theft function, etc.) contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services whose qualified personnel, in addition to suggesting the mostsuitable devices from Lineaccessori Alfa
Romeo will be able to evaluate the total
electrical absorption, checking whether the
car’s electric system is able to support theload required or whether a battery with higher capacity is necessary. In fact, these devices continue to absorb current with theignition key off (car parked, engine off) andmay gradually drain the battery.

CAR MAINTENANCE

REPLACING THE BATTERY– Before doing any work on the electric
system, disconnect the battery negative terminal.

Alfawiki.nl

269

CAR MAINTENANCE

The total absorption of these accessories(standard and installed later) must be lessthan 0.6 mA x Ah (of the battery), as
shown in the table below:

ELECTRONIC CONTROLUNITSWith normal use of the car, no particularprecautions need to be taken.

Battery

Maximum permissible
loadless absorption

50 Ah

30 mA

60 Ah

36 mA

70 Ah

42 mA

You are also reminded that services withhigh current absorption activated by the user,
such as bottle warmers, vacuum cleaners,
cellular telephone, mini refrigerator, etc. accelerate the battery drainage process if they
are powered with the engine not running or running at idle speed.
WARNING It should also be noted that
improper branches on connectors of the electric wiring for installing additional equipment
is dangerous, particularly if safety devices
are involved.

In the event of work on the electric systemor emergency starting, the instructions given below must absolutely be adhered to:– If electrical welding is to be carried out
on the body of the car, the electronic control units must be disconnected or removed
if the work involves the production of hightemperatures.

– Always switch off the engine before disconnecting the battery from the electric system.
– If it is necessary to charge the battery,always disconnect it from the electric system.
– When starting in an emergency, only
use an auxiliary battery and not a battery
charger.
– Check that the bias is correct and thatthe connections between the battery andthe electric system are in efficient conditions.
– Do not connect or disconnect the terminals of the electronic units while the ignition key is at MAR.

Alfawiki.nl

270– Do not check for current in the cables by
short-circuiting the ends.

WARNING
Alterations or repairs to
the electric system carriedout incorrectly and without taking
into account the specifications of
the system, may cause operating
faults with the risk of fire.

Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyrewear fig. 25:

TYRES PRESSURE

A - Normal pressure: tread evenly worn.

Check the pressure of each tyre, including the compact spare wheel, every two
weeks and before a long journey.

B - Low pressure: tread particularly wornat the edges.

The pressure should be checked with thetyre rested and cold.
It is normal for the pressure to increase
when the car is in use. If you have to checkor restore the pressure when the tyres are
hot, bear in mind that the pressure should
be +0.3 bar compare with the specified rating.
For the correct tyre inflation pressure, see“Wheels” in the “Technical specifications”
chapter.

C - High pressure: tread particularly wornin the centre.
WARNING
Excessively low pressurecauses overheating of thetyre with the possibility of serious
damage to it.

Tyres should be changed when the tread
thickness is reduced to 1.6 mm. In any casefollow local regulations.

WARNING
Remember that car roadholding also depends oncorrect tyre inflation pressure.

A0B0235m

WARNINGS
Where possible, avoid sudden braking, tyresquealing starts, etc.
Particularly avoid violent bumps against
kerbs, potholes or obstacles of various kinds.
Prolonged driving on rough roads may damage the tyres.
Routinely check the tyres for cuts on thesides, swellings or uneven tread wear. If necessary contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

CAR MAINTENANCE

WHEELS AND TYRES

Avoid overloading the vehicle when travelling: this may cause serious damage to thewheels and tyres.
If a tyre is punctured, stop immediately
and change it to avoid damage to the tyre,
the rim, suspensions and steering system.
Tyres age even if they are not used much.
Cracks in the tread rubber are a sign of aging. In any case, if the tyres have been on
the car for over 6 years, they should bechecked by specialised personnel, to see ifthey can still be used. Also remember tocheck the spare wheel.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 25

271

CAR MAINTENANCE

In the case of replacement, always fit newtyres, avoiding those of dubious origin.
Alfa 156 uses Tubeless tyres. Neveruse an inner tube with these tyres.
If a tyre is changed, also change the inflation valve
To allow even wear between the front andrear tyres, it is advisable to change themover every 10-15 thousand kilometres,
keeping them on the same side of the carso as to not reverse the direction of rotation(fig. 26).

WARNING
Do not cross switch thetyres, moving them fromthe right of the car to the left andvice versa.

WARNING
Alloy rim painting involving temperatures exceeding 150°C should be avoided sincewheel mechanical characteristics
could be impaired.

A0B0589m

Alfawiki.nl

272

fig. 26

RUBBER HOSES
As far as the brake system and fuel supply rubber hoses are concerned, carefully follow the Scheduled Maintenance Programmeof this chapter. Indeed ozone, high temperatures and prolonged lack of fluid in thesystem may cause hardening and crackingof the hoses, with possible leaks. Careful
control is therefore necessary.

BLADES
Periodically clean the rubber part using special products TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 is recommended.

Changing the windscreen wiper
blade (fig. 27)
WARNING The blade on driver’s side
is fitted with a spoiler that improves adhesion between the blade and the windscreen.
To prevent improper fitting, before changing
the blade, check the spoiler direction of theblade to be replaced, then fit the new blade
following the same spoiler direction.

If the rubber blades are bent or worn theyshould be replaced. In any case they should
be changed once a year.

Proceed as follows:– Raise the windscreen wiper arm and position the blade so that it forms an angleof 90° with the arm.
– Press tab (B) of the coupling spring andremove the blade to be replaced from thearm (A).
– When the spring is released from thecurved top of the arm, move the blade to allow the arm to be withdrawn through the slot.

CAR MAINTENANCE

WINDSCREEN/REARSCREEN WIPERS– Insert a new blade passing it through thecurved top of the arm (A) through the slot.

A few simple notions can reduce the possibility of damage to the blades:– Lift the blade to clamp tab (B) of the coupling spring with the curved top of the arm.

– If the temperature falls below zero,
make sure that ice has not frozen the rubber against the glass. If necessary, thaw using an antifreeze product.

– Lower the windscreen wiper arm.

– Remove any snow from the glass: in addition to protecting the blades, this prevents
effort on the motor and overheating.

A0B0580m

WARNING The blades may differ according to the versions. In any case, follow
the instructions provided in the packs available as spares from Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.

– Do not operate the windscreen and rearwindow wipers on dry glass.
WARNING
Driving with worn wiper
blades is a serious hazard,
because visibility is reduced in bad
weather.

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 27273

CAR MAINTENANCESPRAY JETSHEADLIGHT WASHERS

Make sure that the windscreen and headlight (where applicable) washer jets deliver a jet of fluid which is adequate and correctly directed.

(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)

If the spray devices are not working checkthat the supply circuit is not blocked. If necessary unblock the nozzles using a needle.

Regularly check that the spray jets are intact and clean fig. 28.
If it is necessary to direct the jet, contact
an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

BODYWORKPROTECTION FROMATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
The main causes of corrosion are:– atmospheric pollution– salty air and humidity (coastal areas, or
hot humid climates)– seasonal environment conditions.
Not to be underestimated is also the abrasive action of wind-borne atmospheric dust
and sand and mud and gravel raised by other vehicles.
On your Alfa 156, Alfa Romeo has
implemented the best manufacturing technologies to effectively protect the bodywork
against corrosion.
These include:

A0B0581m– Painting products and systems whichgive the car particular resistance to corrosion
and abrasion.
– Use of galvanised (or pretreated) steel
sheets, with high resistance to corrosion.

Alfawiki.nl

274

fig. 28– Spraying the underbody, engine compartment, wheel arches and other parts withhighly protective wax products.

RECOMMENDATIONSTO PRESERVE THE BODYWORK– Use of “open” boxed sections to prevent condensation and pockets of moisturefrom triggering rust inside.

The paintwork does not only serve an aesthetic purpose but also protects the underlying sheet metal.

VEHICLE EXTERIOR AND
UNDERBODY WARRANTY

In the case of deep scrapes or scores, youare advised to have the necessary touching up carried out immediately to avoid theformation of rust.

The Alfa 156 is guaranteed against
perforation due to rust of any original element of the structure or body. For the general terms of this warranty, refer to the Warranty Booklet.

Paint

Only original products should be used fortouching up paint (see “Bodywork paintidentification label” in the “Technical specifications” chapter).
Normal paint maintenance consists inwashing at intervals depending on the conditions and environment of use. For example, in highly polluted areas, or if the roads
are sprayed with salt, it is wise to wash the
car more frequently.

To correctly wash the car:1) Remove the aerial from the roof to prevent damage to it if the car is washed in
an automatic system.
2) Spray the body with a low pressure
jet of water.
3) Pass a sponge moistened with a lightdetergent solution, rinsing the sponge frequently.

CAR MAINTENANCE– Spraying of plastic parts, with a protective function, in the more exposed
points: underdoor, inner wheel arch linings,
edges, etc.

4) Rinse well with water and dry with ajet of air or a chamois leather.
When drying, take particular care with theless visible parts like door surrounds, bonnet
and around the headlights where water may
stagnate. The car should not be taken to aclosed area immediately, but left in the open
so that residual water can evaporate.

Detersives pollute water.
The car should therefore be
washed in areas equipped
for the collection and purificationof the liquid used in the washingprocess.

Alfawiki.nl

275

CAR MAINTENANCE

Do not wash the car after it has been left
in the sun or with the bonnet hot: this mayalter the shine of the paintwork.
Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in
the same way as the rest of the vehicle.
Where possible, do not park under trees;
the resinous substance many species release
give the paint a dull appearance and increase the possibility of triggering rustprocesses.

Windows

Engine compartment

Use specific products to clean the windows.
Use clean cloths to avoid scratching or altering the transparency of the glass.

At the end of the winter the engine compartment should be carefully washed, without directing the jet against electronic control units. Contact a specialised workshop tohave this done.

WARNING The inside of the rearscreen
should be wiped gently with a cloth in the
direction of the filaments to avoid damaging the heating device.

Detergents cause waterpollution. Therefore the engine compartment should
be washed in areas equipped forcollecting and purifying the liquid
used in the washing process.

WARNING Bird droppings must be
washed off immediately and thoroughly as
the acid they contain is particularly aggressive.

WARNING The vehicle should washedwith the engine cold and the ignition key at
STOP. After washing make sure that thevarious protections (e.g. rubber caps andvarious covers) have not been damaged or
removed.

Alfawiki.nl

276

CLEANING SEATS AND FABRIC
AND VELVET PARTS

Periodically check that water is not trapped
under the mats (due to water dripping off
shoes, umbrellas, etc.) which could cause
oxidisation of the sheet metal.

– Use a soft brush or vacuum cleaner toremove dust. Velvet is cleaned better if thebrush is moistened.

WARNING
Never use inflammableproducts like fuel oil ether
or rectified petrol for cleaning inside the car. The electrostatic discharges generated when rubbing toclean may cause fire.

– Rub the seats with a sponge moistenedwith a solution of water and neutral detergent.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATSINTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS
For routine cleaning of interior plastic parts
use a soft cloth moistened with water andneutral soap. Remove grease or persisting
stains using appropriate solvent-free products designed to preserve appearance andcolour of plastic components.
IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petroleum to clean the instrument panel or other plastic parts.

CAR MAINTENANCE

INTERIOR FITTINGS– Remove dried on dirt with a lightly
moistened chamois leather or cloth without pressing too hard.
– Remove liquid or grease stains with a
dry absorbent cloth without rubbing. Then
wipe with a soft cloth or chamois leather
with water and neutral soap. If the stain persists, use specific products, carefully following the instructions for use
WARNING Never use spirit or alcoholbased products.

WARNING
Do not keep aerosol cans in
the car. There is the risk
they might explode. Aerosol cansmust never be exposed to a temperature above 50°C. The temperature inside the car might go wellbeyond that figure when exposedto the sun’s rays.

Alfawiki.nl

277

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON

A L FA 15 6 S P O R T WA G O N
In this chapter, you weill find all the specific information for Alfa 156 Sportwagon that integrate and complete theprevious chapters.

DOORS

Opening/closing from inside

REAR DOORS
Opening/closing from outside– To open the door, only with the insideknob lifted (A-fig. 1), pull the opening
handle (B-fig. 2).
– To close, press the knob (A-fig. 1)
also with the door open, then shut the door.

WARNING
Opening the rear doors isonly possible if the “childsafety” device is released.
– To open the door pull the handle(Afig. 3).
– To close it, press the knob (B-fig. 3)
also with the door open, then shut the door.

A0B0077m

A0B0078m

A0B0079m

Alfawiki.nl

278 fig. 1

fig. 2

fig. 3

SEATS

The rear doors are fitted with a locking device (A) which prevents them from being
opened from inside.

REAR SEATWARNING Each device only acts on thedoor on which it is installed.
The device can only be engaged with thedoors open raising or lowering the control
with the ignition key.
Position 1 (control up) = Device engaged.
Position 2 (control down) = Device released.

The third headrest (centre) is not removable, whereas the side headrests may be removed as follows:– Raise the headrests about 2 cm.

Headrest
The car is fitted with two headrests for theside seats (fig. 5). On request for versions/markets where applicable, the car
may also be fitted with a third headrest forthe central seat (fig. 6).

– Press the buttons (A and B-fig. 5) atthe same time and remove the headrests.
– To refit the headrests keep the buttons
pressed (A and B-fig. 5) and insert themcompletely.

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGONCHILD SAFETY DEVICE (fig. 4)

To pull out the third headrest, push it upwards until hearing the stopping click.

WARNING Also follow the instructions
given in the chapter “getting to know yourcar” under the paragraph “Child safety device”.

A0B0080m

A0B0094m

A0B0095m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 4

fig. 5

fig. 6279

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGONWARNING
Remember that the third
headrest (central) shouldbe pulled out completely so thatthe nape and not the neck rests on
it. Only in this position does it exert its protective action if the car
is hit from behind.

Ski compartment
This compartment can be used for carrying long loads.
To gain access to the compartment lower
the armrest, pull the handle (A-fig. 8) andlower the lid on the armrest (fig. 9).
On versions fitted with the third headrest,
before lowering the lid on the armrest, lift
the headrest completely and set the fabricprotection.

Centre armrest (where required)

On request for versions/markets whereapplicable, the compartment can be fittedwith a bag for carrying skis.
WARNING Lay the bag in the passenger compartment before putting the skis in.
After carrying skis, let the bag dry (if wet),then fold it correctly and insert it in the compartment.

WARNING
Always check that the load
are anchored properly toprevent them being thrown against
the passengers in case of accident
or sharp braking.

To use the centre armrest, lower it as illustrated (fig. 7), using the handle (A).

A0B0564m

A0B0097m

A0B0600m

Alfawiki.nl

280 fig. 7

fig. 8

fig. 9

OPERATION (fig. 10)
This is only possible with the ignition key
at MAR.
To operate the rearscreen wiper turn theknob (A) to position (. The rearscreen
wiper works intermittently.
Pushing the lever (B) forwards therearscreen washer jet comes into operation
which is disengaged when the lever is released.

CHANGING THE BLADE(fig. 11)SPRAY JET (fig. 12)

The rearscreen wiper blade should be replaced together with the arm.
To replace:– mark the position of the blade in relation to the rearscreen.

If the jet does not spray, check that thereis fluid in the windscreen washer reservoir:
see the corresponding paragraph in the chapter “Car maintenance”. Then check that theholes on the jet (A) are not clogged andfree them using a pin, if necessary.

– Raise the lid (A), slacken the nut (B)and remove the arm (C).

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGONREARSCREEN WIPER –REARSCREEN WASHER– Correctly posiiton the new arm and firmly tighten the fastening nut.
– Lower the lid.

With the rearscreen washer, the wiper
comes into operation automatically for a few
seconds.

A0B0081m

A0B0082m

A0B0083m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 10

fig. 11

fig. 12281

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON

LUGGAGECOMPARTMENT
The boot lid can be opened from outside
the vehicle (pressing the button on the key)and from inside the vehicle.
WARNING If the tailgate is not shutproperly, this will be shown by the corresponding warning light ´ and warning message on the Infocenter display.
OPENING FROM INSIDE(fig. 13)
To open the tailgate from inside the passenger compartment pull the lever (A) atthe side of the driver’s seat.

WARNING
Only use the tailgate opening lever with the car stationary.

Lifting the tailgate is facilitated by the action of the gas springs.

The gas springs are calibrated to ensure correct
lifting of the tailgate withthe weights foreseen by the manufacturer. The addition of objects(spoiler, etc.) may adversely affectcorrect operation and safety in useof the tailgate.

OPENING WITH REMOTE
CONTROL (fig. 14)
The boot can be opened by remote control
pressing the button (C) on the key, also
when the electronic alarm (where fitted) is
engaged.
In this case the alarm system switches offvolumetric protection and the tailgate control sensor. The system also sounds two
beeps and the direction indicators light up
for three seconds (with the exception of versions for certain markets).
Closing the boot again the control functions
are restored, the system sounds two beeps
and the direction indicators light up for threeseconds (with the exception of versions forcertain markets).

A0B0042m

A0B9000m

Alfawiki.nl

282 fig. 13

fig. 14

RESTRAINING THE LOAD
(fig. 16-17)

CAUTIONS FOR CARRYINGLUGGAGE

To lower the tailgate use the grip (A) on
the interior trim.

The loads carried can be held in place withthe belts hooked to the rings provided at thecorners of the boot.

On versions not fitted with the automatic
rear geometry control system, when travelling at night with a load in the boot, it isnecessary to adjust the height of the low
beams (see “Headlamps” paragraph in thechapter “Getting to know your car”). For
correct use of the aiming device, also makesure that the load does not exceed the values given in the same paragraph.

The rings also serve for fastening the luggage retainer net (available on request forversions/markets where applicable c/o Alfa Romeo Authorized Services).

A0B0084m

A0B0085m

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON

CLOSING THE TAILGATE(fig. 15)

A0B0086m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 15

fig. 16

fig. 17283

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGONWARNING
When using the boot, never exceed the maximum
permissible loads given in the“Technical specifications” chapter.
Also make sure that the items contained in the boot are firmly secured, to prevent them being
thrown forward and harming thepassengers in the event of abrupt
braking.

WARNING
If you want to carry fuel ina reserve can, you should
comply with legal regulations, only using a certified can suitably fastened to the load retainer rings at
the corner of the boot. However,remember that this increases therisk of fire in the event of an accident.

WARNING
Heavy luggage without
restraints could cause serious harm to the passengers in an
accident.

ODDMENTS COMPARTMENT(fig. 18-19)
On the sides of the boot there are two recesses closed by a lid.
To open the cover, press button (A) andturn it downwards. As optional for versions/markets where applicable, the oddment compartment on the left-hand side canbe provided with CD-Changer.

A0B0091m

A0B0092m

Alfawiki.nl

284

fig. 18

fig. 19

This is on the left-hand side of the boot.
To use the socket, open the lid (A). The
socket is supplied with the ignition switch at
MAR and can only be used with accessories
that absorb a maximum of 15A (power
180W).

Do not connect accessories with higher absorption to the socket. Prolonged current absorption mightdrain the battery preventing theengine from being started.

A0B0093m

OBJECTS RETAINER NET(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
The net can be hooked in different positions (fig. 24-25-26-27) using housings (A and B-fig. 21) provided in thefront part of the boot and housings (C and
D-fig. 22) in the rear part.

A0B0101m

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGONCURRENT SOCKET(optional for versions/markets
where applicable) (fig. 20)

A0B0102m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 20

fig. 21

fig. 22285

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON

To fasten the net, insert the hooks (Afig. 23) in the housings (B-fig. 23) andpush downwards.

To release the net, pull it upwards keeping
the connection point pressed (C-fig. 23).

A0B0104m

fig. 24

A0B0106m

fig. 26

A0B0103m

A0B0601m

A0B0602m

Alfawiki.nl

286 fig. 23

fig. 25

fig. 27

The luggage cover (A-fig. 28) can berolled up and removed.
To roll, remove the two rear pins (Bfig. 29) from their housings.
WARNING Accompany the cover whenrolling, holding it by the handle (C-fig. 28).

To remove the cover roll it and check thatthe passenger compartment separation net
is also rolled (see following paragraph), thenpull the hooks back (A-fig. 30). Raise andremove the cover from the boot.
To put the cover back on, insert the endsof the reel in the respective housings, making sure that the catches are correctly locked
forwards making the green symbols at thebase of the actual button visible, then pullit by the handle (C-fig. 28) and hook thetwo rear pins (B-fig. 29).

A0B0603m

To avoid damage to thecover do not rest any objects on it.

WARNINGIn the event of an accident
or abrupt braking any objects on top of the cover might bethrown into the passenger compartment, with the risk of harming
the occupants; use of the passenger compartment separation net isrecommended.

A0B0109m

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON

LUGGAGE COVER

A0B0604m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 28

fig. 29

fig. 30287

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGONUPPER PASSENGERCOMPARTMENT SEPARATION
NET (where required)(fig. 31-32)

To rewind the net, release the ends fromthe housings (B) and accompany it as it
winds.

The upper separation net between the passenger compartment and the boot is contained in the luggage cover reel (A).

LOWER PASSENGERCOMPARTMENT SEPARATION
NET (fig. 33-34)(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
The lower passenger compartment andboot separation net (A) is contained in thereel fastened under the housing of the luggage cover.

To lay the net, remove it from the reel andhook the ends in the two housings (B).

To lay the net remove it from the reel andfasten the hooks (B) to the rings (C).

A0B0111m

A0B0112m

A0B0113m

Alfawiki.nl

288 fig. 31

fig. 32

fig. 33

EXTENDING THE BOOT

2/3 Partial extension (fig. 36)

The split rear seat makes partial (1/3 or
2/3) or total extension of the boot possible.

Extension of the right-hand side of the bootmakes it possible to carry one passenger on
the left-hand part of the rear seat.

To use the maximum loading volume, remove the luggage cover following the instructions given in the corresponding paragraph.
1/3 Partial extension (fig. 35)
Extension of the left-hand side of the bootmakes it possible to carry two passengers
on the right-hand part of the rear seat.

A0B0114m

A0B0605m

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON

To rewind the net, release the hooks (B)from the rings (C) and accompany it while
it winds.

A0B0606m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 34

fig. 35

fig. 36289

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON

Total extension (fig. 37)

To extend the bootCompletely folding the rear seat makes the
maximum load volume available.

– Check that the lateral safety belt buckles (A-fig. 38) are located in their pockets on the seat back and that the tab (Bfig. 38) of the central abdominal safety
belts is hooked onto the support (Cfig. 38).
– Remove the roll with the luggage cover.

– Tilt the cushions forward pulling fromthe handle (A-fig. 39) at the centre ofeach cushion.
– remove the side headrests from the rearseat and insert them in the special housingson the cushions (fig. 40).
– If the car is fitted with the third headrest from the centre of the seat, lower it
completely.
A0B0119m

fig. 39
A0B0607m

A0B0118m

A0B0120m

Alfawiki.nl

290 fig. 37

fig. 38

fig. 40

– Fold the seat backs forward to obtaina single loading surface with the boot floor.

To take the seats back to thenormal position– Move the seat backs to the vertical position making sure that they are caught correctly.
WARNING The seat backs are correctly caught when the button (A-fig. 43)
next to each handle (B-fig. 43) is back in
the handle.

A0B0121m– Remove the headrest and tilt the cushion backward, making sure that the safety
belts do not remain twisted in the hidden
section between the cushion and seat back.
– Refit the headrest on the seat back.
– Refit the roll with the luggage cover.

A0B0122m

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON– Release the seat back catch raising thehandle (A-fig. 41) for the right seat backand handle (B-fig. 42) for the left seatback.

A0B0123m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 41

fig. 42

fig. 43291

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON

INTERNAL FITTINGSREFUELLING

GRAB HANDLES (fig. 44)

EMERGENCY FUEL FLAPOPENING (fig. 45)

There are two grab handles in correspondence with the front doors.
Two grab handles (A) are located above
the rear doors fitted with a coat hook (B).

ROOF BARS SKI RACK

(fig. 46) (optional for versions/markets where applicable)

If the fuel flap opening lever fails to work,pull the emergency cord (A) on the righthand side of the boot.

The car may be fitted with two longitudinal bars that can be used, with the addition of specific accessories, for carrying various items (skis, windsurf boards, etc.).

Never exceed the maximum permissible loads given in the “Technical specifications” chapter.

A0B0124m

A0B0125m

A0B0126m

Alfawiki.nl

292 fig. 44

fig. 45

fig. 46(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
The fixed sound system, with cassette
player (radio with cassette player) or CD
player with parametric sound equalizer(radio with CD player) has been designed
to suit the specific characteristics of thepassenger compartment, with apersonalised design that matches thestyle of the dashboard. The sound system
instructions for use are described in theattached supplement.

AUTOMATIC REARGEOMETRY CONTROL(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)

The car is fitted with a semi-bearing hydropneumatic system with built-in self-levelling functions (due to an active element incorporated in the rear shock absorbers) anddamping, applied to the rear suspensions instead of conventional shock absorbers.
When the car is loaded with passengers
and luggage, the rear geometry lowers in
relation to the rigidity of the spring systemand the load. However, as soon as the car
moves off the system utilises the movements induced on the wheels by the roughness of the road surface to increase its bearing capacity and higher the body up to apre-established position that will be kept under any load condition.

The distance that must be covered to reachthe levelling condition is approx. 2,000 metres and it may vary depending on the roadbottom.

WARNING
When using the boot, never exceed the maximum
permissible loads given in the“Technical specifications” chapter.
The load carried and its arrangement in the boot modify road holding of the car in any case even if
the geometry is kept constant by
the automatic device.

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON

SOUND SYSTEM

Alfawiki.nl

293

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON

IN THE EVENTOF A PUNCTURE

TOOL AND SPARE WHEEL
HOUSING(for versions/markets whererequired) (fig. 47)

WARNING If the car is equipped with
“Fix&Go kit for tyre quick repair”, see theinstructions contained in the “In emergency”
chapter.

The tools and spare wheels are housed in
the boot floor, under the mat. To gain
access to them, raise or remove the bootmat using the handle (A-fig. 47).
To take the container with the tools (B)slacken the handle (C).
The spare wheel (D) can be taken after
removing the container with the tools.

IF AN EXTERIOR
LIGHT GOES OUTWARNING Before changing a bulb, read
the warnings and precautions given in thechapter “In an emergency”.
REVERSING LIGHTS AND REAR
FOG GUARDS
To change the bulbs (Type B, 21W):– Open the tailgate.
– Remove the cover (A or B-fig. 48) incorrespondence with the light concerned,
withdrawing it at the side.

A0B0127m

A0B0128m

Alfawiki.nl

294 fig. 47

fig. 48

– Remove and replace the bulb concerned (spherical with bayonet coupling)pressing lightly and turning counterclockwise (fig. 50):

– Reinsert the bulb holder unit fitting it correctly between the retainer tabs (E-fig. 49)

DIRECTION INDICATORS AND
SIDE/STOP LIGHTS– Refit the lid (A or B-fig. 48) inserting
it from outside until it fits in.

To replace the bulbs (Type B, 21W direction indicators, 5/21W side/stop lights):– Open the tailgate.
– Slacken the two fastening nuts (Afig. 51) and remove the protective cover(B-fig. 51).

(F) reversing light bulb(G) rear fog guard bulb

A0B0129m

A0B0130m

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON– Remove the bulb holder unit (Dfig. 49) pressing on the retainer tabs (Efig. 49).

A0B0131m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 49

fig. 50

fig. 51295

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON– Remove the bulb holder unit (Afig. 52) pressing on the retainer tab (Bfig. 52).
– Remove and replace the bulb concerned (spherical with bayonet coupling)pressing lightly and turning counterclockwise (fig. 56):(C) side light/stop light

NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS– Refit the bulb holder (C-fig. 55) turning clockwise.

To replace the bulbs (Type A, 5W):
– Remove the number plate light unit using a flat-tipped screwdriver protected by asoft cloth on the catch (A-fig. 54).

– Refit the complete unit (B-fig. 54)
firstly inserting the catches and then pressing in correspondence with the stopper (Afig. 54).

– Remove the unit (B-fig. 54).
– Remove the bulb holder (C-fig. 55)
turning clockwise and replace the bulb
(D-fig. 55) which snaps on.

(D) direction indicator.

A0B0134m– Reinsert the bulb holder unit fitting theretainer tabs correctly (B-fig. 52).
– Refit the protective cover (B-fig. 51)
fastening with nuts (A-fig. 51).

fig. 54
A0B0132m

A0B0133m

A0B0135m

Alfawiki.nl

296 fig. 52

fig. 53

fig. 55

The additional stop light is built into therear spoiler (fig. 56).
Refer to the Alfa Romeo Authorized Services for its replacement.

IF AN INTERIOR
LIGHTS GOES OUT– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 58) pullingoutwards and releasing it from the side contacts.

WARNING Before changing a bulb, read
the warnings and precautions given in thechapter “In an emergency”.

– Insert the new bulb fitting it correctly between the contacts.
– Refit the light inserting it and then pressing until the catch clicks into place.

TAILGATE LIGHT
To change the bulb (Type C, 10W):

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGONADDITIONAL STOP LIGHTS(3rd STOP)– Open the tailgate.
– Remove the light (A-fig. 57) leveringwith a flat-tipped screwdriver in the point
shown.

A0B0136m

A0B0139m

A0B0140m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 56

fig. 57

fig. 58

297

ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON

IF A FUSE BLOWS

System/Component

The specific fuse for Sportwagon versions
is located in the central fuseholder above themain fusebox and access to it is gained removing the protective panel.

Additional current
socket in the boot

WARNING Before changing a fuse or relay, read the warnings and precautions given in the chapter “In an emergency”.

A0B0141m

Alfawiki.nl

298 fig. 59

Fuse no.

Amperage

Location

10

20A

fig. 59

IDENTIFICATION DATABODY LABELENGINE LABELS

The body label carrying the following information is located in the engine bay to one
side of the right-hand shock absorber upper connection:

On the rear left-hand side, gearbox side.

The identification data should be recorded.
The identification data is carried on labels located in the following positions (fig. 1-2):
1 - Identification label– Type of vehicle: ZAR 932000

2 - Body label– Manufacturer’s serial number (chassis
number).

3 - Bodywork paint identification label- Saloon versions = fig. 1- Sportwagon versions = fig. 2
4 - Engine label.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONST E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N S

For some versions/markets the marking
is partially covered by a protection. To see
the marking completely, remove the capturning counter-clockwise and raise the protection.

A0B0590m

A0B0058m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 1

fig. 2

299

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSBODYWORK PAINT
IDENTIFICATION LABELIDENTIFICATION LABEL

On the Saloon versions, the plate is applied in the internal part of the luggage compartment (3-fig. 1), while on the Sportwagon versions it is applied on the righthand internal edge of the tailgate (3fig. 2). The plate carries the following data (fig. 3):
A. Paint manufacturer
B.

Name of colour

C.

Colour code

This is located in the engine bay on thefront crossmember (fig. 4).
It carries the following identification data:
A. Space for details of national homologation
B. Space for punching the consecutive
chassis number
C. Space available for maximum
weights authorised by various national laws

D. Colour code for touching up and respraying.

A0B0059m

A0B0076m

Alfawiki.nl

300 fig. 3

fig. 4

D. Space for version and any supplementary indications to those specified
E. Space for smoke index (diesel versions only)
F. Space for punching manufacturer’sname.

Engine code

Body code(Saloon versions)(Sportwagon versions)

1.6 T.SPARK

AR32104
AR32103 (*)

932A4100 31L
932A4100 31H (*)
932A4B00 32F (*)

932B4100 38H
932B4100 38G (*)
932B4B00 39E (*)

1.8 T.SPARK

AR32205

932A3100 30L
932A3100 30H (*)

932B3100 37H
932B3100 37G (*)

2.0 JTS

937A1000
932A2000 (*)

932AXA00 52E
932AXA00 52D (*)

932BXA00 53E
932BXA00 53D (*)

2.0 JTS Selespeed

937A1000
932A2000 (*)

932AXA01 54E
932AXA01 54D (*)

932BXA01 55E
932BXA01 55D (*)

2.5 V6 24VAR32405

932A1100 26F

932B1100 33E

2.5 V6 24V Q-System

AR32405

932A1101 27F

932B1101 34E

JTD

937A2000

932A2C00 44G

932B2C00 45F

JTD 16V Multijet

192A5000
937A5000 (**)
937A4000 (*)
192B1000 (*)

932AXE00 60E
932AXN00 71 (**)
932AXG00 62C (*)
932AXL0066 (*)

932BXE00 61E
932BXN00 72 (**)
932BXG00 63C (*)
932BXL00 67 (*)

JTD 20V Multijet

841G000
841M000

932AXF00 64B
932AXM00 68 (*)

932BXF00 65C
932BXM00 69 (*)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSENGINE AND BODY VERSION CODES(*) Version for specific markets(**) 150 CV version (for versions/markets where applicable)

Alfawiki.nl

301

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSENGINE
1.6 T.SPARK

1.8 T.SPARK

2.0 JTS

2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.5 V6 24V

2.5 V6 24V
Q-System

AR32104

AR32205

937A1000

937A1000

AR32405

AR32405

Cycle

Otto

Otto

Otto

Otto

Otto

Otto

No./position cylinders

4 in line

4 in line

4 in line

4 in line

6 in 60° V

6 in 60° V

82 x 75.65

82 x 82.7

83 x 91

83 x 91

88 x 68.3

88 x 68.3

1598 cm3

1747 cm3

1970 cm3

1970 cm3

2492 cm3

2492 cm3

kW
HP
rpm

88
120
6200

103
140
6500

121
165
6400

121
165
6400

141
192
6300

141
192
6300

Nm
kgm
rpm

146
14.9
4200

163
16.6
3900

206
21
3250

206
21
3250

218
22.2
5000

218
22.2
5000

NGK PFR6B +NGK PMR7ANGK BKR6EKPA +NGK PMR7ANGK PFR6B +NGK PMR7ANGK BKR6EKPA +NGK PMR7ANGK PFR6BNGK PFR6BNGK R PFR6BNGK R PFR6BNGK BKR6EKPANGK BKR6EKPA

Unleaded
petrol95 RON(specification
EN228)

Unleaded
petrol95 RON(specification
EN228)

Unleaded
petrol95 RON(specification
EN228)

Unleaded
petrol95 RON(specification
EN228)

Unleaded
petrol95 RON(specification
EN228)

Unleaded
petrol95 RON(specification
EN228)

Code type

Pistonbore and strokemm

Total displacement
Maximum horsepower(EEC):
at
Maximum torque (EEC):
at
Spark plugs (*)

Fuel

Alfawiki.nl

302

JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD 16V
Multijet (**)

JTD 16V
Multijet (*)

JTD 16V
Multijet (*)

JTD 20V
Multijet

JTD 20V
Multijet (*)

Code type

937A2000

192A5000

937A5000

937A4000

192B1000

841G000

841M000

Cycle

DieselDieselDieselDieselDieselDieselDieselNo./position cylinders

4 in line

4 in line

4 in line

4 in line

4 in line

5 in line

4 in line

82 x 90.4

82 x 90.4

82 x 90.4

82 x 90.4

82 x 90.4

82 x 90.4

82 x 90.4

1910 cm3

1910 cm3

1910 cm3

1910 cm3

1910 cm3

2387 cm3

2387 cm3

kW
HP
rpm

85
115
4000

103
140
4000

110
150
4000

93
126
4000

100
136
4000

129
175
4000

120
163
4000

Nm
kgm
rpm

275
28
2000

305
31
2000

305
31
2000

305
31
2000

305
31
2000

385
39.3
2000

385
39.3
2000

Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles(Specification
EN590)

Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles(Specification
EN590)

Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles(Specification
EN590)

Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles(Specification
EN590)

Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles(Specification
EN590)

Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles(Specification
EN590)

Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles(Specification
EN590)

Piston bore and strokemm

Total displacement
Maximum horsepower(EEC):at

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

JTDMaximum torque (EEC):at
Fuel(*) Version for specific markets(**) For versions/markets where applicable

Alfawiki.nl

303

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFUEL SUPPLY
1.6 T.SPARK
1.8 T.SPARK

2.0 JTS

2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.5 V6 24V

2.5 V6 24V
Q-System

JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD 20V
MultijetSupplyElectronic
injection
Multi Point

Direct injection
BOSCH

Direct injection
BOSCH

Electronic
injection
Multi Point

Electronic
injection
Multi Point

Direct injection
BOSCH
COMMON RAIL

Direct injection
BOSCH
COMMON RAIL

Firing order

1-3-4-2

1-3-4-2

1-3-4-2

1-4-2-5-3-6

1-4-2-5-3-6––

Injection order

–

–

–

–

–

1-3-4-2

1-2-4-5-3

WARNING
Alterations or repairs to the supply system not carried out correctly or without taking account of thetechnical specifications of the system, may cause abnormal functioning with the risk of fire.

TRANSMISSION

304

1.6 T.SPARK - 1.8 T.SPARK
2.0 JTS

2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.5 V6 24V

2.5 V6 24V
Q-System

JTD

JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD 20V
Multijet

GearboxFive forward gears
plus reverse withsynchronisers
for forward speeds

Five forward
gears andreversewithelectronic
control

Six forward
gears plus
reverse allsynchronised

Four forward
gears
plus reverse
withelectronic
control

Five forward
gears
plus reverse
allsynchronised

Six forward
gears
plus reverse
allsynchronised

Six forward
gears
plus reverse
allsynchronised

ClutchDry single disk
with hydraulic control

Drysingle disk
withelectrohydrauliccontrolDrysingle disk
withhydrauliccontrol

Lock-upDrysingle disk
with hydrauliccontrolDrysingle disk
with hydrauliccontrolDrysingle disk
with hydrauliccontrol

Drive

Front

Front

Front

Front

Front

Front

Front

Alfawiki.nl

If examined by an expert eye, the appearance of a spark plug is a sound clue
for locating a fault, even if not involving theignition system. Therefore if you are experiencing any engine problems, it is important to have the spark plugs checked by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Clean, intact spark plugs are determinantwith regard to engine efficiency and for reducing the emission of pollutants.

Spark plugs should be replaced at the intervals
specified in the Scheduled
Maintenance Programme. Only use
spark plugs of the specified type: if
the thermal capacity is inadequate
or if the envisaged life is not guaranteed inconveniences may ensue.

BRAKES

Service brakes:– front

1.6 T.SPARK

1.8 T.SPARK

2.0 JTS

2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.5 V6 24V

2.5 V6 24V
Q-System

JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD 20V
MultijetSelf-ventilated
disk
Disk

Self-ventilated
disk
Disk

Self-ventilated
disk
Disk

Self-ventilated
disk
Disk

Self-ventilated
disk
Disk

Self-ventilated
disk
Disk

Self-ventilated
disk
Disk

Self-ventilated
disk
Disk

– rearTECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSSPARK PLUG

Wheel anti-look system (ABS) with electronic braking distribution.
Servo-brake. Electronic control with brake pad wear sensors. Gasket of ecological type.

Parking brakeControlled by hand lever operating rear brakes.

STEERING
1.6 T.SPARK

1.8 T.SPARK

2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.5 V6 24V

2.5 V6 24V
Q-System

JTD-JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD 20V
Multijet

11.1 m

11.1

Rack and pinion.
Hydraulic power steering with liquid reservoir in engine compartment

Type
Turning radius(between pavements)

2.0 JTS11.1 m11.1 m11.1 mAlfawiki.nl
11.1 m

11.6 m

11.6 m305

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWHEELS AND TYRES
1.6 T.SPARKIMPRESSION

Versions

1.6 T.SPARKPROGRESSION

1.6 T.SPARKDISTINCTIVE

1.8 T.SPARKIMPRESSION

1.8 T.SPARKPROGRESSION

1.8 T.SPARKDISTINCTIVE

Standard fittings
Steel wheel
Tyres

6J x 15”
6J x 15”
185/65 R15” 88H (▼) 185/65 R15” 88H (▼)

Alloy wheel
Tyres
Spare
wheel:

6J x 15”
6J x 15”
185/65 R15” 88V (▼) 185/65 R15” 88V (▼)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)– rim– tyre4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

Optional fittings
Alloy wheel
Tyre
Alloy wheel
Tyres
Alloy wheel
Tyres

6,5J x 15”
6,5J x 15” (❒)
205/60 R15” 91V (▼) 205/60 R15” 91V (▼)

6,5J x 15”
6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼) 205/60 R15” 91V (▼)

6,5J x 16” (❒)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●) 205/55 R16” 91V (●)
7J x 17 ”
215/45 ZR17 (*)

7J x 17”215/45 ZR17“ (*)

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)

7J x 17”215/45 ZR17“ (*)

7J x 17”215/45 ZR17“ (*)(*) = Snow chains may not be used on this tyres(●) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.
(▼) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.
(❒) = Excluding Sportwagon versions
Winter tyres: winter tyres with “Q” min. speed index can be used.

Alfawiki.nl

306

2.0 JTSIMPRESSION

2.0 JTSPROGRESSION

2.0 JTSDISTINCTIVE

2.0 JTS Selespeed
PROGRESSION

2.0 JTS Selespeed
DISTINCTIVE

2.5 V6 24V
PROGRESSION

Standard fittings
Steel wheel
Tyres

6J x 15”
6,5J x 15”
185/65 R15” 88V (▼) 205/60 R15” 91V (▼)

Alloy wheel
Tyres

Spare
wheel:

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)– rim– tyre4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91W (▼)

6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼)

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Versions

Optional fittings
Alloy wheel
Tyre

6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼)

6,5J x 15”
6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼) 205/60 R15” 91V (▼)

6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91W (▼)

Alloy wheel
Tyre

6,5J x 16”
6,5J x 16”
6,5J x 16”
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●) 205/55 R16” 91V (●) 205/55 R16” 91V (●) 205/55 R16” 91V (●)

Alloy wheel
Tyres

7J x 17”215/45 ZR17“ (*)

7J x 17”215/45 ZR17“ (*)

7J x 17”215/45 ZR17” (*)

7J x 17”215/45 ZR17” (*)

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91W (●)
7J x 17”215/45 ZR17” (*)(*) = Snow chains may not be used on this tyres(●) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.
(▼) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.
Winter tyres: winter tyres with “Q” min. speed index can be used.

Alfawiki.nl

307

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Versions

2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
PROGRESSION

2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
DISTINCTIVE

2.5 V6 24V
DISTINCTIVE

JTD
IMPRESSIONJTD
PROGRESSION

Standard fittings
Steel wheel
Tyres
Alloy wheel
Tyres
Spare wheel:– rim– tyre6J x 15”
6J x 15”
185/65 R15” 88V (▼) 185/65 R15” 88V (▼)

6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91W (▼)

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91W (●)

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91W (●)

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

Optional fittings
Alloy wheel
Tyre

6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91W (▼)

Alloy wheel
Tyres

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91W (●)

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91W (●)

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91W (●)

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)

Alloy wheel
Tyres

7J x 17”215/45 ZR17” (*)

7J x 17”215/45 ZR17” (*)

7J x 17”215/45 ZR17” (*)

7J x 17”215/45 ZR17“ (*)

7J x 17”215/45 ZR17“ (*)

6,5J x 15”
6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼) 205/60 R15” 91V (▼)(*) = Snow chains may not be used on this tyres(●) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.
(▼) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.
Winter tyres: winter tyres with “Q” min. speed index can be used.

Alfawiki.nl

308

JTD
DISTINCTIVE

JTD 16V Multijet
IMPRESSION

JTD 16V Multijet
PROGRESSION

6J x 15”
185/65 R15” 88V (▼)

6J x 15”
185/65 R15” 88V (▼)

JTD 16V Multijet
DISTINCTIVE

JTD 20V Multijet
PROGRESSION

JTD 20V Multijet
DISTINCTIVE

Standard fittings
Steel wheel
Tyres
Alloy wheel
Tyres
Spare wheel:– rim– tyre6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼)

6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼)

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M

Optional fittings
Alloy wheel
Tyre

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Versions

6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼)

Alloy wheel
Tyres

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)

6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)

Alloy wheel
Tyres

7J x 17”215/45 ZR17“ (*)

7J x 17”215/45 ZR17“ (*)

7J x 17”215/45 ZR17“ (*)

7J x 17”215/45 ZR17“ (*)(*) = Snow chains may not be used on this tyres(●) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.
(▼) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.
Winter tyres: winter tyres with “Q” min. speed index can be used.

Alfawiki.nl

309

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSTYRE INFLATION PRESSURES COLD
Tyres
185/65 R15” (▼)

Tyres
205/55 R16” (●)

Tyres
205/60 R15” (▼)

front

rear

front

rear

front

rear

front

rear

Reduced load (2 occupants) bar

2.2

2.2

2.4

2.4

2.2

2.2

2.4

2.4

Full load

2.5

2.5

2.6

2.6

2.5

2.5

2.6

2.6

bar

Compact sparewheel
125/80 R15”

4.2(*) = Snow chains may not be used on this tyres(●) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.
(▼) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.
With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified rating. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.
With winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0.2 bar compared with the specified rating.

RIMS AND TYRES
Pressed steel or alloy rims.
Radial Tubeless tyres.

While the specified dimensions remain thesame, for driving safety, the vehicle mustbe fitted with tyres of the same brand andtype on all wheels.

The Log book shows all the homologatedtyres.
WARNING In the event of any discrepancies between this Handbook and the vehicle Log Book, only the latter should be considered.

Alfawiki.nl

310

Tyres
215/45 ZR17” (*)

WARNING Do not use inner tubes with
Tubeless tyres.

205 = Nominal width (S, distancein mm between the sides).

Below are the instructions necessary toknow the meaning of the code stamped on
the tyre.

60= Percentage height/width (H/S)
ratio.

R= Radial tyre.

ZR= Radial tyre with speed above
240 kph.

15= Rim diameter in inches. (Ø).

91

= Load index (capacity), e.g. 91 =615 kg. Not present in ZR tyres.

The code may be like one of the examples
given below.

Example:205/60 R 15 91V

V,Z = Maximum speed index. In ZR tyres
the speed index Z is before the R.

or:
215/45 ZR 17

A0B0395m

Load index (capacity)
60 = 250 kg
61 = 257 kg
62 = 265 kg
63 = 272 kg
64 = 280 kg
65 = 290 kg
66 = 300 kg
67 = 307 kg
68 = 315 kg
69 = 325 kg
70 = 335 kg
71 = 345 kg
72 = 355 kg
73 = 365 kg
74 = 375 kg
75 = 387 kg
76 = 400 kg
77 = 412 kg
78 = 425 kg
79 = 437 kg
80 = 450 kg
81 = 462 kg
82 = 475 kg
83 = 487 kg

84 = 500 kg
85 = 515 kg
86 = 530 kg
87 = 545 kg
88 = 560 kg
89 = 580 kg
90 = 600 kg
91 = 615 kg
92 = 630 kg
93 = 650 kg
94 = 670 kg
95 = 690 kg
96 = 710 kg
97 = 730 kg
98 = 750 kg
99 = 775 kg
100 = 800 kg
101 = 825 kg
102 = 850 kg
103 = 875 kg
104 = 900 kg
105 = 925 kg
106 = 950 kg

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSCORRECT TYRE READING(fig. 5)

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 5311

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum speed index
Q = up to 160 km/h.
R= up to 170 km/h.

S= up to 180 km/h.

T= up to 190 km/h.

Maximum speed index for snowtyres
Q M + S = up to 160 kph.
T M + S = up to 190 kph.

COMPACT SPARE WHEEL

H = up to 210 km/h.

Pressed steel rim.

V = up to 210 km/h.

Tubeless tyre.

ZR = up to 240 km/h.

For specific markets normally-sized spare
wheel.

Y

Below are the instructions necessary toknow the meaning of the code stamped on
the rim, as shown in fig. 5.

H M + S = up to 210 kph.

U = up to 200 km/h.

W = up to 270 km/h.

CORRECT RIM READING= up to 300 km/h.

Example:6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 43

6.5= rim width in inches (1)J= rim drop centre outline (sideprojection where the tyre beadrests (2)16

= rim nominal diameter in inches(corresponds to diameter of thetyre to be mounted) (3 = Ø)H2

= “hump” shape and number (relief on the circumference holding the Tubeless tyre bead on
the rim)ET 43 = camber angle (distance between disk/rim line and wheel
rim centre line)

Alfawiki.nl

312

Front wheels:

All types(excluding versions with Sports Kit)

Sports Kit– camber– 0° 39´ ± 20´– 1° 6’ ± 20’– caster

3° 55´ ± 30´

4° 3’ ± 30’– toe-in– 1 ± 0.6 mm (*) (– 9 ± 5´ mm)– 0 ± 0.6mm (*) (– 0’ ± 5’)– camber– 35´ ± 20´– 1°7’ ± 20’– toe-in

3 ± 1 mm (*) (27´ ± 9´)

3 ± 1 mm (*) (27’± 9’)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWHEEL GEOMETRY

Rear wheels:(*) The toe-in value, primes to mm conversion, is always calculated taking into account a 15" rim regardless of rims actually used. Should it be impossible toset the 15" rim at the test bench, refer to primes value. The toe-in value, tolerance included, shall always be evenly distributed between the two wheels.

Alfawiki.nl

313

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSPERFORMANCE
JTD

JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD 16V
Multijet (*)

JTD 20V
Multijet

227 km/h

195 km/h

209 km/h

212 km/h

225 km/h

7.3 s

8.5 s

10.3 s

9.3 s

9.1 s

8.3 s

27.8 s

29.0 s32.6 s31 s30.0 s29.1 s

JTD

JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD 16V
Multijet (*)

JTD 20V
Multijet

SALOONVERSIONS

1.6
T.SPARK

1.8
T.SPARK

2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.5 V6 24V 2.5 V6 24V
Q-System

Maximum speed

200 km/h

208 km/h

220 km/h

230 km/h

Accelerationfrom 0-100 km/h

10.5 s

9.4 s

8.2 s

Kilometer withstanding start

31.8 s30.7 s29.8 s(*) 150 CV version (for versions/markets where applicable)

SPORTWAGONVERSIONS

1.6
T.SPARK

1.8
T.SPARK

2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.5 V6 24V 2.5 V6 24V
Q-System

Maximum speed

200 km/h

208 km/h

220 km/h

230 km/h

227 km/h

195 km/h

209 km/h

212 km/h

225 km/h

Accelerationfrom 0-100 km/h

11.0 s

9.7 s

8.2 s

7.4 s

8.5 s

10.7 s

9.7 s

9.5 s

8.6 s

Kilometer withstanding start

32.3 s31.0 s29.8 s27.9 s29.2 s32.9 s31.3 s30.3 s29.4 s(*) 150 CV version (for versions/markets where applicable)

Alfawiki.nl

314

fig. 6TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSDIMENSIONS

A0A0591m

The values given in brackets refer to the 1.6 T.SPARK, 1.8 T.SPARK, JTD, JTD 16V Multijet and JTD 20V Multijet
The dimensions are expressed in mm
The height indicated is for an unladen car

Alfawiki.nl
On request for versions/markets where applicable the car may
be fitted with rear spoiler and miniskirts painted the same colour as the car.

315

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A0A0592m

fig. 7The values given in brackets refer to the 1.6 T.SPARK, 1.8 T.SPARK, JTD, JTD 16V Multijet and JTD 20V Multijet
The dimensions are expressed in mm
The height indicated is for an unladen car.

316

Alfawiki.nl

Capacity (dm3)

1.6 T.SPARK

1.8 T.SPARK

2.0 JTS

2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.5 V6 24V

2.5 V6 24V
Q-System

JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD 20V
Multijet

378

378

378

378

378

378

378

378

JTD

JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD 20V
Multijet

WEIGHTS - SALOON VERSIONS
1.6
T.SPARK

1.8
T.SPARK

2.0 JTS

2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.5 V6 24V 2.5 V6 24V
Q-SystemKerbweight1265 kg

1265 kg

1285 kg

1285 kg

1355 kg

1385 kg

1305 kg

1305 kg

1305 kg

Max. permitted
weight (*)

1785 kg

1785 kg

1805 kg

1805 kg

1855 kg1885 kg

1805 kg

1805 kg1885 kg

Payload including
driver (**)

520 kg520 kg520 kg520 kg

500 kg

500 kg

500 kg

500 kg

500 kgTowable weight

1300 kg

1300 kg

1300 kg

1300 kg

1400 kg

1400 kg

1300 kg

1300 kg

1300 kg

Max. load on ball

60 kg

60 kg

60 kg

60 kg

60 kg

60 kg

60 kg

60 kg

60 kg

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSLUGGAGE COMPARTMENT - SALOON VERSIONS(*) Weight not to be exceeded. The Driver must arrange the goods in the luggage compartment and/or load surface so that they comply with these limits.
(**) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch etc.) the unladen weight increases, thus reducing the payload as specified in the maximum weightallowed.

Alfawiki.nl

317

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSLUGGAGE COMPARTMENT - SPORTWAGON VERSIONS
1.6 T.SPARK

1.8 T.SPARK

2.0 JTS

2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.5 V6 24V

2.5 V6 24V
Q-System

JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD 20V
Multijet

Capacity (dm3)

360

360

360

360

360

360

360

360

Capacity withrear seat backfolded (dm3)

1180

1180

1180

1180

1180

1180

1180

1180

JTD

JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD 20V
Multijet

WEIGHTS - SPORTWAGON VERSIONS
T.SPARK

1.8
T.SPARK

2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.5 V6 24V 2.5 V6 24V
Q-System

Kerb weight

kg

1315

1315

1335

1405

1435

1355

1355

1435

Max. permitted
weight (*)

kg

1830

1830

1850

1900

1930

1850

1850

1930

Payload including
driver (**)

kg

515

515

515

495

495

495

495

495

Towable weight

kg

1300

1300

1300

1400

1400

1300

1300

1400

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

Max. load on ball(*) Weight not to be exceeded. The Driver must arrange the goods in the luggage compartment and/or load surface so that they comply with these limits.
(**) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch etc.) the unladen weight increases, thus reducing the payload as specified in the maximum weight allowed.

Alfawiki.nl

318

1.6
1.8
T.SPARK T.SPARK

2.0 JTS

2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.5 V624V

2.5 V624V
Q-System

JTD

JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD 20V
MultijetSpecified fuels
Recommended products

Fuel tank:litres– including a reserve of litres

63 ●
9●

63 ●
9●

63 ●
9●

63 ●
9●

63 ●
9●

63 ●
9●

63 ❍
9❍

63 ❍
9❍

63 ❍
9❍

● Unleaded petrol at notless than 95 R.O.N(specification EN228)❍ Diesel fuel for motor
vehicles (Specification EN590)

Engine coolingsystem

6.9

6.9

6.9

6.9

9.2

9.2

6.1

6.1

7.25

litresMixture of distilled water and
PARAFLU 11 (blue) at 50% or
PARAFLU UP (red) at 50%

Oil sump and filter

litres

4.4 ■

4.4 ■

4.4 ◆

4.4 ◆

5.9 ■

5.9 ■

4.5 ❑

4.5 ❑

5❑

■ SELENIA 20K for Alfa
Romeo
◆ SELENIA RACING❑ SELENIA WR

Mechanical gearbox/
differential

litres

2

2

2

2

–

–

2

2

3.1

Mechanical gearbox/
differential

litres

–

–

–

–

2

–

–

–

–

Selespeed gearbox
actuation hydraulic systemlitres

–

–

–

0.6

–

–

–

–

–

TUTELA CAR CS SPEED

Q-Systemautomatic gearbox

litres

–

–

–

–

–

3.8

–

–

–

TUTELA GI/2

Windscreen washer andrearscreen washer fluid
reservoir:
litres– with headlamp washer litres

2,5
5.3

2,5
5.3

2,5
5.3

2,5
5.3

2,5
5.3

2,5
5.3

2,5
5.3

2,5
5.3

2,5
5.3

Mixture of water and liquid
TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSREFILLING

TUTELA CAR
ZC 75 Synth
TUTELA CAR MATRYX■ For decidedly sportive use of the car, fully synthetic SELENIA RACING
SAE 10W-60 engine oil is recommended.
Alfawiki.nl
For use in particularly harsh weather conditions SELENIA PERFORMER MULTIPOWER SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended.

319

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
USABLE PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS

UseLubricants for petrolengines 2.0 JTS
and 2.0 JTS Selespeed

Lubricants for
petrol engines (*)

Quality features of fluids and lubricants
for correct vehicle operation

Synthetic oil, SAE 10W-60 grade

SELENIA RACING

Synthetic-based engine oil, SAE 10W-40 gradethat pass ACEA A3 and API SL specifications.

SELENIA 20K
for Alfa Romeo

Synthetic-based engine oil SAE 5W-30 grade,that pass API SL, ACEA A1-A5, FIAT 9.55535-M1 specifications.

Synthetic-based engine oils SAE 5W-40 gradethat pass ACEA B4 and API CF, FIAT 9.55535-M2 specifications.

Applications

SELENIA PERFORMERMULTIPOWER

SELENIA WR
A0B0682m

Lubricants fordiesel engines

Recommended fluids
and lubricants(*) For decidedly sportive use of the car fully synthetic SELENIA RACING SAE 10W60 engine oil is recommended.
For use in particularly harsh weather conditions SELENIA PERFORMER MULTIPOWER SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended.
SELENIA PERFORMER MULTIPOWER is not required when using SELENIA RACING 10W-60 engine oil.

Alfawiki.nl

320

WARNING Do not top up with oil with different specifications that the oil already in the engine.

Quality features of fluids and lubricants
for correct vehicle operation

Recommended fluids
and lubricantsApplications

Synthetic-based engine oil, SAE 75W-80 EP grade that passes API GL5
and MIL-L-2105 D Lev specifications

TUTELA CAR
ZC 75 Synth

Mechanical gearbox anddifferential

SAE 75W-85 completly synthetic engine oil.
Meets API GL 4 and ZF TE ML06 (B&C) LEVEL, ALLISON C4 specifications

TUTELA CAR
MATRYX

Mechanical gearbox anddifferential for hightemperatures“ATF DEXRON II D LEV”, type oil

TUTELA GI/2

Automatic gearbox“ATF DEXRON III” type specific oil

TUTELA CAR
CS SPEED

Selespeed transmission
electrically-operated
electrohydraulic drive“ATF DEXRON II D LEV”, SAE 10W type oil

TUTELA GI/A

Hydraulic power steering

Lithium-soap-based grease with molybdenum bisulphate.
Consistency NLGI 2

TUTELA MRM 2

C.V. joints

FMVSS n° 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE J1704,
CUNA NC 956-01 synthetic fluid

TUTELA CAR TOP 4
for Alfa Romeo

Hydraulic brake andclutch control

Protective with antifreeze action, blue color, based on inhibited monoethylene
glycol, CUNA NC 956-16

PARAFLU 11 (*)
orProtective with antifreeze action, red colour, based on inhibited monoethylen
glycol, with O.A.T.-based organic formula, that passes CUNA NC 956-16,
ASTM D 3306 specifications

PARAFLU UP (*)

Cooling ducts
Percentage:
50% down to –35°C

Additive forfuel oil

Additive for fuel oil with protective action for Diesel engines

DIESEL MIX

To be mixed with the fueloil (25 cc per 10 litres)

Windscreen/
rearscreen/headlamp
washer fluid

Mixture of spirits and surface-active agents CUNA NC 956-11

TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL
SC 35

To be used neator diluted

Lubricants and greases
for transmissions

Brake fluid

Protective agent for radiators

Alfawiki.nl(*) IMPORTANT Do not add or mix with fluids with specifications other than the specified ones.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Use

321

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFUEL CONSUMPTION
The fuel consumption values shown in thefollowing tables were established during homologation tests prescribed in specific European Directives.

– an extraurban cycle: this includes
frequent accelerating in all gears, simulating normal extraurban use of the vehicle;
the speed varies between 0 and 120 kph;

The test conditions adopted include the following:– combined consumption: this is calculated by considering a route consisting ofabout 37% urban cycle and 63% extraurban cycle.

– an urban cycle: this includes cold
starting followed by simulation of a mixed
urban route;

Alfawiki.nl

322

WARNING The type of route,traffic conditions, weather conditions, driving style, conditions of
the vehicle, trim level/equipment/
accessories, vehicle load, presenceof roof rack, use of the climate control system, other items that negatively affect the aerodynamics ofthe vehicle or wind resistance leadto different fuel consumption levels than those measured by theabove-mentioned procedures (see“Reducing running costs and environment pollution” in the chapter“Correct use of the car”).

SALOON
VERSIONS

1.6
T.SPARK

1.8
T.SPARK

2.0 JTS

2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.5 V624V

2.5 V6 24V
Q-System

JTD

JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD 16V
Multijet (*)

JTD 20V
Multijet

Urban

11.4

12.1

12.2

12.2

17.5

17.5

7.8

8.0

8.0

8.8

Extraurban

6.4

6.4

6.6

6.6

8.5

8.6

4.7

4.7

4.7

5.3

Combined

8.2

8.5

8.6

8.6

11.8

11.9

5.8

5.9

5.9

6.6

(*) 150 CV version (for versions/markets where applicable)

1.6
T.SPARK

1.8
T.SPARK

2.0 JTS

2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.5 V624V

2.5 V6 24V
Q-System

JTD

JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD 16V
Multijet (*)

JTD 20V
Multijet

Urban

11.5

12.2

12.5

12.5

17.8

18.1

7.9

8.2

8.2

8.9

Extraurban

6.5

6.5

6.8

6.8

8.6

8.8

4.9

4.8

4.8

5.5

Combined

8.3

8.6

8.9

8.9

12.0

12.2

6.0

6.1

6.1

6.7

SPORTWAGONVERSIONSTECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFUEL CONSUMPTION ACCORDING TO DIRECTIVE 1999/100/EC (litres x 100 km)(*) 150 CV version (for versions/markets where applicable)

Alfawiki.nl

323

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CO2 EMISSIONSThe CO2 emission levels shown in the following tables are measured on a mixed cycle.
CO2 EMISSIONS ACCORDING TO DIRECTIVE STANDARD 1999/100/EC (g/km)
SALOONVERSIONS

1.6
T.SPARK

1.8
T.SPARK

2.0 JTS

2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.5 V624V

2.5 V624V

JTD

JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD V6
Multijet (*)

JTD 20V
Multijet

Value (g/km)

195

202

206

206

282

282

155

157

157

175

(*) 150 CV version (for versions/markets where applicable)

SPORTWAGONVERSIONS
Value (g/km)

1.6
T.SPARK

1.8
T.SPARK

2.0 JTS

2.0 JTS
Selespeed

2.5 V624V

2.5 V624V

JTD

JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD V6
Multijet (*)

JTD 20V
Multijet

198

205

212

212

286

291

160

161

161

178

(*) 150 CV version (for versions/markets where applicable)

Alfawiki.nl

324

International automobile code
A
B
CH
CRO
CY
D
DK
E
F
FIN
GB
GBZ
GR
H
I
IRL
IS
L
N
NL
P
S
SLO

Country
Austria
Belgium
Switzerland
Croatia
CyprusGermany
Denmark
Spain
FranceFinlandGreat Britain
Gibraltar
GreeceHungary
Italy
Ireland
Iceland
Luxemburg
NorwayHolland
Portugal
SwedenAlfawiki.nl
Slovenia

Homologation number
G131649J CEPT LPD-A
RTT/D/X1491
BAKOM 97.0516.K.P
LPD-041/97
MCW 129/95 5/1997
G131649J CEPT LPD-D
ARL 9741/Telestyrelsen
E D.G./Tel. 07 97 0647
970235PPLO
FI 97080075
12793
12000/120AG
EK550
HB-23879/97
CEPT-LPD I DGPGF/4/2/03/338862/
FO/0002926/29/10/97
TRA 24/5/60/31
IS-2623-00
L2822/10263-01H
N097000419-R
G131649J CEPT LPD-NL
ICP-044TC-97
UE 970090
N832/00

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSRADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: MINISTERIAL HOMOLOGATIONS

325

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

326

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ABS (wheel anti-lock system)– operation and warnings........... 177
Accessories purchased by
the owner ................................ 166
Additional heater ......................... 135
Additional operations(car maintenance)..................... 251
Additional stop light (3rd stop) 230-297
Air bags, front and side ................ 42– deactivating passenger’s
air bag ................................ 44– front air bags ........................ 42– general cautions ................... 46– passenger side front air bag .... 43– side air bags
(side bag - window bag) ........ 44
Air cleaner................................... 265
Air recirculation ........................... 129
Air vents .............................. 108-109
Alfa 156 Sportwagon ........... 278
Alfa Romeo CODE system ..............
6– operation ..............................
9
Annual inspection programme(car maintenance)..................... 251

Armrests– centre ............................ 23-280– front ..............................
22– rear ............................... 23-280
Ashtray– front .................................... 164– rear .................................... 164
ASR system................................. 181

Battery– advice for prolonging life ........ 269– charging ........................ 242-268– checking the charge ............... 267– maintenance ......................... 266– replacement ......................... 269– starting with an auxiliary
battery ................................ 242
Body– cleaning ............................... 274– marking................................ 299– versions................................ 301
Bodywork paint identification label . 300
Bonnet ....................................... 172
Boot
Alfawiki.nl 317-309– capacity .........................

– current socket ....................... 285– extension ............................. 289– lighting ......................... 171-284– luggage cover ....................... 287– object retainer net .................. 285– oddment compartments .......... 285– opening from inside .. 131-170-282– opening lever ....................... 135– opening with remotecontrol ........................ 8-170-282– passenger compartment
separation net (lower)............ 288– passenger compartment
separation net (upper)............ 288– securing the load ............ 171-283– tailgate closing ............... 171-283– warnings for carrying
luggage.......................... 172-284
Brake and clutch fluid– checking level and topping up .. 263
Brakes– checking fluid level
and topping up ..................... 263– handbrake ........................... 138– specifications......................... 305

Car lifting– with arm hoist ....................... 245– with jack .............................. 245– with workshop hoist .............. 245
Car maintenance..................... 248
Carrying children safely ................ 35
Catalytic converter ....................... 188
Ceiling lights................................ 162– centre rear roof lamp .............. 163– courtesy light......................... 163– front roof light ....................... 162– rear roof light ........................ 163
Centre rear roof lamp.................... 163– bulb replacement ................... 231
Changing battery of key
with remote control ................... 10
Changing bulbs– general instructions ............... 218– replacement .......................... 217– types of bulbs ................. 218-219
Changing wheels.......................... 209– general instructions ................ 207

Charging the battery .............. 242-268
Checking levels ............................ 254– brake and clutch fluid ............. 263– engine coolant....................... 261– engine oil ............................. 257– power steering oil .................. 261– Q-system automatic
gearbox oil............................ 260– Selespeed gearbox oil ............ 259– windscreen/rearscreen/
headlamp washing fluid .......... 264
Child safety device .............. 19-35-279
Children (carrying safely) ............. 35– child’s seats ....................
35-38– presetting for installing the
Isofix type child restraint system 39
Cigar lighter ............................... 164
Cleaning and maintenance– car exterior ........................... 274– car interior ............................ 277– engine compartment ............. 276– fabric seats .......................... 277– leather seats ........................ 277– plastic parts........................... 277– windows............................... 276
Climate control system.................. 108
Alfawiki.nl108-109-110– air vents...................

– controls ................................ 118
Climate control system, automatic
two-zone ................................. 114
Clock.......................... 57-58-59-60-61
Clutch– checking fluid level
and topping up ...................... 263
CO2 emissions ............................. 324
CODE card...................................
7
Compact spare wheel ................... 294– technical data........................ 312
Controls...................................... 135
Correct use of the car............ 189
Courtesy light .............................. 163– bulb replacement ................... 232
Cruise control(constant speed adjustment) ...... 53
Current socket (boot) ................... 285

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Bulbs– general instructions ............... 218– replacement .......................... 217– types of bulbs ................. 218-219

Dashboard ................ 57-58-59-60-61– brighting adjustment............... 63
Dashboard lighting dimming .......... 136
Demisting-defrosting– door mirrors .................... 25-133– rearscreen....................... 26-133– windscreen and front
side windows ........................ 132

327

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Diesel filter ................................. 265
Dimensions ........................... 315-316
Dipped beam headlights– aiming for left-hand/right-hand driving ................... 178– changing bulbs ..................... 224– switching on .........................

48

Direction indicators– changing front bulbs ............... 223– changing rear bulbs ................ 228– changing side bulbs ................ 227– switching on .........................
Door mirrors..........................

49

25-26

Doors
– centralized locking .................

328

19

– child safety lock...............

20-279– opening/closing
from inside .....................

19-278– opening/closing
from outside ...................

18-278– remote control .......................

7– remote locking/unlocking ......

16

Economy and environment-friendly

driving ..................................... 197
Electronic alarm system................. 11– automatic engagement ........... 14– cutting out the siren .............. 15– description ............................ 11– interrupting the alarm ............. 14– ministerial homologation ........ 16– request for additional
emote controls....................... 12– switching off ........................ 13– switching on ......................... 12– volumetric protection ............. 15– when the alarm is triggered ..... 14
Electronic control units ................. 270
Emergency starting ................ 191-205– starting by inertia .................. 207– starting with an auxiliary
battery ................................. 242
Engine– identification codes................. 301– marking ............................... 299– specifications......................... 302
Engine compartment– bonnet ................................. 172
Alfawiki.nl– cleaning................................
276

Engine coolant– checking level and topping up .. 261– temperature gauge
and warning light................... 62
Engine lock system(Alfa Romeo CODE) ...................
6
Engine oil– checking level and topping up .. 257– consumption ......................... 258
Environment– economy and environmentfriendly driving....................... 197– emission reducing devices . 187-188– protecting emission
reducing devices .................... 198– reducing running costs
and environment pollution ....... 195– use of non-toxic materials........ 187
EOBD system............................... 182

First-aid kit ................................ 247
Fix&Go (quick tyre repair kit) ........ 212
Flashing main beam headlights ..... 49
Fluids and lubricants .................... 320
Front foglights– adjustment............................ 177– changing bulbs ..................... 225– switching on.......................... 136

– fuses above the main fusebox.. 236– fuses and relays accessible fromthe glovebox ......................... 236– fuses and relays in engine bay . 236– fuses and relays in the main
fusebox ................................ 235– generalities and cautions ........ 234– list of protected devices .......... 238– specific fuses for Sportwagon
versions................................ 299

Gearshift lever ........................... 139
Getting to know your car ....
6
Glovebox light– changing bulbs ..................... 232
Grab handles.......................... 161-292

Handbrake lever......................... 138
Hazard lights– switching on ......................... 135
Headlight aiming device(corrector)................................ 138
Headlight washer................... 52-274
Headlights– beam adjustment .................. 138– beam adjustment abroad ........ 177
Alfawiki.nl– bulb replacement............. 217-220– compensation for tilt............... 175– gas discharge headlights ......... 176
Headrests– front .................................... 23– rear ............................... 24-279
Horn .......................................... 56

Identification data ....................... 299
Identification labels ...................... 300
Ignition device and steering lock 17-18
In an emergency .................... 205
In the event of a puncture ....... 207-294– changing a wheel................... 209– FIX&GO (quick tyre repair kit) . 212– general instructions ................ 207
In the event of an accident ............ 246– first aid kit ............................ 247– if anybody is injured .............. 246
Inertial fuel cut-off switch .............. 137
Infocenter ................................... 64– access to main menu screen .... 72– control buttons ...................... 66– date setting/time setting ........ 76– default value reset ................. 85– display ................................. 64– display contrast adjustment ..... 84

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Front light units– bulb arrangement................... 220
Front roof light ............................ 162– changing bulbs ...................... 230
Front seats.................................. 21– adjustments .......................... 21– centre armrest ....................... 22– electric heating ..................... 22– headrests.............................. 23– rear pockets .......................... 23
Fuel– consumption ......................... 322– emergency flap opening
device ............................ 186-292– fuel cap ............................... 186– fuel flap................................ 137– inertial fuel cut-off switch ........ 137– level gauge and reserve
warning light ......................... 62– refilling ................................ 319– refuelling ........................ 185-292– specifications......................... 319
Fuel reserve ......................... 62-319
Fuel supply (technical data)........... 303
Fuel tank (capacity) .................... 319
Fuses and relays– fuse summary table................ 238

329

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

330– display rheostat lightadjustment............................ 63– exit menu ............................. 86– General Trip - Trip B ................ 87– initial check........................... 68– language selection ................. 78– menu ................................... 67– programmed maintenance(Service) .............................. 82– speed limit............................ 73– Trip B on/off ......................... 75– units selection ....................... 79– warning/failure buzzer
volume setting....................... 80– “winter” tyres speed limit ....... 81
Instrument cluster ........................ 56
Intelligent washing function(windscreen) ............................ 51
Interiors (cleaning) ...................... 277
Interior lighting– boot lighting ......................... 171– dashboard............................. 136– front .................................... 162– rear ..................................... 163
Internal fittings...................... 161-292
Internal rear-view mirror ............... 25
Isofix (child’s seat)....................... 39

Jack– use ...............................
209– warnings ....................... 207-208

Keys.........................................
– remote control .......................
– remote door locking/unlocking– replacing remote control
battery .................................
– request for additional keys
with remote control ................

6
7
16
10
12

Lifting points .............................. 245
Lights (controls) .......................... 48
Luggage compartment– capacity ......................... 317-318– current socket........................ 285– extension.............................. 289– lighting .......................... 171-284– luggage cover........................ 287– luggage retainer net ............... 285– oddment compartments .......... 285– opening from inside .. 135-170-282– opening lever ........................ 135– opening with remote
Alfawiki.nl 8-170-282
control .....................

– passenger compartment
separation net (lower)............ 288– passenger compartment
separation net (upper)............ 288– reversible net ........................ 283– securing the load ............ 171-283– tailgate closing ............... 171-283– warnings for carrying
luggage.......................... 172-284
Luggage compartment light– bulb replacement ............. 233-297

Main beam headlights– changing bulbs ..................... 226– switching on ......................... 48
Maintenance– additional operations .............. 251– annual inspection programme . 251– checking fluid levels ............... 254– general information ................ 248– scheduled maintenance........... 248– scheduled maintenanceprogramme ........................... 249– warnings .............................. 248
Manual climate control system ....... 11
Mechanical gearbox– lever .................................... 139

Q-system automatic gearbox........ 152– changing bulbs ................ 229-296

Oddment recesses– in the boot ........................... 285– on centre console................... 165– on dashboard ........................ 165
Odometer ...................................

59

Paintwork (maintenance) ............ 275– colour label ........................... 301
Parking....................................... 191
Parking sensors............................ 187
Partial odometer ..........................

63

Performance................................ 314
Pockets and compartments
on front doors ........................... 165
Pollen filter ................................ 266
Power steering– checking fluid level
and topping up ..................... 262
Power windows ...........................

27

Pre-tensioning devices...................

32

Protecting emission reducing
devices ....................................... 198– acoustic warning .................... 159– automatic operation ............... 154– checking the oil level .............. 260– fault signalling....................... 158– manual operating mode/
Q-System activation................ 157– moving off ............................ 152– push starting ......................... 159– selecting automatic/
manual gearshifting................ 153– selecting the driving modes ..... 156– starting the engine ................. 152– stopping the car..................... 157– towing the car ....................... 160

Radio transmitters and cellular

telephones ............................... 167
Rain sensor ................................. 51
Rear fog guards– changing bulbs ............... 227-294– switching on.......................... 136
Rear light units– bulb replacement ................... 227
Rear roof lights ............................ 163– changing bulbs ...................... 231
Alfawiki.nl
Rear seats...................................
23– centre armrest................. 23-280– headrests ....................... 24-279– ski compartment.............. 24-280
Rear suspensions(automatic geometry control) ..... 293
Rearscreen heating................. 26-133
Rearscreen washer ....................... 281– spray jet ............................... 281
Rearscreen wiper– blade replacement ................. 281– operation .............................. 281
Reducing running costs
and environment pollution .......... 197
Refilling ..................................... 319
Remote control ............................ 7-12
– additional remote controls ...... 12– alarm system ........................ 11– boot opening.........................
8– changing the battery .............. 10– door opening-closing...............
7– ministerial homologation ......... 325– remote door locking/unlocking.............................. 16
Rev counter................................. 62
Reversing lights– changing bulbs ................ 227-294

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Number plate lights

331

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

332

Roof bars/ski racks...................... 292
Roof rack provision....................... 174
Rubber hoses .............................. 272

Safe driving ............................... 192– before driving off ................... 192– driving in the fog ................... 194– driving in the rain................... 194– driving on snow and ice .......... 195– driving with ABS .................... 195– mountain driving.................... 194– night driving.......................... 193– when travelling...................... 192
Safeguarding the environment ...... 187
Scheduled maintenanceprogramme .............................. 249
Seat belts ................................... 28– carrying children safely ........... 35– front and rear side beltheight adjustment .................. 31– general instructions ................ 33– maintenance ......................... 34– pretensioners......................... 32– rear central abdominal belt ..... 30– use ...................................... 28
Seats (front and rear) ............
21-23
Selespeed gearbox ....................... 141– automatic operation (CITY) ..... 150– checking the oil level .............. 259– failure signalling .................... 150– moving off ............................ 146– operation with the engine off... 143– parking the vehicle ................. 151– semiautomatic operation(MANUAL) ............................ 148– signalling with the buzzer........ 151– starting the engine ................. 145– stopping the car..................... 148– system activation ................... 142– towing the vehicle.................. 151– turning the engine off ............. 145– warnings .............................. 146
Side lights– changing front bulbs ............... 226– changing rear bulbs ............... 228– switching on.......................... 48
Ski compartment ......................... 24
Snow chains................................ 202
Sound system ...................... 183-293
Sound system presetting
system .............................
183
Spark plugs (technical data) .......... 305
Speedometer............................... 63
Spray jets Alfawiki.nl– windscreen/rearscreen/
headlight .............................. 274
Starting the engine....................... 189– emergency starting .......... 191-205– ignition switch ....................... 17– procedure for JTD versions ....... 190– procedure for petrol versions .... 189– switching off the engine.......... 190– warming the engine ............... 190
Starting with an auxiliary battery ... 242
Steering system– specifications......................... 305– steering wheel adjustments .... 25
Steering lock .............................. 18
Steering wheel– adjustment............................ 25
Steering wheel levers ................... 48
Stop lights– changing bulbs ...................... 228
Sunroof ...................................... 167– emergency operation ............. 169– sliding forwards/backwards..... 168– raising to the quarterlight
position ............................... 168
Sun visors .................................. 166
Symbols .................................... 5-6

– closing .....................
171-283– opening from inside .. 135-170-282– opening with remotecontrol ..................... 8-170-282
Technical specifications .......... 299
Telephone (provision) .................. 166– cellular telephone................... 166– radio transmitters................... 166
Third stop light ...................... 230-297
Tools .......................................... 294
Tow hook ............................ 199-201
Tow rings .................................... 243
Towing the car....................... 160-244
Towing trailers ............................. 199
Transmission– technical data........................ 304
Tyres– changing............................... 209– correct reading....................... 311– FIX&GO(kit for quick tyre repairing)..... 212– in the event of a puncture . 207-294– inflation pressure .................. 307– snow chains ......................... 202– tools and compact spare
wheel housing ....................... 294– types of tyres
and rims ............................... 306– winter tyres........................... 202

Underbody protection.................. 274
Useful accessories ........................ 204

VDC system .............................. 179– ASR function ......................... 181
Vehicle inactivity ......................... 203– removing from storage ........... 204
Volumetric protection .................... 15

Warning lights and indications ....

92

Washing the car– body .................................... 275– engine compartment .............. 276– interiors (cleaning)................. 277
Weights................................ 317-318
Wheel rims ........................... 306-312– correct rim reading ................. 312
Wheels and tyres– FIX&GO (quick tyre repair kit) .. 212– geometry.............................. 313– replacement ......................... 209– snow chains ......................... 202– tyres and rims ...................... 306
Alfawiki.nl– tyre inflationpressure ....... 271-310

Window winders .......................... 28
Windows– cleaning................................ 276
Windscreen washer– checking fluid level
and topping up ...................... 264– “intelligent washing” function . 51
– operation ............................. 50– spray jets.............................. 274
Windscreen wiper– blade replacement ................. 273– rain sensor ........................... 51– operation .............................. 50– spray jets.............................. 274
Winter– snow chains .......................... 202– winter tyres .......................... 202

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Tailgate

Xenon lights– replacing dipped-beamheadlamps ............................ 221– replacing direction indicators .... 223– replacing main beam
headlamps ............................ 222– replacing sidelights ................. 223

333

NOTES

Alfawiki.nl

Alfawiki.nl

Alfawiki.nl

Alfawiki.nl

Alfawiki.nl®

Alfawiki.nl

Always ask your mechanic for®

Your car is factory filled with Selenia

The engine of your car is factory filled with Selenia,
This is an engine oil range which satisfies the most advanced
international specifications. Its superior technical characteristics
allow Selenia to guarantee the highest performance andprotection of your engine.
The Selenia range includes a number of technologically advanced products:
SELENIA 20K ALFA ROMEO
API SL Lubricant which guarantees maximum
wear protection and performance of
aspirated, turbocharged and multivalve engines.
Specific Selenia formulation for Alfa Romeo.

SELENIA TD
Oil for aspirated and turbocharged and multivalve
diesel engines, guarantees excellent engine cleanlinessand stability even at very high temperatures.

SELENIA RACING
This lubricant has been developed as a result of
Selenia's extensive experience in track and rallycompetitions,it maximises engine performancein all kinds of competition use.

SELENIA WR
Oil spccifically designed for common rail Multijet engines.
Particularly effective during cold starts, it guaranteed maximum wear protection and hydraulc tappets control,
reduction in consumption and stabitlity at high temperatures.

The range also includes Selenia 20K, Selenia Performer 5W-30 e 5W-40, Selenia Digitech.

Alfawiki.nl

For further information on Selenia products visit the web site www.flselenia.com.

This supplement describes the main characteristics of the right hand drive version.
For any topic not specifically dealt with in this supplement, refer to the main Owner’s manual which should be thoroughly read to ensurethat the vehicle is used correctly and that the maximum performance is obtained under conditions of safety.

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONRIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

Alfawiki.nl
341

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONDASHBOARD

A0B0611m

fig. 1
1. Side air outlets - 2. Defrosting/demisting vents for side windows - 3. Upper side vents - 4. Passanger’s Air bag - 5. Sound system 6. Engine coolant temperature gauge - 7. Clock - 8. Centre air vents - 9. Infocenter display - 10. Fuel level gauge - 11. Cruise control
lever (where fitted) - 12. Outside lights control lever - 13. Speedometer. - mileage recorder - 14. Check panel - 15. Rev counter 16. Windscreen wiper control lever - 17. Bonnet opening lever - 18. Radio controls on the steering wheel (where applicable) - 19. Ignition switch - 20. Steering wheel lock/release lever - 21. Driver’s Air bag and horns - 22. Controls unit: instrument panel lighting adjustment and healamp diming - 23. Controls for heating, ventilation and climate control - 24. Ashtray and cigar lighter - 25. Hazard warning
lights switch - 26. Glove box.
Alfawiki.nl

342

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONINSTRUMENT PANELA0B0612m

fig. 2 - petrol engine versions
A. Speedometer - B. Mileage recorder and trip meter display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter - E. Engine coolant temperature gauge F. Clock - G. Fuel level gauge - H. Services warning lights.

Alfawiki.nl

WARNING Depending on the version of the vehicle the instrument dials may be black or light grey and the rev counter and speedometer
may vary with regard to the red sector and the clock values.

343

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

A0B0613m

fig. 3 - diesel engine versions
A. Speedometer - B. Mileage recorder and display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter - E. Engine coolant temperature gauge - F. Clock G. Fuel level gauge - H. Services warning lights.
WARNING Depending on the version of the vehicle the instrument dials may be black or light grey and the rev counter and speedometer
may vary with regard to the red sector and the clock values. Alfawiki.nl

344

The display shows:– the mileage on the first line (6 figures)– the trip meter (4 figures).
To reset the trip meter, keep the button(A) pressed for a few seconds.

DASHBOARD LIGHTING
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 4)

HEADLIGHT CORRECTOR(fig. 4)

When the outside lights are on, the dashboard lighting is adjusted pressing button(B).

The control (C) on the plate at the sideof the steering column can be moved to four
positions corresponding to various vehicleloads given below.

Each press of the button (B) cyclically selects one of the three lighting levels provided: low-medium-high.

Both headlights should be adjusted to compensate for vehicle loading.
Position 0: 1 or 2 people occupying front
seats, full fuel tank, on-board equipment
present.

WARNING The trip meter reading is notstored if the battery is disconnected.

Position 1: 5 people on-board.

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONMILEAGE RECORDER WITH
DOUBLE METER DISPLAY(TOTAL AND TRIP)

Position 2: 5 people on-board, luggage
compartment full (50 kg approximately).
Position 3: Driver and 300 kg in luggage
compartment.

A0B0418m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 4345

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONSEATS

Adjusting the heightof the driver’s seat

Adjusting the angleof the backrest

FRONT SEATS (fig. 5)

To raise the seat, pull the lever (B) taking it upwards, then continue operating thelever (up and down) until reaching the required height.

This can be done by turning the knob (C)until the desired position is reached.

WARNING
Adjustments may be madesolely with the car stationary.
Moving the seat backwards
or forwards

To lower the seat, push the lever (B)downwards, then operate the lever (up anddown) until reaching the height required.
WARNING Adjustment must only be carried out when seated in the driver’s seat.

Lift lever (A) and push the seat backwards
or forwards. Once you have let go of thelever, check that the seat is firmly lockedin the runners by trying to move it back andforth.
If the seat is not locked properly, in thecase of collision it might move unexpectedly with clearly dangerous consequences.
A0B0419m

Alfawiki.nl
346

fig. 5

Lumbar adjustmentof the driver’s seat(for versions/markets where applicable)
Adjustment is done by turning the knob(D) until reaching the most comfortable position.

To open the boot pull the lever (A) at theside of the driver’s seat.
AUTOMATIC FUEL CUT-OFF
SWITCH (fig. 6)
This is an automatic safety switch under
the passanger’s seat which is triggered in
the event of crash to interrupt the flow offuel.
WARNING
If a smell of fuel is noted
following an accident, or
the fuel system is leaking, to avoid
the risk of fire do not reset theswitch.

WARNING
Do not operate the boot release lever with the car on
the move.

OPENING THE FUEL FLAP
(fig. 7)
The fuel flap is released from inside the car
raising the front part of the lever (B).

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONOPENING THE BOOT (fig. 7)

CONTROLS

If no leaks are found the vehicle can berestarted. Press button (A) to activate thefuel supply system.
A0B0574m

A0B0421m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 6

fig. 7347

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONHEATING AND CLIMATE CONTROL

A0A0615m

fig. 8
1. Central vents for demisting/defrosting the windscreen - 2. Upper adjustable side vents - 3. Vents for demisting/defrosting the side windows - 4. Movable side outlets - 5. Upper adjustable vent - 6. Central movable and adjustable vents - 7. Front seat floor vents - 8. Rear seatfloor vents - 9. Rear seat adjustable and movable outlets.
Alfawiki.nl

348

ADJUSTING THE SIDE VENTS(fig. 11)

ADJUSTABLE AND MOVABLE
OUTLETSThe vent is fitted with an opening/closing
control.

At the ends of the dashboard there are adjustable vents (A) for ventilating the passenger compartment and fixed vents (B) for
demisting the side windows.

Fig. 12: Front seats (at the ends of thedashboard).

closed.
•) == Completely
Completely open.

Fig. 13: Rear seats (on the console between the seats).

To adjust the air flow of the vents turn thering (C).

ADJUSTING THE CENTRE
VENTS (fig. 10)
Each vent has a lever through which it ispossible to direct the flow of air towards the
persons horizontally.

closed.
•) == Completely
Completely open.

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

ADJUSTING THE UPPER VENT
(fig. 9)Using the opening/closing control it is possible to adjust the air flow rate of the vents.

• = Completely closed.

( = Completely open.

A0B0572m

A0B0573m

A0B0297m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 9fig. 10

fig. 11349

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

To adjust the air flow rate use the fins (A)pressing to open/close.
The air flow is directed by turning the outlets using the fins.

AIR BAGThe key-operated switch (fig. 14) has
two positions:

DEACTIVATING THE
PASSENGER’S AIR BAG

1) Passenger’s Air bag activated: (ON position P) warning light on instrument cluster off; it is absolutely prohibited to carry achild on the front seat.

Should it be absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front seat, the passenger’s
Air bag on the vehicle can be deactivated.
A0B0299m

Deactivation takes place using the car
ignition key to operate the special switch
on the left hand side of the dashboard(fig. 14). Access to the switch is gained
only with the door open.

2) Passenger’s Air bag deactivated:(OFF position F) warning light on instrument cluster on; it is possible to carry achild protected by special restraint systems
on the front seat.
The warning light L on the cluster stays
on permanently until the passenger’s Air bag
is reactivated.
When the door is open, the key can beinserted and removed in both positions.

fig. 12
A0B0289m

A0B0614m

Alfawiki.nl
350

fig. 13

fig. 14

SELESPEED GEARBOX
Below you will find the more significant
particulars of right-hand drive versions.
WARNING As the differences are only
formal, due to the specular position of thecontrols, as far as functioning is concerned,
please refer to the descriptions given for lefthand drive versions.

Fig. 16 shows the steering wheel fittedwith two buttons on the spokes for shifting
the gear engaged up/down.
Fig. 17 shows the position of button A
for selecting the automatic CITY mode.

Fig. 15 shows the gearshift lever withthe lay-out of the movements needed to select the different gears.

A0B0411m

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONWARNINGSERIOUS DANGER:
with a car fittedwith an Air bag on the passenger’sside, do not place a child’s seat on
the front seat facing backwards.
In the case of need, always deactivate the passenger’s Air bag (iffitted) when a child’s seat is placedon the front seat. Even if it is notcompulsory by law, for better protection of adults, you are recommended to activate the Air bag immediately as soon as childtransport is no longer necessary.

fig. 16
A0B0410m

A0B0412m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 15

fig. 17351

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

Q-SYSTEM
AUTOMATICGEARBOX

Fig. 20 shows the position of buttons
A C/S and B ICE for selecting the gearbox operating mode.

IN THE EVENT OF A
BURNT FUSE OR RELAYFUSES IN THE MAIN FUSEBOX(fig. 21 or fig. 22 forversions/markets whereapplicable)

Below you will find the more significant
particulars of right-hand drive versions.

The fuses for the main devices are housed
in a control unit under the dashboard, to theright of the steering column.

WARNING As the differences are only
formal, due to the specular position of thecontrols, as far as functioning is concerned,
please refer to the descriptions given for lefthand drive versions.

A0B0414m

A0B0416m

The illustrations show the gearshift control
lever with the lay-out of the movements
needed to select gears in the automatic
mode fig. 18 and manual mode fig. 19.

fig. 19
A0B0413m

A0B0415m

Alfawiki.nl
352

fig. 18

fig. 20

fig. 21

WARNING In case of doubt, contact an
Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

The graphic symbols which distinguish themain electric component corresponding toeach fuse are given on a label (fig. 23)
on the inner wall of the panel (A-fig. 21).
Some spare fuses are housed at the rightof the control unit; you are advised to replenish the stock of spare fuses when they
are used.

FUSES ABOVE THE MAINFUSEBOX
The protection fuses for some services aregrouped in three containers (fig. 24)
above the main fusebox to which access isgained removing the panel (A-fig. 21 or
A-fig. 22).

A0B0397m

A0B0185m

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

To gain access to them, remove the panel (A-fig. 21 or fig. 22) releasing thetabs (B-fig. 21 or fig. 22) in the direction of the arrow below and unlock thescrew (C-fig. 21 or fig. 22).

A0B0417m

Alfawiki.nl
fig. 22

fig. 23

fig. 24

353

TYRE INFLATION PRESSURES COLD (bar)Tyres
185/65 R15” (▼)
front
rear

Tyres
205/55 R16”(●)
front
rear

Reduced load
(2 occupants)

2.2

2.2

2.4

Full load

2.5

2.5

2.6

Tyres

Tyres

205/60 R15” (▼)

215/45 ZR17” (*)

front

rear

front

rear

2.4

2.2

2.2

2.4

2.4

2.6

2.5

2.5

2.6

2.6

Compact spare wheel
125/80 R15”

4.2(*) = Snow chains may not be used on this tyres(●) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.
(▼) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.
With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified rating. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.
With winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0.2 bar compared with the specified rating.

ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT (litres)
1.6 T.SPARK

1.8 T.SPARK

2.0 JTS

2.5 V6 24V

JTD

JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD 20V
Multijet

4.40

4.40

4.40

5.90

4.50

4.50

5

1.6 T.SPARK

1.8 T.SPARK

2.0 JTS

2.5 V6 24V

JTD

JTD 16V
Multijet

JTD 20V
Multijet

Fuel tank capacity

63

63

63

63

63

63

63

Reserve

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

Quantity for periodical
replacement (also changing filter)

Do not discard used oil in the environment.

REFUELLING (litres)

Only use unleaded petrol with over 95 R.O.N.

AFTER SALESASSISTENZA TECNICA - INGEGNERIA ASSISTENZIALE
Viale Alfa Romeo 20020 Arese (MI) - Italia
Fiat Auto S.p.A.
Pubblication n° 60431326 - 5th Edition - 09/2004
Printed by Satiz - Turin (Italy)

Alfawiki.nl

SERVICEAll rights reserved. Reproduction, even partial, is strictly prohibited without
written permission from Fiat Auto S.p.A
Coordinamento Editoriale Satiz - Torino

Alfawiki.nl